International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
ICRTASET – 2018 PROCEEDINGS VOLUME – II
Date: 30th December 2018
Venue: DS Hotel, Perambalur, Tamilnadu
Organized by
DK International Research Foundation, # 321, Rayal Nagar, North Mathavi Road, Perambalur, Tamilnadu, India Website: www.dkirf.org Email: [email protected], [email protected] Contact Number: +91 95 00 77 99 68 Copyright @ 2018
All rights reserved
No part of the publication may be produced, stored in retrieval system, or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of the publisher.
All data, information, views, opinions, charts, tables, figures, graphs that are published are the sole responsibilities of the authors.
Editor Dr. A. DINESH KUMAR, Chief Executive Officer, DK International Research Foundation, Perambalur, Tamilnadu
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5
Published by DK International Research Foundation, # 321, Rayal Nagar, North Mathavi Road, Perambalur, Tamilnadu, India
Supporting Organizations
International American Council for Research & Development, United States of America International Economics University, Velaana Building, Ameeru Ahmed Magu, Republic of Maldives Srinivas University, Srinivas Nagar, Mukka, Mangaluru, Karnataka, India – Publication Partner California Public University, Northern Mariana Islands, United States of America Balls Bridge University, Roseau, Dominica Commonwealth Open University, British Virgin Islands, United Kingdom West Coast University, Panama, Central America Commonwealth University, London, United Kingdom University of Swahili Foundation, Azuero Business Center, Avenida Perez Chitre, Panama, Republica de Panama Samata Sahitya Academy, Anand Nagar, Yavatmal, Maharashtra RIAS Civil Services Academy (Center for Successful Learning), New Delhi, India Thirty One Ventures, Ajanta Square, Borivali West, Mumbai, Maharashtra Dreamzone Group, Techops Garden, Techops City, Umred Road, Nagpur, Maharashtra ACME Education and Human Welfare Trust, Sivagangai, Tamilnadu ETI Sarkar Memorial Foundation Trust, Kolkata Educ Excel International (Academically International), Madurai, Tamilnadu Jana Mana Foundtaion, Gurubhavan Road, Rajendra Nagar, Haveri, Karnataka
Chief Guests
Dr. S. P. Gupta, IAS Dr. B. Ramaswamy, Chairman, Animal Welfare Board of President, Suny State University, India (Ministry of Environment, New York, USA & Advisor, National Forest and Climate Change), Commission for Protection of Child Government of India Rights, Government of India
Guest of Honour
Dr. Tanmoy Rudra, Dr. Monojit Singha Executive Secretary, Confederation of Executive Secretary, Newspapers Indian Universities, New Delhi & Association of India, # 311 Shanti Director, Scientific and Gopal Chamber, Shakarpur, New Environmental Research Institute, Delhi, India Kolkata, West Bengal
Honorary Chief Patron Dr. B. Ramaswamy, President, Suny State University, New York, USA & Advisor, National Commission for Protection of Child Rights, Government of India & Pro Vice Chancellor, Oriental University, Indore, Madhya Pradesh
Chief Patron Mr. C. Ashok Kumar, Founder & Chairman, DK International Research Foundation, Perambalur, Tamilnadu
Conference Chairman Dr. Subha Ganguly, Associate Professor & Head, Department of Veterinary Microbiology, Arawali Veterinary College, N.H – 52 Jaipur Road, V.P.O Bajor, Sikar, Rajasthan
Conference Secretary Dr. S. Velu. M. Srirangan, CEO, Dreamzone Group, Bungalow Number G- 90, Techops Garden, Techops City, B/H Sanjuba CBSE School, Near Toll Nakka, Umred Road, Nagpur, Maharashtra
International Conference Convener Dr. Saber Mohamed Abd-Allah, Honorary Vice President, International American Council for Research and Development, USA
Conference Convener Dr. A. Dinesh Kumar, Chief Executive Officer, DK International Research Foundation, Perambalur, Tamilnadu International Advisory Committee Members
Dr. Hamid Saremi, Vice Chancellor, Islamic Azad University, Quchan Branch, Quchan, Iran Dr. Engr. Ayub Nabi Khan, Pro Vice Chancellor, BGMEA University of Fashion & Technology (BUFT), Dhaka, Bangladesh Dr. Saber Mohamed Abd-Allah, Chairman, Reproductive Biology & Genetics Society, Singapore & Professor of Theriogenology, Faculty of Veterinary Medicine, Beni Suef University, Egypt Dr. Fisnik Rr. Aliaj, Senior Researcher & Dean, Department of Physics, FMNS, University of Prishtina, Prishtina, Kosovo Dr. Phongsak Phakamach, The Army Research and Development Office, Royal Thai Army, Ministry of Defence, Thailand Dr. Solomiia Stepanivna Fedushko, Associate Dean, Bachelor Studies of Institute of Humanities & Social Sciences, Lviv Polytechnic National University, Lviv Oblast, Ukraine Dr. Yusuf Abdul Azeez, Director & Professor, College of Law, University of Modern Sciences (UMS), Dubai, United Arab Emirates Dr. Elsanosy Mohamed Elamin Mukhtar, Head & Chairman, Department of Electrical Engineering, Faculty of Engineering, University of Kordofan, Al-Ubayyid, North Kurdufan, Sudan Dr. Paolo Di Sia, School of Engineering and Department of Neuroscience, University of Padova, Italy Dr. Venkatraman Sundhar, Chancellor, International Economics University, Velaana Building, Ameeru Ahmed Magu, Republic of Maldives Dr. Hamid Ali Abed AL-Asadi, Head & Chairperson, Department of Computer Science, Faculty of Education for Pure Science, Basra University, Basra, Iraq
National Advisory Committee Members
Dr. Gowri Shankar, Director (National Institute of Animal Welfare), Deputy Secretary (AW) & Member Secretary (CPCSEA), Government of India, Ministry of Environment, Forest & Climate Change, New Delhi Dr. P. S. Aithal, Vice Chancellor, Srinivas University, Srinivas Nagar, Mukka, Mangaluru, Karnataka Dr. Ashutosh Das, Pro Vice Chancellor & Director, Centre for Research & Development, PRIST University, Thanjavur, Tamilnadu Dr. Manjappa D Hosamane, Former Vice Chancellor, Professor of Economics, Department of Studies in Economics & Cooperation, University of Mysore, Manasagangotri, Karnataka Dr. B. Chandrasekar, Registrar, Indraprastha Institute of Information Technology, Okhla Industrial Estate, Phase III, New Delhi Dr. Th. Nandalal Singh, Chairperson, Department of Physical Education, Panjab University, Chandigarh Dr. S. Chelliah, Professor, Head & Chairperson, School of English & Foreign Languages, School of Indian Languages, Madurai Kamaraj University, Madurai, Tamilnadu Dr. N. Lokendra Singh, Dean & Professor, School of Social Science, Manipur University (A Central University), Indo-Myanmar Road, Canchipur, Imphal, Manipur Dr. V. Khanaa, Dean, Department of Information Technology, Bharath Institute of Higher Education and Research, Chennai, Tamilnadu. Dr. K. Chandrasekaran, Chairperson School of Education, Professor & Head, Department of Physical Education, Madurai Kamaraj University, Madurai, Tamilnadu Dr. Sunil Kumar, Professor & Deputy Registrar, Alliance School of Business, Chikkahagade Cross, Chandapura – Anekal Main Road, Anekal, Bengaluru, Karnataka
Organizing Committee Members
Dr. Muhammad Saeed, Assistant Professor, Department of Agricultural Sciences, University of Haripur, Khyber Pakhtunkhwa, Pakistan Dr. Rangika S. Hikkaduwa Koralege, Postdoctoral Research Fellow, Department of Chemical Engineering, Oklahoma State University, United States of America Dr. Elham Hashemizadeh, Assistant Professor, Department of Mathematics, College of Basic Sciences, Karaj Branch, Islamic Azad University, Alborz, Iran Dr. Alireza Heidari, Faculty of Chemistry, California South University (CSU), Irvine, California, United States of America Dr. Pratibhamoy Das, Post Researcher, Einstein Foundation Fellow, International Mathematical Union, Institute for Mathematics, Technical University of Berlin, Germany Dr. Ruth Trubnik, Associate Professor of Mathematics and Physics, Delaware Valley University, Doylestown, United States of America Dr. Ahmed Maajoon Alenezi, Dean, Deanship of E-learning & Distance Learning, Northern Border University, Arar, Ministry of Higher Education, Saudi Arabia Dr. Md. Mizanur Rahman, Assistant Professor, Department of Business Administration, Metropolitan University, Sylhet, Bangladesh Dr. Zairi Ismael Rizman, Senior Lecturer, Faculty of Electrical Engineering, Universiti Teknologi MARA (UiTM) (Terengganu), Malaysia Dr. Pouya Derakhshan-Barjoei, Assistant Professor, Head of Telecommunication Group, Islamic Azad University, Naein Branch, Iran Dr. Moataz Mostafa El-Nahas Ali El-Sherbini, Assistant Lecturer, Faculty of engineering, Shoubra – Benha University, Egypt Dr. Lucia Filgueiras Braga, Professor, Department of Botany, University of the State of Mato Grosso State, Campus of Alta Floresta, Tropical Garden, Alta Floresta, Brazil Dr. Sreekanth Rallapalli, Senior Lecturer, Faculty of Computing, Botho University, Gabarone, Botswana, Africa Dr. Mohamed Abdel Fattah Ashabrawy Moustafa, Assistant Professor, Computer Science in Reactors Department, Nuclear Research Center, Egypt Dr. Mohd Nazri Ismail, Associate Professor, Department of Computer Science, University Pertahanan National Malaysia, Malaysia Dr. Kai Long Hsiao, Professor, Department of Digital Recreation & Game Design, Taiwan Shoufu University, 168, Nansh Li, Madou District, Tainan, Taiwan Dr. Shahid Ahmad Rajput, Professor, Department of Architecture and Design, Comsats Institute of Information Technology, Islamabad, Pakistan Dr. Saeed Nazari, Research Associate, Environmental and Occupational Health, Newcastle University, Australia Dr. Lembo Tanning, Faculty of Transport, Tallinna Tehnikakorgkool University of Applied Sciences, Guest lecturer of Tallinn University of Technology, Tallinn, Estonia Dr. Flordeliza P. Ferrer, Professor, Department of Mathematics, College of Science, Pamantasan Lungsod Maynila, University of the City of Manila, Philippines Dr. K. Senthilkannan, Research and Development, Edayathangudy G.S Pillay Arts & Science College, Nagapattinam, Tamilnadu Dr. P. Mohan, Principal, Sree Kavitha Institute of Management, Khammam, Telangana Dr. M. Suresh Kumar, Director of Physical Education, Ganesar College of Arts and Science, Melaisivapuri, Ponnamaravathy, Pudukkottai, Tamilnadu Dr. K. Veerakumar, Assistant Professor, Department of Commerce (BPS), NGM College, Pollachi, Tamilnadu Dr. M. Kannadhasan, Assistant Professor, Department of English, Thiruvalluvar University, Vellore, Tamilnadu Dr. P. Mathuraswamy, Associate Professor, Department of Management Studies, Jeppiaar Engineering College, Chennai, Tamilnadu Dr. P. Pachaiyappan, Assistant Professor, GRT College of Education, Tiruttani, Tamilnadu Dr. D. Rajasekar, Professor, AMET Business School, AMET Deemed to be University, Chennai, Tamilnadu Dr. A. C. Lal Kumar, Assistant Professor, G.E.T College of Education, Paradarami, Gudiyattam, Vellore, Tamilnadu Dr. Ramakrishnan Sethu, Post Doctoral Research Associate, Department of Microbiology, University of Illinois Urbana-Champaign, Illinos, United States of America Dr. M. P. Kulandaivel, Mathematics Section, Department of Information Technology, Al Musanna College of Technology, Al Muladha, Muscat, Sultanate of Oman
Members of DKIRF
Mr. C. Ashok Kumar, Founder & Chairman Mrs. K. Enbanila, Vice Chairman Mr. S. Madhavan, Director & Advisor Dr. A. Dinesh Kumar, Chief Executive Officer Dr. M. Kathiravan, Chief Administrative Officer Dr. M. Vasuki, General Manager Dr. M. Suresh Kumar, Executive Director (Hon) Mr. K. Nallusamy, Public Relation Officer Mr. P. Rengaraju, Web Developer
About the DKIRF DK International Research Foundation (DKIRF) established in 2017 is an educational service organization. DKIRF was envisioned and founded by Mr. C. Ashok Kumar. The Foundation aims to accelerate use of modern science for sustainable agricultural and rural development. DKIRF focuses specifically on research and development work and to own, establish, maintain laboratories, experiment centres, assist, subsidise any Government Semi Government, Private, Universities for Scientific and other research work and inventions related to the agro based business of the company by providing or contributing to the remuneration of research, scientific or technical professors, teachers for technical researchers, providing or contributing to the awards, prizes, scholarships, grants, sponsorships to the students or others to encourage them. Approved by: Government of India (Estd. u/s 3 of the Indian Trust Act, 1882), 12AA UR No: AACTD8963H/05/18-19T-1180 & Pan No: AACTD8963H
About the Conference International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering & Technology is a prestigious event organized with a motivation to provide an excellent international platform for the academicians, researchers, engineers, industrial participants and budding students around the world to share their research findings with the global experts. ICRTASET-2018 will be held in Perambalur, India on 30th December 2018. The key intention of ICRTASET-2018 is to provide opportunity for the global participants to share their ideas and experience in person with their peers expected to join from different parts on the world. In addition this gathering will help the delegates to establish research or business relations as well as to find international linkage for future collaborations in their career path. We hope that ICRTASET-2018 outcome will lead to significant contributions to the knowledge base in these up-to-date scientific fields in scope. This Conference is sponsored by International American Council for Research and Development, USA & DK International Research Foundation. The conference would offer a large number of invited lectures from renowned speakers all over the country. The Best paper awards will be given for the papers judged to make the most significant contribution to the conference.
Objective of the Conference To encourage regional and international communication and collaboration; promote professional interaction and lifelong learning; recognize outstanding contributions of individuals and organizations. To promote scientific and educational activities towards the advancement of the theory and practice of all Engineering and Technology fields and related arts and sciences. To foster and conduct collaborative Multidisciplinary research in state of the art methodologies and technologies within its areas of expertise.
Conference Theme New and Expanding Horizons in Research Pursuits in Our Current Social and Scientific Scenario Worldwide
CONTENTS
S.No Article & Author Name Page No
On the Stability of the Linear Mapping in Banach Space 1 Modules and Pexider Equation 1 Dr. M. Mary Jansirani, K. Jamshida & P. Saranya
Need of Creative Classroom Environment in Education 2 10 Dr. A. Rajeswari
Recent Trends and Limitations in Higher Education in 3 India 14 Dr. Sandeep R. Hatewar
Developing Career Intelligence Among Prospective Teachers 4 18 Dr. P. Pachaiyappan
White Label ATMs (WLAs) - A Lead of Non Banks in 5 Cashless Economy in India 21 Dr. S. Bulomine Regi & Dr. S. Anthony Rahul Golden
Soft Skills Approach to Human Development 6 25 Dr. A. Magalingam
A Study on the Multidimensionality of Factor Analysis 7 with Latent Structure Towards Logistics Sector 28 Dr. D. Rajasekar A Research Article on Clustering Analysis Based on 8 Optimization Algorithm for Data Mining 33 M. Pavithra A Study on “Whether Taxation is a Selling Tool for Life Insurance” With Reference to ICICI Prudential Limited – 9 41 Coimbatore S. Tamilmani A Study on Export Logistics Cost for Shippers of Marine Products 10 47 Dr. J. Rengamani, Dr. R. Srinivasan & Dr. S. Poongavanam
Study of Effect of Anxiety on Academic Achievement of Senior Secondary School Students in Relation to their 11 50 Intelligence Deepika Mehta
Performance Evaluation of Edge Detectors - Adaptive Thresholding Based Edge Detection for Brain Tumor from 12 59 MR Images Dr. S. Manikandan, B. Chitradevi & S. Devi Thirumagal Sociological Study of Labour Welfare Measures in KSRTC - 13 Special Reference to Bangalore City 66 Dr. N. Parameshwara Influence of GGBFS on Strength and Permeability 14 Properties of Concrete with M Sand 73 Dr. M. Devi
Personality Intelligence Model 15 79 Dr. M. Umamaheswari
Enhancement of Durability Properties in Fly Ash Blended 16 Concrete Using Diethylamine 89 Dr. V. Rajkumar Response of Sweet Corn (Zea mays L. saccharata) Cultivars to Fertility Levels in Medium Black Soils of Northern 17 94 Transitional Zone of Karnataka Favida Begum & R. Basvarajappa
Impact of GST on Real Estates 18 100 Dr. S. Jeyalashmi Verse Majority Neighborhood Number for Grid Graph 19 105 Paulraj Jayasimman. I & Dhivya. T
Assessment by Degree Similarity Measures of Fuzzy Sets 20 Theory on Supply Chain Performance 107 Santosh Kumar Sahu
ICT: Uses in Teacher Education 21 114 Dr. Wilson
Implementation of Prepaid System in Electricity Control 22 Using Embedded Technique 117 L. Arunraja & L. Dhatchinamurthy
MOOC – A Vital Mechanism for Learning 23 121 Dr. J. E. Merlin Sasikala
An Analysis of the Forex Market in Tirupur 24 124 Dr. S. Saikrishnan
Naked Realities in Norman Mailer’s the Naked and the 25 Dead 128 Dr. Manju Kumari. K A Brief Review of Speech Enhancement Techniques and 26 Implementation of Fast Adaptive Kalman Filtering 130 V. Srinivasarao & Y. Arpitha Study on Migratory Birds in Winter Season of Nandurmadhmeshwar Bird Sanctuary, District Nashik, 27 137 Maharashtra Gadekar Vipul Sanjay & Khairnar Shrikant Sanjayrao Learning Approach Through Flipped Mode Support 28 Mechanism- An Analysis 145 Dr. T. Ravichandran
A Study on the Performance of Major Spices in India 29 149 Dr. R. Arun Impact of FDI on Employment Generation and 30 GDP Growth in India – A Study 157 Gunda. Srinivas & Dr. Ch. Srinivas Impact of Capital Market Reforms on Indian Stock Market – 31 Pre and Post Globalisation 172 Akula Sriinivas Utilization and Mechanical Testing of Scraped Glass 32 Powder Loaded with GFRP Composites 179 Lokesh. K. S CBSRP Routing Protocol for Secure and Efficient Data 33 Communication for Cluster Based Wireless Sensor Network 185 Dr. T. Lalitha, Devan. M & Mohan Das. R
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
ON THE STABILITY OF THE LINEAR MAPPING IN BANACH SPACE MODULES AND PEXIDER EQUATION
Dr.M.MARY JANSIRANI1, K.JAMSHIDA2 & P.SARANYA3
1Head &Assistant Professor,Department of Mathematics,Thanthai Hans Roever College (Autonomous),Perambalur,TamilNadu. [email protected] 2&3Research scholars, Thanthai Hans Roever College(Autonomous),Perambalur, Tamil Nadu. ABSTRACT
Let BB12, be two Banach space and let f: B12 B be mapping that is linear mapping S. M.Ulam posed the problem Banach spaces for a linear mapping near an approximately linear mapping to exist and the generalized Hypers-Ulam-Rassias stability of the linear mapping in Banach modules over a unital Banach algebra and also proceed the pexider equation by Hypers-Ulam-Rassias stability.
KEYWORDS Stability, Linear mapping, Banach space, Banach modules, pexider equation.
INTRODUCTION The Stability of two Banach space first posed the problem by S.M.Ulam In 1940.The stability of functional equation was first studied by Ulam [2]. Let B1 and B2 be Banach spaces. In 1941 Hyers [3] showed that if 0 and f: B12 B such that
f()()() x y f x f y for all x, y B1
Then there exist a unique additive mapping T:BB12 such that f( x ) T (x) for all x, y B 1
Consider f:BB12 to be a mapping such that fx(t ) is continuous for t for each x , then T is a linear mapping. Assume that these exist constants 0 and p[0,1) such that f( x y ) f ( x ) f (y) , for any x, y B1 xypp for all x, y B1 . Th.M.Rassias [4] showed that there exist a unique - linear mapping T:BB12 such that
f( x ) T (x) 2 p x for any x B1 x p 22 p for all x B1 . Gajda [5] generalized the Rassias result. The stability problems of functional equations have been investigated in several papers [6,7,8,9].
M1 Throughout this paper, Let B be a unital Banach algebra with norm . ,B1 { a B / a 1}, and let B and BM2 be left Banach B -modules with norms . and . respectively [10]. Let G be an abelian group and X a Banach space. Denote by :GG [0, ) a mapping such j j 11 j that (x , y ) 2 (2 x ,2 y) j1 for all x, y G . If f : G X is a mapping satisfying f()()()(,) x y f x f y x y for all x, y G , then there exists a unique mapping T:G X such that T(x y) T(x) T(y) , for all x, y G and
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 1
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
f(x ) T ( x ) ( x ,x) , for all xG . In this paper, using an idea of Gavruta we prove a generalization of the stability of approximately additive mappings in the spririt of Hyers, Ulam, and Rassias. Let (XY , ),( , ) be abelian groups and f,,: g h X Y be mappings. f(x y) g(x) h(y) 0 for all x, y X , we call it a Pexider equation [11]. The main purpose of this paper is to investigate the stability of the generalized functional equation of Pexider type. Throughout this paper, we denote by (,)G an ablian group, by (,.)X a Banach space, and by :G G [0, ) a mapping such that (2j1x ,0) (0,2 j 1 x ) (2 j 1 x ,2 j 1 x) (2nnxy ,2 ) ()x and 0 as n for all 2 j 2n j1 x, y G .
STABILITY
Theorem 2.1. Consider BB12, to be two Banach space, and let f: B12 B be a mapping such that f() tx is continuous in t for each fixed x . Assume that there exists 0 and p[0,1) such that f()()() x y f x f y for any x, y B1 . (1) xypp
Then there exists a unique linear mapping T:BB12 such that f(x ) T ( x ) 2 for any x B1 . (2) x p 22 p Proof. Claim that [f(2nnx )] / 2 f ( x ) n1 mp( 1) (3) p 2 x m0 For any integer n , and some 0 . The verification of (3) follows by induction on n . Indeed the case n 1 is clear because by the hypothesis we can find , that is greater or equal to zero, and p such that 01p with [f(2x )]/ 2 f ( x ) (4) x p Assume now that (3) holds and we want to prove it for the case (n 1) . However this is true because by (3) we obtain [f(22)]/2nnx f (2) x n1 mp( 1) p 2 x m0 1 [f(2nn11x )]/2 f (2) x 2 n Therefore mp( 1) p 2 x m1 By the triangle inequality we obtain n 1 1 1 1 p n1 n 1 m ( p 1) . nn11[f(2x )] f ( x ) [f(2 x )] f (2 x ) [f(2 x )] f ( x ) x 2 2 2 2 2 m0
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 2
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
1 [f(2n1 x )] f ( x ) 2n1 n Thus mp( 1) and (3) is valid for any integer n . It follows then that p 2 x m0 1 [f(2n x )] f ( x ) 2n 2 (5) x p 22 p
2 Because 2mp( 1) converges to , as 01p . However, for mn0 , m0 22 p 1 1 1 1 2 p [f(2)]mx f (2) n x [f(2)] m x f (2) n x 2 n( p 1) . x . 2m 2 n 2 n 2 m n 2 2 p 11 Therefore lim [f(2mnx )] f (2 x ) 0 . x 22mn 1 But B , as a Banach space, is complete, thus the sequence {fx (2n )} converges. Set 2 2n
1 n T( x ) limn [ f (2 x )] it follows that x 2 pp pp f[2(n x y )] f [2] n x f [2] n y (2 n x 2 n y ) 2np (xy )
1 pp Therefore f[2(n x y )][2][2]2 f n x f n y n( p 1) ( x y ) Or 2n 1 pp limf [2n ( x y )] f [2 n x ] f [2 n y ] lim 2 n( p 1) ( x y ) nn2n 1 1 1 limf [2n ( x y )] lim f [2 n x ] lim f [2 n y ] 0 nn n n n n 2 2 2
Or T(x y ) T ( x ) T ( y ) 0, for any x, y B1
T(x y ) T ( x ) T ( y ) for all x, y B1
Since T(x y ) T ( x ) T ( y ) for any x, y B1 , T(rx ) rT ( x ) for any rational number r . Fix x B and B (the dual space of B ). Consider the mapping t ( T ( tx )) ( t ) . 01 2 2 Then : R R satisfies the property that (a b) (a) (b) ,. i.e. is a group homomorphism. nn Moreover is a Borel function, because of the following reasoning. Let (t) lim (f (2 tx0 )) / 2 and n nn n (t) (f (2 tx0 )) / 2 . Then n (t) are continuous functions. But (t) is the pointwise limit of continuous functions, thus (t) is a Borelfunction . It is a known fact that if : RRnn is a function such that is a group homomorphism, i.e. (xy ) (x) (y) and is a measurable function, then is continuous. In fact this statement is also true if we replace Rn by any separable, locally compact abelian group
(see for example: W.Rudin [12] therefore (t) is a continuous function. Let aR . Then ar lim n , where x
{}rn is a sequence of rational numbers. Hence
(at) (t limrn ) lim ( tr n ) (lim r n ) (t) a ( t ). n n n Therefore (ta ) a ( t ) for any aR . Thus T(ax ) aT ( x ) for any aR . Hence T is a linear mapping. From (5) we obtain
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 3
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
nn [f (2 x )] / 2 f ( x ) 2 lim lim nnx p 22 p
Or equivalently T()() x f x 2 , where p , (6) x p 22 Thus we have obtained (2). We want now to prove that T is the unique such linear mapping. Assume that there exists another one, denoted by g:BB12 such that T()() x g x , x B1 . Then there exists a constant 1 , greater or equal to zero, and q such that 01q with g(x ) f ( x ) 1 (7) x q By the triangle inequality and (6) we obtain pq Txgx () Txfx () () fxg () (x) x 1 x Therefore 1 1 1 T(x ) g ( x ) T(n x ) g (n x ) T(n x ) g (n x ) n n n
1 p q p q (nx xn ) n pq11 x n x . n 11
Thus lim T(x ) g ( x ) 0 for all x B1 and hence T()() x g x for all x B1 . Q.E.D. n This solves a problem posed by S.M.Ulam [13] [14]: When does a linear mapping near an ―approximately linear‖ mapping exist? The case p 0 was answered by D.H.Hyers [3]. Thus we have succeeded here to give a generalized solution to Ulam‘s problem.
STABILITY OF THE LINEAR MAPPING IN BANACH MODULES In this section, we prove the generalized Hyers-Ulam-Rassias stability of the linear mapping in Banach modules over a unitalBanach algebra. MM MM Theorem.2.1. Let f: B12 B be a mapping for which there exists a function :BB11 [0, ) such that k k k i)(x , y ) 2 (2 x ,2 y ) ii) f()()()(,) ax ay af x af y x y for all aB 1 and k0 M all x, y B 1 . If fx(t ) is continuous in t for each fixed xBM1 then there exists a unique B -linear
MM 1 mapping T:BB12 such that f( x ) T x) ( x , x) for all xBM1 . 2 Proof. By the Gavruta result [15], it follows from the second inequality of the statement for a 1 that there exists a unique additive mapping T:BBMM12 satisfying the inequality (ii). The mapping MM T:BB12 was given by T( x ) lim f (2nn x ) / 2 for all xBM1 . By the same reasoning as the n proof of [4], the additive mapping T:BBMM12 is -linear.
By the assumption, for each aB 1 , f(2n ax )2 af (2 n1 x) (2 n 1 x ,2 n 1 x)
M for all xBM1 . Using the fact that for each aB and each z B2 az K a. z for some K 0 , one can show that n n11 n n nn11 af(2)2 x af (2 x) K a . f (2)2(2 x f x) Kx(2 ,2 x) for all xBM1
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 4
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
f(2nn ax ) af (2 x) f(2n ax ) af (2 n11 x) 2(2 af n x ) af (2x) n
n1 n 1 n 1 n 1 for all and all M1 . (2x ,2 x) K (2 x ,2 x) aB 1 xB
n n n M1 Thus 2f (2 ax ) af (2 x) 0 as n for all aB 1 and all xB . Hence f(2nn ax ) af (2 x ) a T(a x ) lim lim aT ( x ) for each aB 1 . Since aa . for each nn22nn a a B( a 0), ab Txby(a ) Tax ( ) Tby ( ) T( a . x ) Tb ( . y) ab ab a.T x b . T y ab ab a. T( x ) b . T (y) ab
aT()() x bT y M for all a, b B ( a , b 0) and all x, y B 1 . And T(0 x ) 0 T (x) for all xBM1 . So the unique additive mapping T:BBMM12 is a B -linear mapping, as desired. Theorem 3.2 Let B be a complex unitalBanach *-algebra, and B the set of positive elements in B . Let MM f:BBMM12 be a mapping for which there exists a function :BB12 [0,1) satisfying the inequality (i) such that f( ax ay ) af (x) a f(y) ( x , y ) for all a(){} B B i and all 1 M x, y B 1 . If f (tx) is continuous in t for each fixed xBM1 , then there exists a unique B -linear mapping T:BBMM12 satisfying the inequality (ii). Proof. By the same reasoning as the proof of theorem 3.1, there exists a unique -linear mapping T:BBMM12 satiafying the inequality (ii) By the same method as the proof of theorem 3.1, one can obtain that nn f(2 ax ) af (2 x ) T(a x ) lim lim aT ( x ) for each a(){} B1 B i , and that nn22nn , , M1 , , M1 . T(a x ) aT (x) aB xB T(i x ) iT (x) xB a a** a a aa * aa * for any element a i , and and are self adjoint elements, furthermore, 22i 2 2i a a**** a a a a a a a ( ) ( ) ii ( ) ( ) 2 2 2ii 2 a a**** a a a a a a where (),(),(),() ii are positive elements [16]. So 2 2 2ii 2
a a**** a a a a a a T(ax)T ( ) x ( ) x i ( ) x i ( ) x 2 2 2ii 2 a a**** a a a a a a ( ) T(x) ( ) T( x) ( ) T(ix) ( ) T ( ix ) 2 2 2ii 2
a a**** a a a a a a M ( ) ( ) i ( ) i( ) T ( x ) aT(x) for all aB and all xB 1 . 2 2 2ii 2 Hence M for all and all 1 , as desired. Txby(a ) TxT (a ) (bx) aTx ( ) bT (y) a, b B x, y B
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 5
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
MM Theorem 3.3. Let f:BBMM12 be a mapping for which there exists a function :BB11 [0, ) satisfying the inequality (i) such that af( x y ) f (a) x f (a) y (,) x y for all aB and all x, y BM1 . If fx(t ) is continuous in 1 MM t for each fixed xBM1 , then there exists a unique B -linear mapping T:BB12 satisfying the inequality (ii). Proof. By the same reasoning as the proof of theorem 3.1, there exists a unique -linear mapping T:BBMM12 satisfying the inequality (ii).
By the assumption, for each aB 1 , n n1 n 1 n 1 af(2)2(2 x f ax ) (2 x ,2 x ) for all xBM1
af(2nn x ) f (2 ax ) af(2)2(2n x f n11 ax ) 2(2 f n ax ) f (2 n ax )
n1 n 1 n 1 n 1 for all and all M1 . (2x ,2 x ) (2 ax ,2 ax ) aB 1 xB
n n n M1 2af (2 x ) f (2 ax ) 0 as n for all aB 1 and all xB . af(2nn x ) f (2 ax ) Hence aT( x ) limnn lim T ( ax ) for all aB 1 . xx22 The rest of the proof is the same as the proof of theorem 3.1. so the unique -linear mapping T:BBMM12 is a B -linear mapping, as desired. Theorem 3.4. Let f,g,h :GX be mapping satisfying the inequality f( x y ) g (x) h (y) ( x , y ) (1) for all x, yG . Then there exists a unique additive mapping T:GX such that f( x ) T ( x ) g (0) h (0) ( x ) , (2) g(x ) T ( x ) g (0) 2 h (0) ( x ,0) ( x ) , (3) h(x ) T ( x ) 2 g (0) h (0) (0,x) ( x ) (4) for all x, yG . Proof. For xy inequality (1) implies f(2 x ) g (x) h (x) ( x , x ) (5) for all x G . Let y 0 in (1). Then we have f( x ) g (x) h (0) ( x ,0) (6) for all x G from (6), g(x ) f ( x ) h (0) (x,0) (7) for all x G . For x 0 inequality (1) implies f(y)g (0) h(y) (0,y) (8) for all yG . Thus, h(x)f (x) g(0) (0,x) (9) For all x G . Let ux( ) h(0) g(0) (0,x) (x,0) (x,x) . Using the inequalities (5),(7), and (9), we have fxfxfxgx(2 ) 2 ( ) (2 ) ( ) h(x) g(x) f(x) h( xfx ) ( ) hg(0) (0) (0,x) (x,0) (x,x) ux() (10)
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 6
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology for all x G . Replacing x and 2x in (10), u(2 x ) f (22 x ) 2 f (2 x ) (11) for all x G . Then it is clear that fx(2)22 2 fx () fxfx (2)2(2) 2 2 fxfx (2)2() (12) ux(2 ) 2u(x) for all x G . Applying an induction argument to n we have n 21n j n j f(2 x ) 2 f ( x ) 2 u (2 x ) (13) j1 for all x G . We claim that (13) holds for n 1. Indeed, substituting 2x for x in (13) we obtain n n1 n j 1 n 1 j f(2 x )2(2) f x 2 u (2 x ) (14) j1 for all x G . Hence fx(2n1 )2 n 1 fxfx () (2 n 1 )2 n fx (2) 2 n fxfx (2)2()
n j11 n j n 2u (2 x ) 2 u ( x ) j1 n1 j11 n j 2ux (2 ) (15) j1 For all x G . Then we get from (13) n n n j 1 n n j 2f (2 x ) f ( x ) 2 u (2 x ) (16) j1 For all x G . We claim that {2nnfx (2 )} is a Cauchy sequence in X . For mn , n1 n n m m j j ( j 1) j 1 2f (2)2 x f (2) x 2f(2)2 x f(2 x ) jm n1 ux(2j )
j1 jm 2 n1 hg(0) (0) (0,2j x) (2 j x,0) (2 j x,2 j x)
j1 jm 2 hg(0) (0) (0,2j x) (2 j x,0) (2 j x,2 j x) (17) mj 1 22jm Foe all x G . Taking the limit as m , we get lim 2nf (2 n x ) 2 m f (2 m x ) 0 m For all x G . Since X is a Banach space it follows that sequence {2nnfx (2 )} converges. We define T:GX by T( x ) lim 2nn f (2 x ) n We claim that T satisfies (2). From (1), we have f(2n x 2 n y ) g(2 n x ) h(2 n y ) (2 n x ,2 n y ) (18) 2n 2 n 2 n 2 n For all x, yG . From (7), we get
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 7
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
g(2nnx ) f(2 x) hx(0) (2n ,0) (19) 2n 2 n 2 n For all x G . Since (2nx ,0) (0,2x) j (2x,0) j (2x,2x) j j
nj20 1 22jn As n , we obtain from (19) g(2nnx ) f(2 x) lim lim (20) nn22nn For all x G . Also, from (9), h(2nnx ) f(2 x) g(0) (0,2n x ) (21) 2n 2 n 2 n For all x G . From (21), it follows that h(2nnx ) f(2 x) lim lim (22) nn22nn For all x G . Thus, from (20),(22), and the commutativity of G , we arrive at f(2nxx 2 n y) g(2 n ) h(2 n y) 0 lim( n 2n 2 n 2 n f(2nnx ) f(2 y) T( x y ) lim lim nn22nn
T( x y ) T (x) T(y) (23)
For all x, yG . To prove (2), taking the limit in (16) as n , we have n j1 n n j T(x) f (x) lim 2 u (2 x ) n j1 1 lim (1 )( g(0) h(0) ) n 2n n (0,2j1 x) (2 j 1 x,0) (2 j 1 x,2 j 1 x)
j j1 2 g(0) h(0) (x ) (24) For all x G . It remains to show that T is unique. Suppose now that U:GX is another such mapping with U()()() x y U x U y And (2) is satisfied. Then T(x) U (x) 2n T (2 n x )2 n U (2 n x )
2nT (2 n x )2f(2 n n x ) 2f(2 n n x )2 n U (2 n x ) 2n g(0) h(0) (2 nxx ) 2 n g(0) h(0) (2 n ) g(0) h(0) n (2n j 1 x,0) (0,2 n j 1 x) (2 n j 1 x,2 n j 1 x)
n1 2 n j 22j1 g(0) h(0) (2j1 x,0) (0,2 j 1 x) (2 j 1 x,2 j 1 x) (25) nj1 2 22jn1 For all x G . Taking the limit in (25) as n , we have
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 8
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
T()() x U x , For all x G . Q.E.D.
REFERENCES 1. S.M.Ulam, Problems in Modern Mathematics, Wiley York, 1960. 2. S.M.Ulam, problems in Mathematics, chapter IV Wiley New York, 1964. 3. D.H.Hyers, On the stability of the linear functional equation, Proc. Nat. Acad. Sci. U.S.A. 27 (1941), 222-224. 4. Th.M.Rassias, On the stability of the linear mapping in Banach space, Proc. Amer. Math. Soc. 72 (1978) 297-300. 5. Z.Gajda, On stability of additive mappings, Internat.J.Math. Math. Sci. 14(1991) 431-434. 6. D.H.Hyers, G.Isac, Th.M.Rassias, stability of functional Equations in several variables, Birkhauser, Berlin, 1998. 7. Th.MRassias, On the stability of functional equations in Banach space, J.Math. Anal.Appl.251(2000)264-284. 8. Th.M.Rassias on the stability of the quadratic functional equation, Mathematica, To appear. 9. H.Schroder, K-Theory for Real C*-Algebras and applications, potman Res. Notes Math.ser., Vol. 290.Longman, Essex, 1993. 10. J.Chmielinski and J.Tabor. On approximate solutions of the pexider equation A Equationes Math. 46 (1993),143-163. 11. W.Rudin, Fourier analysis on groups, Interscience, New York, 1962. 12. P.Gavruta, A generalization of the Hyers-Ulam-Rassias stability of approximately additive mappings, J.Math.Anal.Appl.184(1994)431-436. 13. F.Bonsall, J.Duncan, Complete Normed Algebras, Springer-Verlag, New York,1973.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 9
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
NEED OF CREATIVE CLASSROOM ENVIRONMENT IN EDUCATION
Dr.A. RAJESWARI
Assistant Professor, Department of Curriculum Planning and Evaluation, Tamilnadu Teachers Education University, Chennai.
ABSTRACT This article discusses the environment of the classroom and suggests that one which is creative and stimulating is of most benefit to both teachers and students.It is vitally important that children in school have a creative, stimulating classroom environment. Such an environment will stimulate their minds and make them much better learners and thinkers.The classroom environment should include lots of books, visual materials and activities. All these requirement should be aimed at attracting and keeping the child‘s interest and promoting questioning and discussion. It is obvious, that these facilities must be suited to the child‘s age and level of education.
INTRODUCTION TRADITIONAL CLASSROOM If the student is not interested in the topic being taught and nothing is done to stimulate and build an interest then learning will not take place. This situation is illustrated in the old traditional style of teaching where students sat at their desks all day listening to the teacher drone on in a way that does not stimulate interest. It is no wonder that in this sort of classroom environment everyone, including the teacher, is bored and fed up. It is not conducive to learning and getting the best from the students.
IMPORTANCE AND CHALLENGES OF CREATIVE CLASSROOM A major factor in providing a stimulating and creative environment in the classroom is the attitude of the teacher. A teacher who is interested in the topic being taught and the student‘s development will naturally provide stimulus to the students and they will respond in turn by learning and being interested in the topic. A teacher who is bored and uninterested will only pass that attitude onto the students who will then, in turn, not be interested in the topic being taught and so will not learn anything.If the students are taught in a stimulating, creative classroom environment they will respond positively and learn because they are interested and awake. They will enjoy thinking and learning. Students taught in an environment of boredom and lack of creative stimulus will not be motivated to learn. They will be sleepy and tired and lack any interest in their work.For educators, it can be even more of a challenge to inspire creativity in students or embrace our own creativity while trying to juggle academic requirements, testing, and other issues in the classroom. It may be difficult but it‘s certainly not impossible, and accomplishing it can help to create a classroom environment that‘s more motivational, interesting, and educational for both us and our students.
PLANNING FOR THE CREATIVE CLASSROOM Plan for a range of teaching and learning styles so that as many pupils as possible have the opportunity to show their creativity. Role play can increase pupils‘ imaginative engagement and give them freedom to explore ideas. Hands-on experimentation, problem solving, discussion and collaborative work all provide excellent opportunities for creative thinking andbehaviour.Never lose sight of the importance of knowledge and skills. Pupils are only able to engage creatively and purposefully with the challenges they encounter if they have solid knowledge and skills.
FINDING CREATIVE INSPIRATION The following tips will help the teachers master the fundamentals and take the critical first step towards a more creative classroom. 1. Be open to new ideas. 2. Think outside the box. 3. Find excitement. 4. Get out of your comfort zone. 5. Find inspirational places. 6. Relax. 7. Look for ideas everywhere. 8. Take up a hobby. 9. Follow a passion.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 10
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
CAPITALIZING ON THE CREATIVE SPARK After initiating the first step of making creative classroom, you need to start taking the next steps to make use of it. The following ideas that can help. Set aside time for creative thinking. Develop creative ideas, don‘t let them die. Carry a notebook. Silence your inner critic. Keep your mind sharp. Love what you do. Imagine your classroom as a business. Celebrate successful failures. Own your ideas. Suspend judgment. Explore all possibilities. Embrace weirdness.
CONDITIONS FOR A CREATIVE CLASSROOM 1. A Programme – long Approach 2. Progression - arrangements that help students become comfortable with ‗tools‘, get them to use tools with less and less help and guidance, and end with them identifying for themselves situations which can be handled well by the use of a combination of the toolsthey have to hand. 3. Openness to choice. There may be limited choice between modules, but there can be a lot of choice within modules if they are designed on a core-and-application basis.Teachers introduce the key tools concepts, strategies, information sources and then have students practise them on problems that they, the students, choose/identify. 4. Novel tasks. Where students are set fresh tasks that require them to draw from their learning in several modules and when these are not convergent tasks but ones that allow a variety of good responses, then creativity is favoured. Teachers might find themselves considering the plausibility of the solutions and then awarding marks on the basis of students‘ accounts of their problem-working strategies. 5. Differentiated assessment. Narrow, summatively-driven assessment practices will smother creativity. An emphasis on learning for understanding rather than learning for extensive content mastery. There is evidence that an emphasis on coverage encourages superficiality. Superficiality is not conducive to creativity. Understanding, which comes from covering less ground with more emphasis on the underlying concepts, strategies and assumptions, is conducive to creativity. Put it another way: cover less material but in ways that help students to understand more about the domain and its complex learning outcomes. 6. Knowing students. If students understand the ‗rules of the game‘ and why the programme is as it is, then they are better placed to reflect and enter into the spirit of the creativity game. Students who do not know the rules are likely to try much harder to bargain it into familiar and safe shapes. 7. Portfolios. Owned by the student and central to metacognition, they encourage learners to sustain their own claims to achievement convergent and divergent in their own ways. 8. Openness to innovation. Possibilities for change need to be designed into the programme. 9. Sound evaluations. It has been implied that programmes that favour creativity are rigorous ones. Good programme evaluation practices, ones that go far beyond the standard module tick-list approaches, support rigorous academic practices.
USES OF CREATIVE CLASSROOM ENVIRONMENT A stimulating classroom environment will also stimulate the teacher to do better. If his/her students are interested in the work and learning about it then the teacher will in turn be stimulated to make the lessons more interesting. Thus a stimulating, creative classroom environment is to everyone‘s benefit. It will feed back onto itself and become more and more stimulating and creative to the benefit of teacher and students.
ROLE OF CREATIVITY IN TODAY‘S CLASSROOM AND ITS BENEFITS. Learn with fun: Creative classrooms give an opportunity for students to learn with fun. The teaching activities such as storytelling and skits help them to learn without the pressure of learning. Students are always fun loving and including creative activities along with curriculum gains their interest for learning. Teachers should encourage this quality in students from the lower classes itself and inspire them to believe in one‘s own creativity. Fun team building activities can be organized so as to promote creative thinking in groups and helping them to learn about accepting others‘ ideas.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 11
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Freedom of expression: Unlike the conventional teaching methods, the creative classrooms give them the opportunity to express themselves. Whether it is debate or classroom discussions or field trips, students have the chance to come out of their shelves and become a part of it. This freedom of expression gives them a sense of goodness and happiness. Making some contributions in the learning sessions gives them a sense of satisfaction too. A creative approach to learning makes them more open with the puzzles that come their way and gives them a feeling of accomplishment and pride. Emotional development: Creative expression is important for a kid to trigger up their emotional development. Importantly, this has to happen at their lower classes itself so that they grow up by responding well to the happenings around them. Creativity gives them that freedom to explore the surroundings and learn new things from them. Students would always love a classroom setting that helps them to explore freely without setting them any boundaries. When they can show off their true emotions in a creative manner in their classrooms, they can build up good confidence level. Enhances thinking capability: Creativity can stimulate imaginative thinking capability in students. That is why teachers promote activities such as open-ended questions, creative team building activities, brainstorming sessions and debates amidst busy curriculum schedules. Some teachers tactfully use these techniques to teach tough lessons to make children learn with fun and ease. Activities such as puppet shows will keep the students feel interested in the learning sessions and the flow of images in their mind gives them the pleasure of creativity. The open-ended questions will open them a world of imaginative thinking and they can come up with creative responses. Reduced stress and anxiety: When some time is set aside for creativity in between all the strenuous study times, it takes a lot of stress away from students. This sense of joy keeps them relaxed and reduces their anxiety which in turn helps them to prepare well for exams and excel in it. Integrating more hands-on learning and making room for visual reflection is really going to make a positive impact. Encouraging productive discussions as well as making the classroom layout more flexible all matters a lot in gearing up a creative classroom atmosphere. Boosts problem solving skills: The brainstorming activities involving puzzles can stimulate the skills of problem-solving in children. Creativity can really alter the way students approach a problem and it can be impressively optimistic once they go through creative teaching sessions. Creative problem solving can be encouraged in classrooms that help students to think out of the box and be more imaginative and innovative. With this way, the problems or opportunities are redefined by the students and the solutions or responses would be more innovative. Improves focus and attention: The average attention or concentration span of a lower class kid is just a few minutes. The conventional teaching methods would be boring for them and they may lose their focus in the midway. Including creative teaching strategies such as storytelling and skits are sure to improve their focus and attention and the study time would be more productive. Playing memory games, taking regular breaks and intervals to bring in some creativity and setting a flexible classroom environment can make a lot of improvement in their attention span. Better communicators: A classroom environment that promotescreativity opens them a world of communication. Students can make better conversation and stimulate innovative thinking and talking sessions in their free time. This also triggers group problem solving and shared learning that gives them a feeling of togetherness. Classroom debates not only help them to think creatively but also understand and welcome others‘ views. This kind of shared creative experience helps them to open up to one another and grow up as better communicators. Follow passions: Working out the passions in addition to excelling in academics is important for a student to come up successful in life. A good classroom environment should give space for students to follow their passions whether it is music, dance, poetry, drawing or other art forms. This gives students a sense of happiness which in turn helps them to approach academics with a free mind. Setting aside time for such activities is really going to help them develop their creative talents in addition to academic brilliance. Students who rightly use these opportunities can come out of the school with flying colours. Future opportunities: A stimulating classroom can have charts that visualize the goals with timelines that help students to have a look on the go. The classrooms are the place where students get the basement for how successful they can be when they grow up. The skills and the confidence they gain throughout their school days are really going to make an impact in the way they prosper the career. In fact, creative persons have an upper hand in triggering future opportunities than those with a mere academic skill set. They can express freely during knock out rounds and the way they present themselves really matters in this competitive phase. Innovative mind-set: Open-ended questions and classroom discussions are two popular creative teachingstrategies that help students to develop an innovative mind-set. Students get opportunity to think more critically about the question or subject and come up with innovative ideas. The friendly classroom discussions also aid them to think decisively about others‘ ideas and contributions while
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 12
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
thinking critically to produce something innovative. A stimulating classroom setting which is colourful rather than black and white can do the trick to lower class students and teachers can make some effort to bring in some humour between the lessons. Drive lifelong learning: A person with a creative mindset always has that craving to learn new things every time and this helps them to have that amazing feeling of lifelong learning. This would really keep them engaged and active throughout which in turn helps them to stay young always. A curious mind always loves to learn more and the creative classrooms can build up a curious mind-set in children through unconventional ways. The education apps are on the rise with the growing mobile market and there are some awesome apps.
CONCLUSION Creativity now is as important in education as literacy, and we should treat it with the same status.‖ Every child has some inbuilt creativity in them and proper guidance from the teacher coaxes and cultivates it to help them grow up as creative individuals.However, it is the role of a good teacher to bring in the right mix of creativity in classrooms and bring out the best in the students. The pleasure of creativity also contributes a lot to improved health and this helps them to have a continued growth in academics as well as world of creativity.
REFERENCES 1. https://www.edsys.in/creativity-in-classroom/ 2. http://creativitymattersproject.blogspot.com/2010/03/how-can-teachers-promote-creativity.html 3. https://www.researchgate.net/publication/261219030_The_roles_and_development_needs_of_teachers _to_promote_creativity_A_systematic_review_of_literature 4. http://www.teachhub.com/10-classroom-activities-promote-creativity 5. https://medium.com/@mechandan/the-importance-of-promoting-creativity-within-schools- 32649fc1fe28 6. http://theconversation.com/how-to-promote-creativity-in-the-classroom-51838 7. https://psychcentral.com/blog/9-ways-to-support-your-childs-creativity/ 8. https://www.weareteachers.com/encourage-creativity-classroom/
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 13
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
RECENT TRENDS AND LIMITATIONS IN HIGHER EDUCATION IN INDIA
Dr. SANDEEP R. HATEWAR
ARTS AND SCIENCE COLLEGE, PULGAONTAH.- DEOLI, DIST. - WARDHA(M.S.) 442 302 Email – [email protected] Mob.No. - 9860022883
SUMMARY The past decades have been challenging for the youth of our country.However, there have been positive changes in their talents, knowledge, aptitude, understanding, vision, communication skill, curiosity etc. and many opportunities have been open in front of them. As a result they are riping the fruits of toil they have taken. But unfortunately, they are not leading to the right path. Our Economic Policy, Educational Policy, enormously changes in Technical Education, increasing use of ICT, variations in Higher Education have been creating new challenges before them. Late Dr. A.P.J. Abdul Kalam believed that Education System of nation can improve significantly through the 'Digital India‘. In recent years, the Government of India has tried to strengthen the field of Higher Education by using new experiments. Now the direction of our education is being clearly focused on Digitalization. The teachers and the students are both prosperous. But there are many limitations in front of Higher EdcuationSystem. The rural area is still a newborn in e-learning. Changes in the Higher Education System are now highly essential. In particular, there is no coordination between the degree obtained by Higher Education, the job title and in the work done in direct form. After seven decades of Indian independence, contemplating the efforts are being done in the field of Higher Education with some recent experiments like CARE and the study of its limitations is the purpose of this essay.
INTRODUCTION In the diverse and distinguished country like India, making changes in Higher Education or improving in it to the right direction becomes even more challenging at the time where primary education is difficult for the general public. When we talk of versatile development in Higher Education, maintaining quality in Higher Education and to make it relevant;has become a herculean task with new technology and innovation. Even Education Policy of the last decade is now considered obsolete. Now time has come to bridge the diverse faculties of Interdisciplinary Education and diverse Bridge Courses, so that the students of Higher Education can progress with its entirety. Their involvement with Higher Education should now be not only of the socio-cultural issues, but also of the environmental problems and their outlook towards these issues should be globle and broader. On one hand, there is great need of enhancingtheir reasoning power and sensitivity to understand their heritage, history, culture, society, literature as well as technology, science, mathematics, computer, commerce, business, and various events occurring in the world etc., on the other hand they should be able to identify their ability and get full opportunities to advance with their full potential and make their career. We are two steps ahead of the world as a storehouse of knowledgefrom ancient times.But this depot seems to be irrelevantwhen the student is seen in the queue of unemployed youth. To understand the realities of life,theyare given knowledge of various disciplines theway, unfortunately seems far away from the realities. Here, our Education Policy remains a tragedyfor our youth. As problems started rising in this field, our Government began to understand impracticability of the present Education System prevailing in the name of Higher Education.Thereby we have to create suchEducation Policy that will provide the best possible support for the overall development of the student instead of creating factories of clerks or babus.Apart from adding cargo of excessive books in the education, there should be a system of providing practical based education through experienced and skilled teachers. The same education can transform our youngsters responsible citizen, successful businessmen, scientists, teachers, professors, leaders, servants, craftsmen, warriors and etc. The Educational Sector has been very important to us from ancient times. Even when the whole world had not imagined the school, we had our Universities like renowned Nalanda University, Taxila University and Vikramshila University. The discrepancies in the Education Systems on the holy land of these Universities are too vexatious.When the unnecessary political interference increases in the field of education, the filed is to be bizarrely embarrassed. However, many attempts to improve the field of Higher Education have continued since independence of India. The Kothari Commission, Prof. Yashpal Committee, Employment Education Policy of 1986, aregood examples of this, but we are still waiting for a meaningful Education Policy. Modern perceptions are spreading their wings everywhere, which also claim to change in the Indian education field. On the other hand, the National Assessment and Accreditation Coucil (NAAC) observe that the level of 90% colleges and 70% Universities are very weak. NAAC has given new guidelines to assesse and accreditate Universities and
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 14
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Colleges in 2017-18. The results that have been announced in the past few months are even more disappointing. The level of our Universities and Colleges hasdeteriorating than before.
PROVISION OF BUDGET FOR HIGHER EDUCATION IN 2018-19 At the time of budget speech 2018-19, Finance Minister Mr. ArunJaitleyannounced the new initiatives launched for the education sector; He listed a number of amendments that are being launched in the sector for the growth of youth in the country. A new initiative known as ‗RISE‘ by 2022 (Revitalising of Infrastructure and Systems in Education) was announced. RISE has been launched with a total investment of Rs 1 lakh crore in the next four years.In order to realize its dream of 'New India 2022', the Government has prepared a comprehensive plan to be in the field of Higher Education and research.Higher Education Financing Agency (HEFA) has been set up by the Government. To mobilize funds from the market as per requirements of the centrally funded Higher Educational institutions set up in all states of the country.An announcement in the budget has been made to step up insvestments in Research and related Infrastructure in premier educational Institutions. In the month of July, 2018 the Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs released a press note that it has approved the proposal for expanding the scope of Higher Education Financing Agency (HEFA) by enhancing its capital base to Rs. 10,000 crore and taking it to mobilise Rs. 1,00,000 crore for RISE by 2022. Now the question arise that in the last seventy years our Governmenthas been committed to reaching the national goal of education. The annual budget on education has also increasing regularly. Even then, we have still failed to achievestandards which have been prepared for overall literacy, adult education and unemployment. Literacy of the country depends on how much expenditure on education is compared to our GDP. Today, this expenditure is slightly more than just 4%. While it is necessary to spend 6 to 7% expenditure to achieve the goal of 100%literacy. This statement of the late APJ Abdul Kalam is still meaningful. It has been observed that in the Higher Education, the total budgetary allocation for IIT has been reduced from Rs. 8,244.8 croreto Rs. 6,326 crore in 2018-19.
EDUCATION AND DIGITAL INDIA As per our Finance Minister ArunJaitley, ―technology is the biggest drive in improving the quality of education. Technology will be the biggest drive in improving quality of education.We propose to increase the digital intensity in education and move gradually from blackboard to digital board.‖We have forgotten the Ashram Vyavasthaof ancient times. Now the Blackboard, Chalk and Duster are also going to be a part of history. This period is a period of e- learning, with smartboards, smartphones, ipads, projectors, internet as the main device. The direction of our education is being clearly focused on digitalization. The teachers and the students are both prosperous. The youth also started to like this teaching. Bit by bit all examinations will also be done in this manner. As a result, the libraries inHigher Education institutions have now necessary to become digital. As Late A.P.J. Abdul Kalam, In future, many students of different places in virtual classes will start taking education through the education of teachers spread across different terrain through remote education.That day is not faraway when the teacher-student been entirely disposed of the old customs of teaching-learning. Late Dr. A.P.J. Abdul Kalam believed that Education System of nation can improve significantly through the 'Digital India‘. He has been a strong supporter of Digital India based on the concept of ‗Share My Lesson‘.He has also suggested 'National Open Source Education Cloud' in the context of ‗Share My Lesson‘, through which there will be a lot of aid for Higher Education and Educators for enhancing the skills.He has been a strong supporter of Digital India based on the concept of ‗Share My Lesson‘.
VARIOUS LEARNING PLATFORMS Till now, the teachers were seen as the most significant source of knowledge. But the situation gradually started to change. This source of knowledge, called as Teacher, has started to be replaced by new technology and resources. Books are gradually getting replaced by electronic educational materials like optical discs or pen drives. Knowledge can also be shared via the Internet, which is accessible 24 X 7, anywhere, anytime. A career in education would be more challenging and demanding and hence is strongly recommended to those who have a serious bent of mind towards academics.8It means, with the updating of knowledge in the fields of teaching, teachers will have to use sources like e-learning, so that they can effectively teach in the classroom. It has already proved that the institutions which use e-learning technologies are a step ahead of those which still have the traditional approach towards learning. It has also been found that visuals, apart from holding the attention of the student, are also retained by the brain for longer periods.9Previously, no source was used in traditional faculties apart from the conventional teaching. Now the teachers of Arts are increasing their teaching skills through e-learning and ICTs. Use of ICT, online learning, interactive methods and various learning platforms can make the learning experience more enriching and eloquent for bothstudents and teachers. Guru99, Future learn, Alison, Edx, open2study, khan academy, moocs etc. are the best online sources for teachers and students. No doubt,e-learning takes us closer to technical education but it has its own limitations. Narrower
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 15
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology social relations of students and question mark on respect of teachers are the best example.Apart from this, the rural area is still a newborn to e-learning. These areas have neither electricity nor internet facilities. Some states of India had examples of providing tablets; laptopsto students, but the results are still not encouraging.
INNOVATION IN COURSE AND VALUATION PROCESS There are many differences from years regarding courses in the Higher Education. This education should be traditional, it should be given importance to life education, it should be based on moral values, Higher Education should not be designed to make the students virtuous, but to be employment-professionally oriented,and Technology and Skill Development should be used in Higher Education. The generations of such dissenting opinions are coming out. There are intense objection to the slavish imitation of western countries. There are allegations of ending socialism through modern resources of education. Some say that there should be uniform Education Policy in the countries.It is argued that when the National Anthem of this sovereign country is one, the National Song, the National Symbol and the national bird is one, why not be an education system is one! As per Dr. Ram ManoharLohia- Rashtrapatika beta hoyachaprasiki ho santan Bidlayagaribka beta, sabkishikshaek saman Many scholars support education at a Regional level.They question,when we get regional justice? Our Higher Education Policy seems to be ruined due to tremendous differences among the Educationists, so-called scholars and politicians.According to Dr. Abdul Kalam, purpose of our education campaign is providing a guaranteed foundation for creating knowledgeable citizens in India. These citizens will make India happy, prosperous and strong in the future. Memberof Planning Commission and Pune University‘s Former Vice-Chancellor NarendraJadhav is amazed that in many universities there has been no change in the course for 30 years. "Old courses and Teachers areaway from realities enough to kill Higher Education". Changes in the Higher Education System are now highly essential. In particular, there is no coordination between the degree obtained by Higher Education, the job title and in the work done in direct form. The main system to assess students through Open Book Examination has become obsolute from our country while the Scientist, the Educationist and former President of India Dr. Abdul Kalam was a strong supporter of this assessment method. There is a race from primary school to Higher Education institutions to give 'Project Work'. The interesting thing is that even in the subject ofEnvironmental Science, rather than giving the practical knowledge of the subject, projects are given on papers which are made by trees. There is a rapid change in Higher Education. University examinations are going to be online. Evaluation of answer papers has been made online in many universities. Compared to the Higher Education Institute and the overall standards of Education, more emphasis has been given to achieve highest ranking e.g. ranking given by NAAC. As a result, the teachers are so busy to achieve NAAC‘s highest ranking by hook or crook totally ignoring students an important stakeholder of the Higher Education Institution. The teachers, the conscious parents and the curious students pass their co-ordinationin applied visionary policies then nothing can hinder this developing country to become strong, self-reliant and developed Human Resource-induced India by 2020 as perDr. Kalam‘s dream of India.
SOME NEW EXPERIMENTS In recent years, the Government of India has tried to strengthen the field of Higher Education by using new experiments. However its results are unclear.The Higher Educationinstitutions have established IQAC after evaluation by NAAC through which focusing remain on institutions, students, society and environment; it is a great achievement in itself. But unfortunately NAAC itself is experimenting in a alter ways. Efforts are being made by the RUSA; Universities and Colleges to set on different standards are also a good effort. In the initiative of‗SWAYAM‘ and 'e-Pathshala, the Human Resource Development Ministry has given the teachers the opportunity to make new courses. 'SWAYAM' and 'E-Pathshala‘ is a portal through which educators can create their own online courses. Financial help is also provided by the Ministry for this. Apart from this, NITI Ayog Powered I.T. Based Atal Innovation Mission (AIM), Massive Open Online Course (MOOCs), the National Institute of Virtual Education (NIVE), recent planscalled Institutional Incubation Center(IICs), MHRD recently launched RISE AND HEFA which already has been discussed before. A new plan that works like watchdog in the field of Higher Education is HEERA (Higher Edcation Empowerment Regulation Agency. What is being said about, that it will replace of UGC and AICTE. The central Government seems to have put on hold its ambitious plan to replace the University Grants Commission (UGC) and the All India Council for Technical Education (AICTE) with a single regulator for Higher Education. In the field of Reasearch, the University Grants Commission is trying its best to attain plagiarism and menace of substandard academic Journals. Recently, the UGC has issued a press note under which ‗In a bid control the menace of substandard academic journals, the UGC will establish Consortium for Academic and Research Ethics (CARE) that will compile a list of credile quality journals‘.But CARE must be highly carefullas the field of Higher Education in India indulging in corruption especiallyin Research. Some of the Government
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 16
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology schemes are Transforming India, Digital India, Skill India, KaushalVikas, Pt. Madan Mohan Malviya National Missions on Teachers and Teaching (PMMMNMTT). Whether these plans will continue to keep our youth in India or they will be forced to settle in foreign countries, will be proved in distant future. Near about 20 years ago, prominent Austrian-American Management Consultant and Educator Peter Drucker had announced, "In the coming days, society of knowledge will become more competitive than any society in the world. Poverty in the world may be eracidatedbut the level of prosperity of a country will be judged by what kind of education level there is."
REFERENCES 1. JigyasuJayant, ‗BhartiyaUcchhashikshakichunoutiyan‘, Anchhua Kona, Nav Bharat Times, 10 Dec. 2014. 2. Press Information Bureau, Government of India, Ministry of Human Resource Development, 23 March, 2018, NaiDuniya, New Delhi, 01 Feb 2018 1. Mukherjee Baishali, ‗10 emerging trends in education sector in 2018‘, www.Stoodnt.com, 17 April, 2018 2. Press Information Bureau, Government of India, Cabinet Committee on Economic Affairs (CCEA), 04 JULY, 2018 3. 4.Abdul Kalam, Dr. A.P.J.&Rajan Y.S., ‗Beyond 2020:Vision UdyachyaBhartasathi‘, Marathi Trans. by SonawaneManohar, Sakal Publication, Pune, 2015, page 178-179 4. Budget Speech 2018-19 by Finance Minister ArunJaitley. 5. Abdul Kalam, Dr. A.P.J., ‗Beyond 2020…‘, page 184 6. Abdul Kalam, Dr. A.P.J.& Singh Shrijan Pal, ‗Advantage India - From Challenge to Opportunity‘, Marathi Trans.by Thakur Anjali, RiyaPubications,Kolhapur,2016, page108-109 7. Prof. Mani RSS, ‗Now, Teachers becoming Motivators for Future Generation‘, Digital Learning, 02 JAN., 2018 8. The Economic Times, Definition of 'E-learning'. 9. JigyasuJayant, ‗BhartiyaUcchha…‘ 10. Abdul Kalam, Dr. A.P.J., ‗Beyond 2020…‘Page 186 11. JigyasuJayant, ‗BhartiyaUcchha…‘ 12. Sane Rajeev, ‗Shikshanpunarrachanchitwarenegaraj‘, DainikLoksatta, 27 Nov., 2018 13. The ecoomic times, ‗Plan to replace UGC, AICTE with HEERA on hold‘, 28.11.2018.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 17
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
DEVELOPING CAREER INTELLIGENCE AMONG PROSPECTIVE TEACHERS
Dr.P.PACHAIYAPPAN
Associate Professor, GRT College of Education, Tiruttani-631209. Tamilnadu,India.
ABSTRACT A teaching professional duty may extend beyond formal teaching. Teachers may have responsibility for student discipline. Teaching would be an exciting job only to those who are constantly in touch with recent trends in their subjects. On the other hand, if a teacher repeats this year what he had said twenty years ago, his profession becomes very dull. Career Intelligence is viewed in terms of the following aspects; one must think his / her profession as a role and not as a job. A teacher should be a specialist and not a Generalist, should think themselves as lattice and not as ladders. Teacher must be kind to themselves first.
KEY WORDS: Career intelligence, prospective teachers
INTRODUCTION Teaching is a Job that is learnt by doing. The teacher is variously described as ―the key person‖, ―the main architect‖, the creator of ethos‖, ―the gardener of human plants‖, and ―the builder of a new generation. The most important responsibility of a teacher is to guide the young children through complexities of life. The role of teacher is often formal and ongoing, carried out by way of occupation or profession at a school or other place of formal education. Teachers may have to continue their education after they are qualified. A teaching professional duty may extend beyond formal teaching. Teachers may have responsibility for student discipline. The teacher is an observer of the child‘s development rather than a giver of information, ideas or a moldier of character. The teacher is a setter of the stage, a supplier of materials and opportunities, a creator of condition. He is a mere observer. He should be one among children and not make his presence feel. In Gandhiji‘s book ―True Education‖ he says ―I have not used the word ―teacher‖ instead of that I have used ―Mother-Teacher‖ because the teacher must really be a mother of children. The teacher is now looked upon as a facilitator in the process of teaching and learning.
TRAITS OF A GOOD TEACHER Good teachers are professionally alert and attempt to make the school and the community better place for children. They are concerned about the worth of their job and are anxious to improve constantly in their dedicated work. The teacher, according to Erasmus, has three functions PLACET (He pleases) DOCET (He teaches or instructs) MOVET (He moves or inspires) Every teacher should know the peculiarities of his profession and the new role assigned to him in the educational system.
PROFESSIONAL EFFICIENCY There is no doubt that for a variety of reasons, the professional competence of most teachers in India is at low ebb. A teacher without personality can hardly help the young to develop their personality. When the quest for knowledge is conspicuous by its absence even among the teachers, how can they develop love for knowledge among the students. This is quite evident from the fact that most teachers are worried about their salaries and not about the poor facilities provided to them. Most teachers today adopt double standards. They preach something and do the quite opposite. Their attitude towards education is somewhat deplorable. Most of them confine themselves to one or two text-books, prescribed by the University. They write ‗guides‘ because they expect the students to go through them. Most of them have forgotten the truth in Tagore‘s saying – ―A teacher can never truly teach, unless he is still learning himself.‖ Maybe the prevailing obnoxious academic atmosphere is responsible for lack of interest among the teachers in their profession. This vicious circle poses the greatest challenge to the present educational system. The teachers themselves are resisting any change in the present educational system because would place additional responsibility on them. Few teachers contribute to articles and journals either on educational matters or in the fields of their specialization. Most teachers have accustomed to easy way of life. Doing is something different from teaching.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 18
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
In recent times, squabbles, overt or convert, in many departments, in colleges and Universities have assumed ominous dimensions. Sometimes even the seniors are quite jealous of the academic achievements of their juniors, who naturally find it difficult to carry on their research work. We find ‗groups‘ even among the staff in a department. Sometimes, the students are the worst victims of this groupism in departments, where internal assessment of students is common. Appointments to higher posts are made not on merit but on various extraneous considerations because of academic politics. Very often the acquisition of intellectual excellence is hardly relevant to professional advancement. A few teachers are covering only one-fourth of the syllabus, and are setting questions in the syllabus covered. There are some lecturers who have become quite unpopular for their excessive love for specialization. If the senior members in the department are indifferent to their regular work, junior lecturers will not be different. Moreover, the former cannot have effective control over the latter, with the result the whole department suffers. A teacher is a teacher but he is more effective demonstrator, through his personal life of values, attitudes, outlook, behavior and performance. If he persistently acquires new knowledge, learns new skills and studies new methodologies, he exerts a very healthy influence on his pupils in the same and similar areas of activity. The tragedy however is that most teachers are failing to discharge their primary duties properly. A quest for knowledge, the desire to know the new things and alter the old ones, in a fast changing environment is a pre-condition for the development of one‘s mental powers. Any change in the educational system which places additional responsibility on the teachers is opposed by the teachers because they have been accustomed to easy way of life. Dynamic methods of teaching like seminars, workshops, guided assignments, activity methods, etc., are resisted, because they are considered impracticable in Indian situation whereas they are the order of the day in the universities and colleges of many countries of the world. The fact of the matter is that the teacher has no inclination to influence the minds of his students, the importance of the teacher has been well summed up by the Secondary Education Commission: thus, ―We are however convinced that the most important factor in the contemplated educational reconstruction is the teacher, his personal qualities, his educational qualifications, his professional training and the place that he occupies in the schools as well as in the community. The reputation of a school and its influence on the life of the community invariably depends on the kind of teachers working in it.‖ Thus, in the final analysis, the strength of an educational system must depend largely on effective teaching and on good teachers. Unfortunately professional preparation among teachers and lectures is conspicuous by its absence. Teaching would be an exciting job only to those who are constantly in touch with recent trends in their subjects. On the other hand, if a teacher repeats this year what he had said twenty years ago, his profession becomes very dull.
PROSPECTIVE TEACHERS Many teachers use the multiple intelligences as entry points into lesson content. Students who have trouble understanding math through paper-and-pencil exercises often grasp concepts easily when they build models or role-play math formulas. Other teachers attempt to engage all eight intelligences in their lessons. To begin lesson planning, teachers should reflect on a concept that they want to teach and identify the intelligences that seem most appropriate for communicating the content. Some of the multiple intelligence menus are Linguistic Menu (Write a poem, myth, legend, short play, news article, Conduct a debate, storytelling to explain, create a talk show, Conduct an interview), Logical-Mathematical Menu (Translate, Design and conduct an experiment, Describe the patterns or symmetry, Make task or puzzle cards ), Visual Menu(Chart, map, cluster, or graph, Illustrate, draw, paint, sketch, or sculpt ), Musical Menu (Give a presentation with appropriate musical accompaniment, Indicate the rhythmical patterns, Make an instrument and use it to demonstrate), Interpersonal Menu (Conduct a meeting to address, Participate in a service project, Teach someone), Intrapersonal Menu (Write a journal entry, Describe one of your personal values), Naturalist Menu (Describe changes in the local or global environment, Draw or photograph natural objects).This is not to say that a teacher should consistently avoid intelligence because it is out of his or her comfort zone. Instead, teachers should team up with colleagues so that they can increase both their own and their students educational options.
SIGNIFICANCE OF CAREER INTELLIGENCE Career Intelligence is viewed in terms of the following aspects: 1. One must think his / her profession as a role and not as a job. 2. A teacher should be a specialist and not a Generalist. 3. Teacher should think themselves as lattice and not as ladders. 4. Teacher must be kind to themselves first.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 19
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
MEASURES TO IMPROVE THE CARRIER INTELLIGENCE The following tips are the measures to improve Career Intelligence Educate staff about new work realities. Change focus from traditional methods to the innovative methodologies Foster self-knowledge Restore belief in personal competence Provide career – nurturing support through various in-service programmes Develop a life-friendly work culture.
CONCLUSION Teaching is the achievement of shared meaning in the context of educating. This conception of teaching requires some elucidation. Using educative materials of the curriculum, teacher and student aim at congruence of meaning. Teaching demands a special responsibility, too. Teaching requires authority. One of the greatest disasters to befall educational practice has been the miscomprehension of subject- matter knowledge. Many experienced teachers have found from their experience that direct teaching does not work as well as indirect teaching. Knowing they cannot control the destiny of their pupils; that it is immoral to make decisions for others which others ought to make for themselves – these teachers often subside into apparent indifference. There are many ways we can get people to find out things on their own. A catalogue inventory of these might be a useful research project. Clearly a teacher and pupil need not always follow this path through an episode. Progressive teaching begins with well-understood student knowledge and interests and moves through educative episodes into an enlarged experience of testing meaning and knowledge. The analysis of the structure of knowledge gives the teacher greater flexibility in choice of moves. The teacher‘s knowledge about knowledge helps him or her understand in specific pedagogical moves just what indirectness and guidance might mean.
REFERENCE 1. Campbell, L., B. Campbell, and D. Dickinson. (1996). Teaching and Learning through Multiple Intelligences. Needham Heights, Mass.: Allyn and Bacon (college division of Simon and Schuster). 2. Gardner, H. (1983). Frames of Mind: The Theory of Multiple Intelligences. New York: Basic Books. 3. Montana Office of Public Instruction. (1994). Framework for Aesthetic Literacy: Montana Arts and English Curriculum. Helena, Mont.: Author. 4. Santhanam.S (1992), Teacher and Learners, Santha publications, Chennai 5. Sathyasundaram. I (1976), Teachers status in India, Sree Nandhini press, Machilipatinam. 6. Dash. B.N, (2004), A New approach to Teacher and Education in the emerging indian society, Neelkamal publications, New Delhi.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 20
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
WHITE LABEL ATMs (WLAs) - A LEAD OF NON BANKS IN CASHLESS ECONOMY IN INDIA
* Dr.S. BULOMINE REGI **Dr. S. ANTHONY RAHUL GOLDEN
*Assistant Professor of Commerce, St. Mary‘s College (Autonomous), Thoothukudi affiliated to Manonmaniam Sundaranar University, Tirunelveli Email id: [email protected] ** Assistant Professor of Commerce, St. Xavier‘s College (Autonomous), Palayamkottai affiliated to Manonmaniam Sundaranar University, Tirunelveli Email id: [email protected].
ABSTRACT Automated teller machines or ATMs are machines installed by commercial banks that aid the user in withdrawals, checking balances, transferring money and paying utility bills. The banks, after a prescribed number of free transactions, charge the user a nominal fee to use an ATM. To use an ATM, the user needs an ATM card, i.e., a debit card (Visa, MasterCard, Rupay, etc) and a pin, which is set up by the user himself, at the time of generating the ATM card. The user can then use the card and its pin to complete as many transactions as the customer demands to. The Reserve Bank of India, in 2012, allowed Companies registered under the Companies Act, 1956 to open ATMs (White Label ATMs), to ensure more geographical reach and financial inclusivity, keeping in mind the population of the country. This was done to keep the customer services in check throughout the entire banking process. The method of filling up a form after queuing up at a branch of the bank you have your account in, was very time-consuming and hectic, therefore, these White Label ATMs have been brought up, to ease the pressure on the banks while giving the private companies a way to make profit out of the financial system, with the end goal being the betterment of the masses.
KEYWORDS: WLA, White Label ATMs, Cashless Economy, Non-Banks
INTRODUCTION Automated Teller Machines (ATMs) set up, owned and operated by non-bank entities are called "White Label ATMs" (WLAs). They provide the banking services to the customers of banks in India, based on the cards (debit/credit/prepaid) issued by banks. Non-bank entities that set up, own and operate ATMs are called "White Label ATM Operators" (WLAO). The WLAO's role is confined to acquisition of transactions of all banks' customers by establishing technical connectivity with the existing authorized, shared ATM Network Operators / Card Payment Network Operators. Tata Communications Payment Solutions Limited (TCPSL) is the first company authorized by Reserve Bank of India (RBI) to open White Label ATMs in the country. It got launched under the brand name 'Indicash' on 27 June 2013. As on 31.2.2015, 11706 WLAs have been set up in India. To aid financial inclusion and drive ATM penetration in the country the Reserve Bank of India has permitted the launch of White Labelled ATMs (WLAs) i.e private non-bank companies to set up, own and operate their own brand of ATMs in the country. Tata Communications Payment Solutions Limited (TCPSL) is the first company authorized by RBI to open White Label ATMs in the country. TCPSL became the preferred choice for RBI to introduce White Label ATMs given its leadership, credibility and track record in deploying and managing ~ 15,000 ATMs (as on Oct‘18) ATMs including Brown Label & White Label ATMs in India as on Mar‘15, backed by the heritage of the group it belongs to. TCPSL‘s first White Labelled ATM was launched under the brand name 'Indicash' on 27th June 2013 in Chandrapada, a village located in Vasai-Virar, Maharashtra. The launch of Indicash ('India' and 'cash'), marks a milestone for the country and ushers in a new era of ATM accessibility for the masses across cities, towns and villages. Backed by the ~ $150+ billion Tata brand (as on Mar 2018), Tata brand reckoned for introducing distinctive innovations, India‘s first network of White Label ATMs is aimed at empowering millions of Indians with the convenience to access their own money with ease. TCPSL will be deploying 15,000 Indicash ATMs in a record time of three years. The company has already rolled out ~ 8200 ATMs as on Oct‘18 (with plan to add 150-200 every month going forward). TCPSL is the market leader in the White Label ATMs industry in India, with ~ 52% Market Share in WLA count Traditionally, Automated Teller Machines (ATMs) have respective bank‘s logo. So just by looking, this is SBI‘s ATM, this is ICICI‘s ATM and so on. But White label ATM doesn‘t have such Bank logo, hence called White label ATMs. RBI has given license / permission to non-bank entities to open such ATMs. Any non-bank entity with a minimum net worth of Rs.100 crore, can apply for white label ATMs. (not just NBFC, any non-bank entity can apply.) Late 80s: first ATM in India; 2012: RBI issues guideline for White label; 2013: RBI gives license/permission.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 21
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Tata Communications Payment Solutions Limited =the first company to get RBI‘s permission to open White label ATMs. They started their chain under brandname ―Indicash‖. Other White label= Muthoot Finance, Srei Infra., Vakrangee Software, Prizm Payments, AGS. More than 15 companies given such permission.
OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY The following are the objectives focused on the study: To study the background of White label ATM. To understand the difference between brown and white label ATM. To know the role of non-banks in cashless economy in India. To understand the challenges of White Label ATMs in Indian Scenario.
METHODOLOGY The present study is focused on secondary data. The data were collected from various sources like bulletins, reports, magazines, news and websites.
BACKGROUND Automated Teller Machines (ATMs) provide the facility of accessing depositor‘s accounts for dispensing cash and to carry out other financial and non-financial transactions without the need for actually visiting their bank branch. ATMs have expanded the scope of banking to anytime, anywhere banking through interoperable platforms. Cards issued by one bank can be operated through the ATMs set up by other banks. Prior to WLAs only banks were permitted by the Reserve Bank of India (RBI), to set up ATMs. However, ATMs have become the means for financial inclusion and have been leveraged for delivery of a wide variety of banking services to customers. While, there has been around 23-25% year-on-year growth in the number of ATMs, their deployment has been predominantly in Tier I & II centers. To expand the reach of ATMs in Tier III to VI centers, non-banks entities were also allowed to set up ATMs since 20 June 2012.
BROWN LABEL ATM Vs. WHITE LABEL ATM
BROWN LABEL ATM WHITE LABEL ATM When banks outsourced the ATM operations to a third When ATMs are owned and operated by non-bank party. entities but they are not doing ‗outsourcing-contract‘ from a particular bank. The private company owns and operates the ATM The private company owns and operates the ATM machine, pays office rent. They negotiate with the machine, pays office rent. They negotiate with the landlord, electricity company, telecom company and landlord, electricity company, telecom company and so on. so on. The bank which has outsourced this work provides Sponsor bank provides the cash. cash for that ATM. ATM has logo of that bank. White label ATM doesn‘t have such logo. Not even of the sponsor bank. No such compulsion to open minimum number of They‘ve to compulsory open a few ATMs in (tier 3 to ATMs. tier 6) areas. RBI not involved directly. These outsourcing RBI directly involved because these white label companies have contractual obligation with their Companies have to separately get license/permission respective banks. from RBI to run business.
ROLE OF NON BANKS IN CASHLESS ECONOMY Non-bank entities incorporated in India under the Companies Act 1956 are allowed to operate WLAs. In September 2015, Government permitted Foreign Direct Investment (FDI), up to 100%, under the automatic route. Before that, foreign investment in White Label ATMs, was being allowed only through government approval route. Non-bank entities are permitted to set up WLAs in India, after obtaining authorisation from RBI under the Payment and Settlement Systems (PSS) Act 2007. Such non-bank entities should have a minimum net worth of Rs 100 crore as per the latest financial year audited balance sheet, which is to be maintained at all times. While the WLA operator is entitled to receive a fee from the banks for the use of ATM resources by the banks customers, WLAs are not permitted to charge bank customer directly for the use of WLAs. Acceptance of deposits at the WLAs is not permitted. But the WLAO are permitted to display advertisements and offer value added services as per the regulations in force from time to time.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 22
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Cash Management at the WLAs is the responsibility of the Sponsor Bank, who may if required, make necessary arrangements with other banks for servicing cash requirements at various places. WLAO is permitted to have more than one Sponsor Bank. While the cash would be owned by the WLAO, the responsibility of ensuring the quality and genuineness of cash loaded at such WLAs would be that of the Sponsor bank. At no point of time, the WLAO or his agents have access to the cash at the WLAs. Taking over of ATMs operated by banks is also not permitted. Based on the number of WLAs installed in the initial years, either a 3:1 or 2:1 or 1:1 ratio is prescribed for setting up WLAs in Tier III to VI centres, as against each WLA installed in Tier I to II centres. The primary responsibility to redress grievances of customers relating to failed transactions at WLAs vest with the Issuing Bank. However, the Sponsor Bank will provide necessary support in this regard, ensuring that the WLAO makes available relevant records and information to the Issuing Bank. For this purpose, the Sponsor Bank should have necessary arrangement with the WLAO. The extant directives of the RBI on the time-lines for resolution of complaints of failed ATM transactions at bank operated ATMs would also apply to transactions at the WLAs. For delay in resolution of such complaints attributable to the Sponsor Bank or the WLAO resulting in payment of penalty to the customer by the Issuing Bank in terms of the directives of RBI, the Issuing Bank shall be compensated by the Sponsor Bank. The Sponsor Bank may have appropriate agreements with the WLA Operator for recovery of such amounts.
CHALLENGES OF WHITE LABEL ATMs For a white label ATM company, biggest challenges = office rent + Security guard. If they want to make profit, every White ATM needs to get at least 75-125 transactions per day= very unlikely, especially when RBI requires them to setup 2/3rd of the ATMs in semi-urban and rural areas. Even in Bangalore, some of the white-label ATMs are getting barely 2-3 customers every week=loss making business at the moment. Despite the entry of White Label ATM companies, the regular banks have not slowed down their ATM expansion drive, because branded ATM=passive advertisement and customer loyalty. All banks have to put security guards that increased the input cost. Banks themselves admitting ―five transactions free every month=loss making‖ in this scenario. SBI has the largest ATM network in India (30,000+)= economies of scale= they‘re supposed to be making profit. But this week, even SBI chairman herself has admitted their ATM business is making losses. So, it is unlikely that White label ATM companies will run profitably for a long period of time. Customer complaint: failed ATM transactions = matter falls into Issuing Bank (=bank where you have account). The fear of data records are with sponsor bank and machine maintenance is under ATM Company‘s responsibility.
CONCLUSION ATMs offer convenience to customer. Because, the customers are not needed to visit Bank branch every time to withdraw their money. ATMs are open 24/7, and even on holidays. Convenience to bank, because they don‘t have to keep large staff/office compared to a system without ATMs. It reduces their cost of branch- operation. But in India, ATM penetration has been very low. Observe: Country Approx. No. of ATMs per 10 lakh population
USA 1400 UK 500 China 200 India Less than 100
It leads to the need of White Label ATMs.. Initially, RBI did not permit White label ATMs, and Banks wanted to reduce the operational cost, so they came up Brown Label ATM outsourcing) system. So in a way, the evolution is: (Bank‘s own ATM) =>(Brown Label) => (white label). he decision to open more ATMs, in the form of privatised, non-banking entities has been a brilliant one. The schemes that regulate the opening of such White Label ATMs have ensured that these institutions don‘t just keep in mind the incentives, but also cater to the needs of the rural masses in the country. Only after they open a given number of WLAs in rural centres, will they be allowed to open a WLA in an urban setting. Hence in my opinion, this is a masterstroke for financial inclusivity.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 23
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
REFERENCES 1. Press Release of Ministry of Finance dated 8 March 2016) 2. http://www.arthapedia.in/index.php?title=White_Label_ATMs_(WLAs) 3. https://mrunal.org/2014/01/banking-white-label-atm-meaning-features-advantages-limitations-financial- inclusion-nested-design-contagion-risk.html 4. https://www.financialexpress.com/money/bank-6-things-to-know-about-white-label-atms/572644/ 5. https://www.indicash.co.in/ 6. https://www.indicash.co.in/our-white-label-atm-initiative 7. https://www.gktoday.in/gk/white-label-atm/\ 8. https://blog.ipleaders.in/white-label-atms/
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 24
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
SOFT SKILLS APPROACH TO HUMAN DEVELOPMENT
Dr.A.MAGALINGAM
Assistant Professor, Department of Pedagogical Sciences, Tamil Nadu Teachers Education University, Tamil Nadu. ABSTRACT Soft Skills is a very popular term nowadays, used to indicate personal transversal competences such as social aptitudes, language and communication capability, friendliness and ability of working in team and other personality traits that characterize relationships between people. Soft Skills are traditionally considered complementary of Hard Skills.Soft Skills are strategic to be successful in personal and professional life then are essential for a candidate when he tries to obtain any kind of job. Enterprises generally hire new employees, in particular recent graduates, taking more in consideration their Soft Skills than their Hard Skills. This happens also for technical professions, such as engineers, because the company, in order to be competitive, needs to create good and effective teams and a collaborative working atmosphere.
KEYWORDS: quality, soft skills, management, organization
INTRODUCTION1 Any organization is made of people and its success depends mainly on the capabilities Of the human resources and on the kind ofcollaboration they are able to establish.Human capital is then a fundamentalcomponent for any enterprise and the qualityof it deeply affects the results that the company can achieve. This happens in bothservices and manufacturing companies, evenif in these last ones, the competitiveness ofthe product also bases of course on thechoice of materials and processes used tofabricate it. In the past manufacturingcompanies of any kind of industrial productwere mainly concerned about the technicalaspects of their production, in terms ofmethodologies, systems, facilities,components etc. and tried to select workerstechnically prepared and able to perform thetasks they were hired for. Nowadays this98 B. Cimattiview has changed and workers areconsidered a key element not only for theirability to perform a certain activity, but inparticular for their transversal competences,also called Soft Skills. The term Soft Skills is used to indicate allthe competences that are not directlyconnected to a specific task; they arenecessary in any position as they mainlyrefer to the relationships with other peopleinvolved in the organization. Hard Skills, onthe other hand, indicate the specificcapabilities to perform a particular job. The quality of theHuman Capital working at any company,then the results they can achieve, mainlydepends on their Soft Skills.
SOFT SKILLS Many definitions of Soft Skills exist inliterature. A first distinction can be made between Selforiented/Intrapsychic and Otheroriented/Interpersonal Skills. The first onesrefer to what the person must understand anddevelop by himself while the secondcategory gathers what the person candevelop relating with other people. Thisdistinction can also be made in terms ofPersonal and Social Skills. Personal Skillsmainly correspond to cognitive Skills, suchas knowledge and thinking skills whileSocial Skills refer to relationships with otherpeople. To just mention some, a knowledgeskill is the capability of elaboratinginformation and a thinking skill is the abilityof exercising critical judgment. Examples ofpersonal skills are the capacity and desire tocontinue to learn and the ability to plan andachieve goals. Main Social Skills can beidentified in communication, listeningcapability, negotiation, networking, problemsolving, decision making and assertiveness.
IMPORTANT OF SOFT SKILL Self-awareness Managing Self Communication Empathy Effective dialogue across differences. All the above mentioned transversal skills are really significant to be successful as a manager and more in general in any kind of profession. A Soft Skill that most experts recognize such as a very important one is Emotional Intelligence. A possible definition of this transversal skill is the ability to perceive and express emotions, to understand and positively use them, and to effectively manage emotions in ourselves and others.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 25
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Thus Emotional Intelligence is central to performance. It can be considered connected to individual personality but it can also be developed through attention and development.
BENEFITS OF SOFT SKILLS - BENEFITS TO ORGANIZATION Increased credibility with Customers Increased customers satisfaction More productive employees Out – service the competition Increased employee ROI Strong team and leadership Demonstrated dedication to customer Service and support Measurable results and improvements Demonstrated knowledge and expertise of service and support strategies, processes and technologies. Incentives, rewards, and challenges for Employees
BENEFITS TO INDIVIDUALS Recognition from the industry, Employer and peers New employment opportunities Promotions and advanced opportunities Increased ability to perform on The job Increased responsibilities Lifelong credential Professional accomplishment Businessman Public sector Executives
COMMUNICATION Communication is not about multiple syllables or rousing speeches. Able communicators can adjust their tone and style according to their audience, comprehend and act efficiently on instructions, and explain complex issues to colleagues and clients alike. Communication is also an important aspect of leadership, since leaders must be able to delegate clearly and comprehensibly.
SELF-MOTIVATION Having the positive attitude and the initiative to work well without round-the-clock supervision is a vital soft skill for any employee. Not only does it demonstrate reliability and commitment, but it shows that you can fit efficiently into an organisational structure without the need for constant oversight.
LEADERSHIP Leadership is a soft skill you can show even if you‘re not directly managing others. Leadership can be thought of as a collection of various other soft skills, such as a general positive attitude and outlook, the ability to communicate effectively, and an aptitude for both self-motivating and motivating others.
RESPONSIBILITY Self-awareness is a seldom talked about but highly valued soft skill; knowing when to accept responsibility for any mistakes you have made demonstrates a healthy level of humility, and a willingness to learn and progress.
TEAMWORK Like leadership, good teamwork involves a combination of other soft skills. Working in a team towards a common goal requires the intuition and interpersonal acumen to know when to be a leader, and when to be a listener. Good team players are perceptive, as well as receptive to the needs and responsibilities of others.
PROBLEM SOLVING Problem solving does not just require analytical, creative and critical skills, but a particular mindset those who can approach a problem with a cool and level head will often reach a solution more efficiently than those who cannot. This is a soft skill which can often rely on strong teamwork too. Problems need not always be solved alone. The ability to know who can help you reach a solution, and how they can do it, can be a great advantage.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 26
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
DECISIVENESS Knowing the distinction between decisiveness and recklessness implies a soft skill in itself. Decisiveness combines a number of different abilities: the ability to put things into perspective, to weigh up the options, to assess all relevant information and, crucially, to anticipate the consequences, good and bad.
ABILITY TO WORK UNDER PRESSURE AND TIME MANAGEMENT Many jobs come with demanding deadlines and occasionally high stakes. Recruiters prize candidates who show a decisive attitude, an unfaltering ability to think clearly, and a capacity to compartmentalise and set stress aside. Time management is closely related to the ability to work under pressure, as well as within tight deadlines. Employees who manage their time well are able to efficiently prioritise tasks and organise their diaries, while adopting an attitude which allows them to take on new tasks and deadlines.
FLEXIBILITY Naturally, people can be wary of leaving the comfort zone formed by their repertoire of hard skills. Flexibility is an important soft skill, inasmuch as it demonstrates an ability and willingness to acquire new hard skills, and an open-mindedness to new tasks and new challenges. Employers often seek candidates who can show a willing and upbeat attitude, since many jobs come with the possibility of secondments.
NEGOTIATION AND CONFLICT RESOLUTION This is another of those soft skills which employers look for in potential leaders. To be an adept negotiator is to know how to be persuasive and exert influence, while sensitively seeking a solution which will benefit all parties. Similarly, conflict resolution depends on strong interpersonal skills and the ability to establish a rapport with colleagues and clients alike.
SUGGESTIONS FOR IMPROVING STUDENTS‘ SOFT SKILLS The respondents were asked to suggest measures that universities should undertake for improving soft skills of their students. Over 60% of the students recommended that more soft skills development activities should be incorporated into the curriculum. Two other measures suggested by around 45% of the students were to organize more soft skills development workshops and hands-on activities. Once again it appeared that, instead of attending specialized soft skills development workshops, a majority of the students desired that such skills should be embedded in appropriate professional courses
CONCLUSIONS Several considerations emerge from thiswork, here a list of significant points thatmust be considered to focus, understand andfoster Soft Skills, whose importance for theachievement of quality in any organizationand enterprise. Skills help people to be happy.All these considerations can be very helpfulto Providers such as School and Universityand to Employers such as Enterprises, whichare always looking for human resourcestechnically well prepared but in particularable to bring a significant contribution interms of competitive advantage of theorganization in its whole.It is evident the importance for any companyto select human resources with the best SoftSkills available in the labour market and togo on fostering their development foremployees once hired. Transversalcompetences are fundamental in order toallow any organization to work effectivelyand efficiently, then to reach a high qualityof the products and the services offered.Even in industry, where the level oftechnology plays a particularly significantrole, technical competences are not sufficientto correctly run the production: acoordination and harmony betweenemployer and employees are fundamental toachieve the necessary level of quality to becompetitive.
REFERENCES 1. Alberani, A., (November 2015). The impact of Soft Skills on the paths and careers of employees. Speech at ―Soft Skills and their role in employability – New perspectives in teaching, assessment and certification‖, workshop in Bertinoro, FC, Italy. 2. Ashforth, B.E., &Sluss D.M. (January, 2007). Relational Identity and Identification DefiningOurselves Trough Work Relationships, Academy of Management Review. 32(1), 9-32. 3. Bonomo, R., (November 2015). Soft Skills and organizational citizenship: a duo to make the 4. change. Speech at ―Soft Skills and their role in employability – New perspectives inteaching, assessment and certification‖, workshop in Bertinoro, FC, Italy. 5. Carlino, C. (November 2015). Best project. Speech at ―Soft Skills and their role in 6. employability – New perspectives in teaching, assessment and certification‖, workshop in 7. Bertinoro, FC, Italy.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 27
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
A STUDY ON THE MULTIDIMENSIONALITY OF FACTOR ANALYSIS WITH LATENT STRUCTURE TOWARDS LOGISTICS SECTOR
Dr.D.RAJASEKAR
Professor, AMET Business School, AMET Deemed to be University, Chennai ABSTRACT Nonlinear factor analysis is a tool commonly used by measurement specialists to identify both the presence and nature of multidimensionality in a set of test items, an important issue given that standard Item Response Theory models assume a unidimensional latent structure. Results from most factor‐analytic algorithms include loading matrices, which are used to link items with factors. Interpretation of the loadings typically occurs after they have been rotated in order to amplify the presence of simple structure. The purpose of this simulation study is to compare the ability of two commonly used methods of rotation, Varimax and Promax, in terms of their ability to correctly link items to factors and to identify the presence of simple structure. Results suggest that the two approaches are equally able to recover the underlying factor structure, regardless of the correlations among the factors, though the oblique method is better able to identify the presence of a ―simple structure.‖ These results suggest that for identifying which items are associated with which factors, either approach is effective, but that for identifying simple structure when it is present, the oblique method is preferable. Varimax rotation was additionally applied to avoid multicollinearity among extracted factors since the factor scores from this approach will be utilized as input for subsequent multiple regression analysis. The result of the factor analysis is visualized.
KEYWORDS Logistics, factor analysis; factor interpretation .
INTRODUCTION The different methods of factor analysis first extract a set a factors from a data set. These factors are almost always orthogonal and are ordered according to the proportion of the variance of the original data that these factors explain. In general, only a (small) subset of factors is kept for further consideration and the remaining factors are considered as either irrelevant or nonexistent (i.e., they are assumed to reflect measurement error or noise). In order to make the interpretation of the factors that are considered relevant, the first selection step is generally followed by a rotation of the factors that were retained. Two main types of rotation are used: orthogonal when the new axes are also orthogonal to each other, and oblique when the new axes are not required to be orthogonal to each other. Because the rotations are always performed in a subspace (the so-called factor space), the new axes will always explain less variance than the original factors (which are computed to be optimal), but obviously the part of variance explained by the total subspace after rotation is the same as it was before rotation (only the partition of the variance has changed). Because the rotated axes are not defined according to a statistical criterion, their raison d‘ˆetre is to facilitate the interpretation. In this article, I illustrate the rotation procedures using the loadings of variables analyzed with principal component analysis (the so-called R-mode), but the methods described here are valid also for other types of analysis and when analyzing the subjects‘ scores (the so-called Q-mode). Before proceeding further, it is important to stress that because the rotations always take place in a subspace (i.e., the space of the retained factors), the choice of this subspace strongly influences the result of the rotation. Therefore, in the practice of rotation in factor analysis, it is strongly recommended to try several sizes for the subspace of the retained factors in order to assess the robustness of the interpretation of the rotation.
THE THEORY BEHIND FACTOR ANALYSIS As the goal of this paper is to show and explain the use of factor analysis in SPSS, the theoretical aspects of factor analysis will here be discussed from a practical, applied perspective. Moreover, already plenty theoretical treatments of factor analysis exist that offer excellent and comprehensive overviews of this technique (see for instance Field 2000: 470; Rietveld & Van Hout 1993: 293-295). It would therefore be useless to come up with another purely theoretical discussion. The point of departure in this ‗theoretical‘ discussion of factor analysis is a flow diagram from Rietveld & Van Hout (1993: 291) that offers an overview of the steps in factor analysis. Treating the theory in such a stepwise and practical fashion should ultimately result in a systematic and practical background that makes it possible to successfully carry out a factor analysis. Before moving on to this, however, it is probably useful to explain very shortly the general idea of factor analysis.
OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY To know the purpose of this simulation study is to compare the ability of two commonly used methods of rotation, Varimax and Promax, in terms of their ability to correctly link items to factors and to identify the presence of simple structure decicion in logistics chain.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 28
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
To understand the effectiveness of behind the factor analysics on Logistics Activities. To Implement the rotated component matrix by using Principal Component analysis with varimax rotation.. To understand the perspective roles of Bartlett's Test of Sphericity. To know the stratergy implemented by the major model fit indices.
FACTOR ANALYSIS To ensure a good factor analysis, variables should be correlated to some extent, but not be perfectly correlated (Field, 2005). The correlation matrix between the variables was therefore scanned in order to see if there was any correlations coefficient above 0.9. None of these were found. Secondly, it is recommended by Pallant (2005) that several correlations should be at least above 0.3. One can also see from the correlation matrix that this requirement was also satisfied. Considering that the variables are to some degree correlated, but not particularly large, one did not have to consider eliminating any of the variables from the analysis at this stage. Other important initial tests are the Keiser-Meyer-Olkin (KMO) measure, Bartlett‘s test of sphericity and checking the anti-image correlation and covariance matrices. The KMO measure tests whether the partial correlations among variables are small (Field, 2005). A measure over 0.5 is barely acceptable, values between .5 and .7 are mediocre, values between .7 and .8 are good, values between .8 and .9 are great and values above .9 are superb (Kaiser, 1974). In this case the KMO for all 56 variables was 0.844.
TABLE 1:KMO AND BARTLETT'S TEST Kaiser-Meyer-Olkin Measure of Sampling Adequacy. .844 Approx. Chi-Square 19065.925 Bartlett's Test of Sphericity df 1540 Sig. .000
The KMO for the individual variables can be found by looking at the bolded diagonal elements in the anti-image correlation matrix. All these variables should have a KMO above 0.5 and preferably higher (Field, 2005). In this case, two variables were slightly below the threshold, but there were no large changes in the overall KMO measure when these variables were removed, and the test was re-run. Therefore, it was decided to keep all the variables. The last control before moving on to the principal component analysis was to control that the Bartlett‘s test of sphericity had a significance level above 0.05. This test measures whether the correlations between variables are sufficiently large for factor analysis to be appropriate (Field, 2005). One can see from Table that Bartlett‘s test is highly significant (p<0.001) and good enough for further analysis.
FACTOR ROTATION AND INTERPRETATION Once the number of factors has been determined, one can start trying to interpret what they represent. To assist in this process the factors can be ―rotated‖. Rotation does not change the underlying solution, but rather presents the pattern of loadings in way that is easier to interpret (Pallant, 2005). Factor rotation can be done in several ways. If there are theoretical grounds to think that the factors are independent (unrelated) then it is advisable to choose one of the orthogonal rotations (varimax is recommended). However, if theory suggests that factors might correlate, then one of the oblique rotations (direct oblimin or promax) should be selected (Field, 2005). Despite of this, one can argue that varimax rotation is the best method in order to create more interpretable clusters of factors. The reason of this is that varimax rotation attempts to maximize the dispersion of loadings between factors. Also, varimax is good for simple factor analysis since it is known to be a good general approach that simplifies the interpretation of factors (Field, 2005). On the basis of this argument, varimax rotation was chosen. Table shows the rotated component matrix by using Principal Component analysis with varimax rotation. Only three factors were retained for this analysis.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 29
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
TABLE 2 ROTATED COMPONENT MATRIX
Component 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Q1.19 .710 Q1.21 .695 Q1.23 .685 Q1.18 .685 Q3.1 .649 Q1.22 .637 Q2.7 .802 Q2.8 .751 Q2.6 .707 Q2.9 .678 Q1.2 .861 Q1.3 .819 Q1.1 .799 Q1.4 .740 Q1.5 .683 Q3.19 .907 Q3.18 .901 Q3.10 .851 Q3.20 .611 Q1.13 .811 Q1.12 .792 Q1.11 .706 Q1.10 .624 Q1.16 .738 Q1.15 .712 Q1.14 .667 Q3.8 .726 Q3.7 .628 Q3.15 .854 Q3.14 .739 Q3.16 .655
Component 9 10 11 12 13 14 Q3.11 .880 Q3.17 .661 Q2.1 .851 Q1.7 .783 Q1.6 .714 Q1.9 .777 Q3.9 .841 Q3.12 .759
Extraction Method: Principal Component Analysis. Rotation Method: Varimax with Kaiser Normalization. a. Rotation converged in 11 iterations.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 30
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
FIG NO – 1
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 31
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
TABLE 3:MAJOR MODEL FIT INDICES SUMMARY
Parameters Acceptable values for Good Research Model Fit values GFI >0.9 0.957 AGFI >0.9 0.915 CFI >0.9 0.922 RMSEA <0.06 0.048 RMR <0.10 0.031 (Source: Primary Data, SPSS AMOS output, Haier et al. (2009); Hooper et al. (2008); Steiger (2007); Hu and Bentler (1999)). The Goodness of Fit index (GFI) value was 0.957, Adjusted Goodness of Fit Index (AGFI) value was 0.915 and Comparative Fit index (CFI) value was 0.922. All these values were greater than 0.9 indicating a very good fit. It was found that Root Mean Score Error of Approximation (RMSEA) value was 0.048 (lesser than 0.06) and Root Mean Square Residual (RMR) value was 0.031 (lesser than 0.1). Discussion: Good fit exists for research model.
CONCLUSION The rate of development in this part will be more according to the analyst think about and the enterprises need to utilize its preference in connecting the key mechanical, utilization One can conclude that the factor analysis has shown that it is reasonable to create constructs out of most of the initially intended variables, but the variable less than 0.7 may have to be excluded from the final constructs. The factor loadings are represented in the rotated component matrix. As may be known by now, these factor loadings are important for the interpretation of the factors, especially the high ones. One can wonder, however, how high a loading has to be in order to determine the interpretation of the factor in a significant way . The tests from the preliminary analysis conclude that the included variables have good characteristics in order to conduct a factor analysis.
REFERENCES The main sources/references for this section are: BOOKS 1. Factor Analysis in International Relations. Interpretation, Problem Areas and Application / Vincent, Jack. University of Florida Press, Gainsville, 1971. 2. Factor Analysis. Statistical Methods and Practical Issues / Kim Jae-on, Charles W. Mueller, Sage publications, 1978. 3. Introduction to Factor Analysis. What it is and How To Do It / Kim Jae-on, Charles W. Mueller, Sage publications, 1978. 4. Statistics with STATA (updated for version 9) / Hamilton, Lawrence C. Thomson Books/Cole, 2006.
REFRENCES 1. Child, D. (1990). The essentials of factor analysis, second edition. London: Cassel Educational Limited. 2. Cattell, R. B. (1966). The scree test for the number of factors. Multivariate Behavioral Research, 1, 245-276. 3. Hoyle, R. H. (1995). The structural equation modeling approach: Basic concepts and fundamental issues. In Structural equation modeling: Concepts, issues, and applications, R. H. Hoyle (editor). Thousand Oaks, CA: Sage Publications, Inc., pp. 1-15.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 32
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
A RESEARCH ARTICLE ON CLUSTERING ANALYSIS BASED ON OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHM FOR DATA MINING
M.PAVITHRA
Assistant Professor, Department of Computer Science and Engineering, Jansons Institute of Technology, Tamilnadu,India. ABSTRACT Clustering analysis is one of the important concepts of data mining. Many researchers are focus on the clustering problem it is one of the research based criteria. The clustering is belongs to the unsupervised learning in which teacher is absent. This paper shows to analysis the clustering problem. Clustering is the data mining concept in which grouping is done with the help of the algorithm. For the clustering in this paper the Bisecting K-mean algorithm is used. It will find the clustering means it will arrange the data into group wise manner. In this paper the data set is collected from the UCI Repository. The Bisecting K-mean algorithm has some drawback like it will not find the centroid for these the clustering not found proper manner and to remove this drawback used the PSO algorithm. The particle swarm optimization algorithm is remove the drawback of the clustering. PSO algorithms find the optimal path. This integrated hybrid model increase the accuracy of the clustering.
KEYWORDS: UCI Repository data, Bisecting K-mean Algorithm, Particle swarm optimization technique.
INTRODUCTION Data mining is the mining of the predictive information from database and it is new technology to help companies focus on the very important information in their data bases. Data mining means applying few mining technique on data set for do it useful. It is process of analyzing hidden predictive information from the big data set. It is used to examine the old data to find the information. In this paper clustering is used it is one of the popular technique of data mining. It is task of dividing a data into the number of similar clusters. Means it is task of grouping a set of object in a same group are similar to each other in the other group. Data clustering technology is to finding the similar hidden pattern from the given data set. It is the method to obtaining the cluster of the item without the class label related to the approximation of the item in one cluster. Clustering is the very big amount of the data set that contains the large number of records with high dimensions. And now a days it used for the identifying useful information from the historical data. In data clustering it has disadvantages such as dependency of the ability of this technique to initialize the cluster center. Means it is hard to perform to initialize the center of the cluster for that purpose to increase the efficiency of this method used the optimization technique. In this project optimization technique is use for the overcome the drawback of clustering. The optimization is used to find the global optimization solution. Now days in real word the optimization problems are dynamic. It will not find the global optimal solution but also find the trajectory of changing optima over dynamic nature. The optimization technique will give the optimal or good solution from the complex optimization problem. 2.
LITERATURE SURVEY The clustering analysis is very big problem especially in large data set. The clustering analysis means it will divide the given data into certain classes according to the main attribute of the dataset, thus the item of class to have the same or similar meaning. They have find attention due to their importance in data mining research and application. It is the unsupervised method that applied for prediction of structure of object by dividing them intodifferent set. The Clustering algorithm has some drawback for example K-mean have drawback in searching for optimal solution. It is very difficult to find the cluster center. Consider the drawbacks and limitation of single clustering technique, research has developed optimization algorithm to overcome the drawbacks of clustering technique. In this paper the data mining technique is used for clustering. The clustering is the one of the problem in data mining that always affected many researchers. Clustering technique is one of the important unsupervised methods. In this project the k-mean algorithm is used for the clustering. It will find the cluster. The clustering number must be defined initially. Each center of K-mean identify by mean location of data vector which find the cluster. And the practical swarms optimization algorithm will used for finding the optimal path of clustering. It is one of the important algorithms inspired by birds. Due to the limitation of the k-mean algorithm the PSO will used for overcome the k-mean drawback. The drawback of K-mean is to initialization of cluster center. This is one of the disadvantages of the kmean. To overcome this advantages the PSO algorithm was used , using PSO it will find the cluster center will generated initial piratical are optimized to maintain the final cluster center.[1] In this paper the data mining technique is used for analysis of clustering. The clustering is one of the problems in data mining that always affected many researchers. Clustering is one of the important unsupervised classification
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 33
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology methods. In this project or research paper the k-mean algorithm is used for the clustering. It will find the number of cluster. The cluster number are must be defined firstly. Each center of Kmean denoted by mean location of data vector which represent to cluster. And the Mussels Wandering Optimization algorithm will used for finding the optimal path of clustering. It is one of the important algorithms related to the Swarm intelligence. It is one of the new effective global optimization algorithms. It aims to find an optimal solution by using or modifying Mussels leisurely locomotion behavior. It is very simple and easy to used algorithm. Due to the drawback of the k-mean clustering algorithm the MWO will used for overcome the k-mean drawback. The one of limitation of K-mean has drawback is to initialization of cluster center. This is one of the disadvantages of the k-mean. To overcome this disadvantages the MWO algorithm was used, using MWO it will find the cluster center belonging with other generated initial piratical are optimized to maintain the final cluster center. [2] In this paper the data mining technique is used for analysis of clustering. The clustering is one of the problems in data mining that always affected many researchers. Clustering technique is unsupervised method. In this paper K-Harmonic mean algorithm is use for clustering. It has drawback like sensitivity to initial starting point and convergence problem to the local optimum. And Simplified swarm Optimization was used for the finding the optimal path. It is inspired by the Practical swarms optimization algorithm. It was originally propose to overcome the limitation of PSO for discrete type optimization. It was used for overcome the drawback of K-Harmonic mean algorithm..[3] In this paper the data mining technique is used for analysis of clustering. The clustering is one of the problems in data mining that always focus on many researchers. Clustering technique is one of the important unsupervised classification methods. In this paper C-mean algorithm was used for the clustering. It is most important popular fuzzy clustering algorithm. It will also use in real word application. It has drawback like sensitive to initialize and it is easily struck at local minima. And the practical swarms optimization algorithm will used for finding the optimal path of clustering. It is one of the important algorithms inspired by birds. Due to the drawback of the C-mean clustering algorithm the PSO will used for overcome the C-mean drawback. The drawback of C-mean is not find the to initialization of cluster center. This is one of the disadvantages of the Cmean. To overcome this advantages the PSO algorithm was used , using PSO it will find the cluster center along with other generated initial particle are optimized to maintain the final cluster center. [4] In this paper the consensus clustering is used in which each discrete feature is viewed as simple clustering of the data. The plus points of this algorithm are it generates better clustering and it is less sensitive to noise. It has drawback like sensitivity to initial starting point and convergence problem to the local optimum. And the Piratical swarm optimization algorithm is use for finding the optimize path for improving the consensus clustering algorithm. [5] The clustering algorithm that first collected the statistical data samples and then analyses their features and then finally classifies them to different clusters. The distributed clustering algorithm focus on the multidimensional is concerned. The distributed k-mean algorithm is a simple and efficient clustering algorithm it can process massive data efficiently. In this paper the distributed k-mean clustering algorithm based on map reduce computing is divided into the steps like randomly select the initial center and initial parameter, put all data object into function map and by comparing the distance from data object to the center, select the point of minimum distance as a center and output are form as a map fragment. To improve the distributed k-mean clustering algorithm the classic Euclidian algorithm will used for calculating the distance.[10] In research paper the (CRO) coral reefs optimization algorithm used to clustering problem. It will give clustering partition for a data warehouse. The coral reefs optimization algorithm dealing with the real data. It is a bio inspiredMeta heuristic for problem. Thai is one of the optimization problem. To the one of good information, that optimization will not be used to clustering analysis for this purpose the analysis of the coral reefs optimization algorithm in clustering problem and improve the three modification of coral reefs optimization algorithm for improving the performance.[11]
METHODOLOGY PARTICLE SWARM OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHM The K-mean has drawback like the dependency of method to initialize the cluster center. And to overcome this limitation the particle swarm optimization algorithm is taken. The k mean used to main the cluster center and each cluster center is same as a particle of the particle swarm optimization algorithm. Later on using PSO algorithm these clusters center along with generated initial particle are obtained to maintain the final cluster center. Using particle to show a clustering result was introduced which has a better unity with the architecture of PSO algorithm because of the common form of every particle of PSO should be a accurate solution obtained. In this way a particle confident of the clusters midpoint.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 34
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
BISECTING K-MEAN TECHNIQUE In this system Bisecting K-mean clustering technique is used. After applying K mean algorithm toe cluster will form now we apply Bisecting K-mean algorithm on the obtain clusters. Firstly select any cluster among the two cluster for doing these and then calculate centered for both the cluster separately that is cent1 and cent2 for cluster1 and cluster2 respectively. Later distance is calculated between the centered and data set.
FOREST OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHM The Forest optimization algorithm (FOA) is suitable for continuous non-linear optimization problems. The algorithm is inspired by the existence of ancient trees after decades. While many of the trees are short-lived, the number of trees is still in existence even after a few decades. In this algorithm, spreading seeds of the trees are simulated so that the number of seeds is set under the trees, and the number of seeds spread in a vast area of Forest by natural events such as wind. The output of the algorithm suggests improving of its accuracy in finding the optimal positions rather than genetic algorithm and particle swarm optimization. This algorithm has three main steps: (1) local seed production, (2) removing some members of the population, (3) global seed production. In this algorithm, like other evolutionary algorithms, forest trees are initialized in the initialization step. A tree, in addition to the values of the variables, has a part that represents the age of the related tree. The age of each tree is zero at first. After initialization of the trees, in local seed production step, some new trees aged zero (new seeds) are created. Then, one unit is added to the age of previous trees. In the second step, number of trees based on the number of pre-defined population, should be removed from the population.
ANT COLONY OPTIMIZATION Ant colony optimization is inspired from complex behavior which is observed in ant colonies [12]. Ant colonies consist of simple ants that have no special intelligence. Their group is decentralized and self-organized but several complicated behaviors are observed in this simple group [12]. Studies show complex behaviors emerge from indirect communication exist between agents which are called stigmergy. In this way, ant change environment for interacting and based on information perceived form environment, performs a simple, basic action [13]. Two main collective behaviors that have been studied widely in ant colonies are Foraging behavior and Cemetery Organization.
BIOGEOGRAPHY-BASED OPTIMIZATION ALGORITHM In this section, we give a brief description of the Biogeography-Based Optimization (BBO) algorithm. BBO is a new evolutionary optimization method based on the study of geographic distribution of biological organisms (biogeography) [4]. Organisms in BBO are called species, and their distribution is considered over time and space. Species can migrate between islands which are called habitat. Habitat is characterized by a Habitat Suitability Index (HSI). HSI in BBO is similar to the fitness in other population-based optimization algorithms and measures the solution goodness. HSI is related to many features of the habitat [3]. Considering a global optimization problem and a population of candidate solutions (individuals), each individual can be considered as a habitat and is characterized by its HSI. A habitat with high HSI is a good solution (maximization problem). Similar to other evolutionary algorithms, good solutions share their features with others to produce a better population in the next generations. Conversely, an individual with low fitness is unlikely to share features and likely accept features. Suitability index variable (SIV) implies the habitability of a habitat. As there are many factors in the real world which make a habitat more suitable to reside than others, there are several SIVs for a solution which affect its goodness. A SIV is a feature of the solution and can be imagined like a gene in GA. BBO consists of two main steps: migration and mutation. Migration is a probabilistic operator that is intended to improve a candidate solution [2, 3]. In BBO, the migration operator includes two different types: immigration and emigration, where for each solution in each generation, the rates of these types are adaptively determined based on the fitness of the solution.
EXPERIMENTAL RESULTS Due to that fact that at optimization algorithms, gained solutions at each time of algorithm running, are not constant values, each of the compared algorithms in this section is run 50 times independently and the mean and standard deviation of 50 times of running has been shown. For the implementation of the proposed method, 4 datasets named iris, wine, glass, and liver disorder have been used. As we see in Table 1, the information of data sets is as follows: In this section, real data sets are applied to test the performance of FOFCM algorithm. Four real data sets are used in experiments. The studies focus on the convergence performance and the clustering effect of FOFCM algorithm. In order to make it evident to show the performance of FOFCM, comparative studies are completed, while GGAFCM (Hall et al., 1999) and PSOFCM algorithm (De Falco et al., 2007) are introduced in experiments. Experiments are made up of two aspects, namely, experiments on convergence performance and experiments on clustering effect. Datasets: 1. Iris: This data set has 155 samples
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 35
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology and four features and three clusters (Hall et al., 1999). 2. Wine: Wine is a data set that has 178 samples and 3 features. It contains 6 clusters (Asuncion, 2007).
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 36
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 37
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 38
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
CONCLUSION The Bisecting K-mean algorithm is one of the clustering algorithms used in the large sets data. It will find out theaccuracy of the clustering. The particle swarm optimization will find the optimize path. This integrated clustering algorithm increases the accuracy.we tried to use an optimization algorithm called Forest algorithm and combine it with a local search optimization method called gradient method, to improve the FCM algorithm. Optimization algorithm may not reach to the optimal value of fitness function of the FCM algorithm in low number of iterations alone. Therefore, a local search method called gradient method was used to increase the speed of convergence of the optimization algorithm. For the FCM algorithm and its improved versions, it is assumed that all the features of the samples in a given data set make equal contribution when constructing the optimal clusters. Some features are more important, and should have more weight. Hence, using the methods of feature weighting, we can increase the importance of some features compared to the rest of the features. And as a result, the accuracy through fuzzy clustering methods can be improved.To evaluate the performance of the BBO algorithm, it was tested on six real life datasets and compared with other eight clustering algorithms. The experimental results indicate that the BBO optimization algorithm is suitable and useful heuristic technique for data clustering. In order to improve the obtained results, as a future work, we plan to hybridize the proposed approach with other algorithms and we intend to apply this method with other data mining problems.
REFERENCES 1. HabibollahAghAtabay,MohammadJavadSheikhzadeh, Mehdi Torshizi, ―A Clustering Algorithm Based on Integration of K-Means and PSO,‖ Conference on Swarm Intelligence and Evolutionary Computation (CSIEC2016), Higher Education Complex of Bam, Iran, 2016, pp. 59-63. 2. Peng Yan, ShiYao Liu, Qi Kang,Bing Yao Huang,MengChu Zhou ―A Data Clustering Algorithm Based on Mussels Wandering Optimization,‖ IEEE International Conference on Computer Science and Service System, pp. 713-718. 3. Chia-Ling Huang,Wei-Chang Yeh,―A New K-Harmonic Means based Simpified Swarm Optimization for Data Mining,‖ IEEE International Conference on Computer Science and Service System, 2014 pp. 1-10. 4. O.A. Mohamed Jafar, R. Sivakumar, ―A Study on Fuzzy and particle Swarm Optimization Algorithm and their Application to clustering Problem,‖ IEEE Internatinal Conference on Advanced Communication Control and Computing Technologies(ICACCCT), pp. 462-466. 5. ParulAgarwal,Shikha Mehta, ―Comparative Analysis of Nature Inspired Algorithms on Data Clustering,‖ IEEE International Conference on Research in Computational and Communication Network(ICRCICN), pp. 119-124. 6. Shi Cheng, Yuhui Shi, Quande Qin, ShujingGao, ―Solution Clustering Analysis in Brain Storm Optimization Algorithm,‖ IEEE Symposium on Swarm Intelligence (SIS), 2013, pp. 111-118.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 39
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
7. Amin AlizadehNaeini, SaeidHomayouni,"Improving the Dynamic Clustering of Hyperspectral Data Based on the Integration of Swarm Optimization and Decision Analysis",IEEE JOURNAL OF SELECTED TOPICS IN APPLIED EARTH OBSERVATIONS AND REMOTE SENSING, VOL. 7, NO. 6, JUNE 2014, pp.2161-2173 8. Athabasca University,2Anna University,Kannan Govindarajan1, David Boulanger1, Jérémie Seanosky1, Jason Bell1, Colin Pinnell1, Vivekanandan Suresh Kumar1, Kinshuk1, ThamaraiSelvi Somasundaram2, ―Performance Analysis of Parallel Particle Swarm Optimization Based Clustering of Students,‖ IEEE 15th International Conference on Advanced Learning Technologies DOI 10.1109, 2015, pp. 446-450. 9. Imicio G. Medeiros and J6ao C. Xavier-Junior,Anne M. P. Canuto, ―Applying the Coral Reefs Optimization Algorithm to Clustering Problems,‖ IEEE 2015. 10. AnindyaHalder, ―Kernel based Rough Fuzzy c-Means clustering optimized using Particle Swarm Optimization,‖ International Symposium on Advanced Computing and Communication (lSACC), 2015. 11. Song Ling, Qi Yunfeng,"Optimization of the Distributed K-means Clustering Algorithm Based on Pair Analysis", 8th International Congress on Image and Signal Processing (CISP 2015) 2015, pp. 1593- 1598. 12. SurjodoyGhoshDastider, HimanshuKashyap,ShashwataMandal, AbhinandanGhosh,SaptarsiGoswami, ―Feature Subset Selection for Clustering using Binary Particle Swarm Optimization,‖ International Conference on Information Technology DOI 10.1109, 2015, pp. 159-164. 13. Paulus Mudjihartono, ThitipongTanprasert, RachsudaJiamthapthaksin, ―Clustering Analysis on Alumni Data Using Abandoned and Reborn Particle Swarm Optimization,‖IEEE, 2016, pp. 22-26. 14. Ioan-Daniel Borlea, Radu-Emil Precup and Florin Dragan, ―On the Architecture of a Clustering Platform for the Analysis of Big Volumes of Data,‖ IEEE International Symposium on Applied Computational Intelligence and Informatics, 2016, pp. 145-150. 15. Mohammad Reza Farmani and GiulianoArmano, ―Clustering Analysis using Opposition-based API Algorithm‖,IEEE,2015. 16. Min Chen and Simone A. Ludwig,―Fuzzy Clustering Using Automatic Particle Swarm Optimization‖,IEEE International Conference on Fuzzy Systems (FUZZIEEE),2015 pp. 1545-1552. 17. ching-yi Chen, Fun Ye, ―Particle Swarms Optimization Algorithm and its Application to Clustering Analysis,‖ International Conference on Networking, Sensing & Control,2004,pp. 789-794. 18. Simon Fong, Raymond Wong, and Athanasios V. Vasilakos, Senior Member, ―IAccelerated PSO Swarm Search Feature Selection for Data Stream Mining Big Data,‖IEEE Transactions On Services Computing, Vol. 9, No. 1, January/February 2016, Pp. 33-45. 19. PushpalathaK,Ananthanarayana V S ―A New Glowworm Swarm Optimization Based Clustering Algorithm for Multimedia Documents,‖ IEEE International Symposium on Multimedia, 2015 DOI 10.1109, pp. 262-265. 20. Yong Zhang, Dun-wei Gong, ―Multi-objective Particle Swarm Optimization Approach for Cost-based Feature Selection in Classification,‖IEEE Transactions On Journal Name, Manuscript Id Doi 10.1109/Tcbb.2015, Pp. 1545-5963. 21. ShafiqAlam, Gillian Dobbie, Yun Sing Koh, Patricia Riddle, ―Web Bots Detection Using Particle Swarm Optimization Based Clustering,‖ IEEE Transactions On Instrumentation And Measurement, Vol. 64, No. 12, December 2015,pp.3588-3600. 22. Ruchika R. Patil,Amreen Khan, ―Bisecting K-Means for Clustering Web Log data,‖ International Journal of Computer Applications (0975 – 8887),2015, pp. 36-41. 23. Zhang Ke1, Huang Lei, Chai Yi,"An Algorithm to Adaptive Determination of Density Thresholdfor Density-based Clustering",Proceedings of the 35th Chinese Control Conference July 27-29, 2016, pp. 3929-3935. 24. ChaitraH.V,Dr. Ravikumar G.K,"A secure and energy efficient cluster optimization by using hierarchal clustering technique",Third International Conference on Devices, Circuits and Systems (ICDCS'16) ,2016,pp.93- 97.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 40
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
A STUDY ON ―WHETHER TAXATION IS A SELLING TOOL FOR LIFE INSURANCE‖WITH REFERENCE TO ICICI PRUDENTIAL LIMITED – COIMBATORE
Mr.S.TAMILMANI
M.COM(CS).,M.COM.,MBA.,M.Phil., ASSISTANT PROFESSOR DEPARTMENT OF CORPORATE SECRETARYSHIP PSG COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCE COIMBATORE-14 [email protected] +91 9843395573
ABSTRACT Life is important and life lost has a tremendous impact on your near and dear ones. The emotional scars are hard to cure but one may never want their family to go through financial crisis as well. With this view Insurance has been allowed as a major deduction by the Income-tax so that more and more people invest in Life Insurance. This article attempt to find the taxation is a selling tool for life insurance and awareness among customer on the benefit of life insurance as a tax planning tool.
KEYWORDS: Life Insurance, Taxation, ICICI Prudential
INTRODUCTION The insurance sector in India has come a long way from being a private sector industry, then to nationalization and back to a liberalized market again. Tracing the developments in the Indian insurance sector reveals the 360-degree turn witnessed over a period of almost fifty years. The British companies started life insurance business in India, by issuing policies exclusively on the lives of European soldiers and civilians. They sometimes issued policies on the lives of Indians by charging extra premium. Different insurance companies like Bombay insurance company limited (1973) and Oriental life insurance company (1818) were formed to issue life assurance policies in India. Gradually, the first Indian company named as Mutual life insurance society limited was formed in December 1870. By 1871, the total number of companies working in India was 20, out which was 7 were Indian and the remaining were British companies. During the period from 1870 to 1900, a large number of Indian companies were formed under Indian companies act, 1866. The business was confined to a few communities and occupations only.
OBJECTIVES 1) To study the awareness among customer on the benefit of life insurance as a tax planning tool 2) To identify whether insurance is opted as a tool for saving tax
METHODOLOGY The study is based on primary data of the company with a questionnaire, and remaining data are secondary data from the articles and websites.
COMPANY OVERVIEW ICICI Prudential Life Insurance Company Limited (ICICI Prudential Life) is promoted by ICICI Bank Limited and Prudential Corporation Holdings Limited. ICICI Prudential Life began its operations in fiscal year 2001 and has consistently been amongst the top players in the Indian life insurance sector. Our Assets under Management (AUM) as on 31st March 2018 were `1,395.3 billion. At ICICI Prudential Life, we operate on the core philosophy of customer centricity. We offer long term savings and protection products to meet different life stage requirements of our customers. We have developed and implemented various initiatives to provide cost- effective products, superior quality services, consistent fund performance and a hassle-free claim settlement experience to our customers. In FY2015 ICICI Prudential Life became the first private life insurer to attain assets under management of `1 trillion. ICICI Prudential Life is also the first insurance company in India to be listed on NSE and BSE.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 41
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
FISCAL PARTICULARS 2001 Our Company started operations 2002 Crossed the mark of 100,000 policies 2005 Crossed the mark of 1 million policies 2008 Crossed the mark of 5 million policies Crossed receipt of `100 billion of total premium Crossed `250 billion of assets under management 2010 Established Subsidiary for the purposes of undertaking pension funds related business Our Company turned profitable - registered profit of `2.58 billion Crossed `500 billion of assets under management 2012 Started paying dividends 2015 Crossed `1 trillion of assets under management 2017 First insurance company in India to list on NSE and BSE
ANALYSIS 1.1. FIRST WORD THAT COMES TO YOUR MIND WHEN YOU COME ACROSS THE WORD ―TAX PLANNING‖ Occupation Lic Savings Insurance
Business 4 21 66
Charted Accountant 5 7 32
Doctor 2 4 20
Engineer 4 6 27
Lawyer 7 13 35
Professor 6 13 38
Total 28 64 218
Percentage (%) 9.33 18 72.67 INFERENCE From the above table 1.1. infer that ―among the population‖ 72.67% choose insurance for tax planning. This shows that there is a huge boom for this insurance sector. Among the various sources of selling insurance tax planning is one of the main tools 1.2. TAX SAVING SCHEME IN ICICI PRU Very Weighted Occupation Good Poor Total Rank Excellent Good Fair Score
Business - 2 88 - - 90 272 1
Charted - - 42 - - 42 126 4 Accountant
Doctor - - 24 - - 24 72 6
Engineer - 1 37 - 1 39 116 5
Lawyer - 2 48 - 1 51 153 3
Professor - 1 53 - - 54 163 2
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 42
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
INFERENCE From the above table 1.2. inferred that the tax saving scheme (if you invest 110000rs you can save up to 33660rs) in ICICI Prudential is a good product and 97.33% of the population has agreed to that, and 0.67% of the population did not agree that the scheme in ICICI Prudential is good.
1.3. THERE IS A COMPLETE TAX EXEMPTION FOR THE TOTAL SUM AT MATURITY Neither Strongly Strongly Weighted Occupation Agree Agree Nor Disagree Total Rank Agree Disagree Score Disagree
Business 2 56 18 10 4 90 354 1
Charted 2 29 7 2 2 42 195 4 Accountant
Doctor - 18 2 2 2 24 89 6
Engineer - 33 3 1 2 39 150 5
Lawyer 3 38 3 3 4 51 224 3
Professor 2 37 9 2 4 54 235 2
INFERENCE From the above table 1.3. can infer that the awareness about the ―tax exemption‖ at maturity is been agreed by most of the people Among the 90 businessmen, 58 of them agreed and 32 of them did not agree Among the 42 charted accountants, 31 of them agreed and 11 of them did not agree Among the 24 doctors, 18 of them agreed and 6 of them did not agree Among the 39 engineers, 33 of them agreed and 6 of them did not agree Among the 51 professors, 41 of them agreed and 10 of them did not agree Among the 54 businessmen 39 of them agreed and 15 of them did not agree.
1.4. SAVING TAX WITH ―TAX SAVING AND BIG RETURNS‖
Product Neither Strongly Strongly Grand Weighted Of Agree Agree Dis Dis Rank Agree Total Score Insurance Nor Agree Agree Disagree
Saving - 55 - - - 55 220 3 Tax
Life Cover 4 73 - - - 77 312 2
Investment - 105 - - - 105 420 1
Child - 52 - - - 52 208 4 Education
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 43
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Retirement - 11 - - - 11 44 5
INFERENCE From the above table 1.4. infer that everyone who has chosen insurance for saving tax has chosen insurance only for big returns and tax saving at maturity, and everyone agrees that there is a big returns and tax saving at the time of maturity.
1.5. PREFERENCE LEVEL OF PEOPLE AMONG VARIOUS SOURCES OF TAX SAVING National Public Mutual Housing Rank Insurance Savings Provident Fund Loan Certificate Fund
1 238 4 26 6 30
2 38 50 100 52 56
3 6 64 84 68 78
4 12 116 30 74 72
5 6 66 60 100 64
Total 300 300 300 300 300
CHI-SQUARE CONTINGENCY TABLE TEST FOR INDEPENDENCE
National Mutual Insurance Total Savings Fund Certificate Row Observed 238 10 26 274 1
Expected 68.50 137.00 68.50 274.00
Row Observed 38 102 100 240 2
Expected 60.00 120.00 60.00 240.00
Row Observed 6 132 84 222 3
Expected 55.50 111.00 55.50 222.00
Row Observed 12 190 30 232 4
Expected 58.00 116.00 58.00 232.00
Row Observed 6 166 60 232 5
Expected 58.00 116.00 58.00 232.00
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 44
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Total Observed 300 600 300 1200
Expected 300.00 600.00 300.00 1200.00
1. Hypothesis: Null Hypothesis (H0) : The preference level of various tax saving sources of the respondent and various tax savings are independent.
Alternate Hypothesis (H1) : The preference level of various tax saving sources of the respondent and various tax savings are not independent.
2. Statistical Test : Chi-Square Test of Independence
3. Level of Significance : 0.05
4. Degrees of Freedom : 8
5. Calculated Value 2 : 829.16
6. Critical-value : 15.5
INTERPRETATION Since the calculated value is greater than the tabulated value, the null hypothesis is rejected. Therefore the preference level of various tax saving sources of the respondent and various tax savings are not independent
FINDINGS The awareness among the tax exemption for the maturity is been agreed by most of the population It is inferred that ―among the population‖ 72.67% choose insurance for tax planning. Among the various sources of selling insurance tax planning is one of the main tools It is inferred that everyone who has chosen insurance for saving tax has chosen insurance only for big returns and tax saving at maturity Taxation plays the major role in selling insurance because insurance is changing to be investment more than savings Most of the people wants to save themselves from paying heavy tax so it becomes the major element The schemes in ICICI Prudential is appreciated by most of the tax payers
RECOMMENDATIONS The company is targeting the taxation to sell the insurance policies but the insurance policy is sold for many other purpose and taxation plays a major role in selling the policies. Hence the company could take appropriate measures to this segments There is general feeling of insecurity among the people regarding the job of an agent with a private life insurance company. Hence the company must take measures to in still a sense of security among the people about the job because most of the people suggest the advisor for saving tax Awareness is needed to create the importance of life insurance not only for high class people but also for all classes of people
CONCLUSIONS Life insurance is sold with many aspects in mind and one of the major promoting aspects is taxation. ICICI Prudential does use taxation as a means for selling life insurance. In this regard, the study conducted has proven that taxation plays a vital role in the promotion of various life insurance plans.
REFERENCES BOOK REFERENCES Kothari C.R.-―Research Methodology‖-New Age International Publishers, Second Edition, New Delhi- 2004
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 45
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Kotler, Philip-―Marketing Management‖-Pearson hall of India Private Ltd., Eleventh Edition, New Delhi-2004 JOURNAL REFERENCES K.J. Benny Chan 2005.‖Pitch Life Insurance in India‖ April 14,2005 Quarterly review-―ICICI Prudential Life Insurance Co Ltd‖ January 2005 Quarterly review-―ICICI Prudential Life Insurance Co Ltd‖ May 2005
WEBSITE REFERENCES www.iciciprulife.com
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 46
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
A STUDY ON EXPORT LOGISTICS COST FOR SHIPPERS OF MARINE PRODUCTS
Dr.J.RENGAMANI, Dr.R.SRINIVASAN & Dr.S.POONGAVANAM
Professor, AMET Business School, AMET University, Chennai.
ABSTRACT Since logistics advanced from 1950s, there were numerous researches focused on this area in different applications. Due to the trend of nationalization and globalization in recent decades, the importance of logistics management has been growing in various areas. For industries, logistics helps to optimize the existing production and distribution processes based on the same resources through management techniques for promoting the efficiency and competitiveness of enterprises.
KEY WORDS: Express delivery, Air logistics, Land logistics, Marine logistics & ransportation.
ROLE OF TRANSPORTATION IN LOGISTICS CHAIN The key element in a logistics chain is transportation system, which joints the separated activities. Transportation occupies one-third of the amount in the logistics costs and transportation systems influence the performance of logistics system hugely. Transporting is required in the whole production procedures, from manufacturing to delivery to the final consumers and returns. Only a good coordination between each component would bring the benefits to a maximum. The purpose of this paper is to re-clarify and redefine the position relationship between transportation and logistics systems through collecting and analyzing various applicationcases and practices in logistics from literatures. It is to provide a general framework and expect to be referred for further development and researches. The paper started from introducing the development of logistics and transport-related sectors based on a historical review. Afterwards it discussed the interrelationships of transportation and logistics. It expresses the benefits that transportation brings to logistics activities and vice versa. Finstance the increase of the efficiency of logistics also would bestead to release traffic load in the urban areas. Furthermore, some major logistics activities and concepts were also discussed in this paper. It especially presents City Logistics independently due to it is considered as a main tendency and an available method of future integration of transport and logistics in the urban areas. Finally, this paper will discuss and conclude the potential further development of logistics systems.
HISTORY AND ADVANCEMENT OF LOGISTICS Logistics was initially a military activity concerned with getting soldiers and munitions to the battlefront in time for flight, but it is now seen as an integral part of the modern production process. The main background of its development is that the recession of America in the 1950s caused the industrial to place importance on goods circulations. The term, logistics, was initially developed in the context of military activities in the late 18thand early 19thcenturies and it launched from the military logistics of World War II. The probable origin of the term is the Greek logistics, meaning ‗skilled in calculating‘. (BTRE, 2001) Military definitions typically incorporate the supply, movement and quartering of troops in a set. And now, a number of researches were taken and made logistics applications from military Proceedings of the Eastern Asia Society for Transportation Studies, Vol. 5, pp. 1657 - 1672, 20051659activities to business activities. Business logistics was not an academic subject until the 1960s. A key element of logistics, the trade-off between transport and inventory costs, was formally recognized in economics at least as early as the mid-1880s. (BTRE, 2001) Based on the American experience, the development of logistics could be divided into four periods (Chang, 1998)Before the 1950s, logistics was under the dormant condition. Production was the main part of the managers concerned, and industry logistics was once regarded as ―necessary evil‖ in this period. During the 1950s to and 1960s, applying new ideas of administration on business was a tendency. Drucker (2001), who thought Logistics was The Economy‘s Dark Continent, regarded the procedure of physical distribution after producing products as the most possible development area in American businesses but also the most neglected area. Lewis‘s study (cited in Chang, 1998) in 1956 on the role of air transportation in physical distribution was the application of ―total cost concept‖ and it pointed out the notions of trade-off between inventory and transportation. From the 1970s onwards, more and more applications and researches of logistics appeared. Due to petroleum price rise in 1973, the effects of logistics activities on enterprises grew. Slow growth of market, pressure of high stagflation, release of transportation control, and competitions of the third world on products and materials all increased the significance of logistics system on planning and business at that time. The further tendency of logistics in the early 21st century is logistics alliance, Third Party Logistics (TPL) and globalised logistics. Logistics circulation is an essential of business activities and sustaining
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 47
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology competitiveness, however, to conduct and manage a large company is cost consuming and not economic. Therefore, alliance of international industries could save working costs and cooperation with TPL could specialize in logistics area.
INTERRELATIONSHIPS BETWEEN TRANSPORTATION AND LOGISTICS Without well-developed transportation systems, logistics could not bring its advantages into full play. Besides, a good transport system in logistics activities could provide better logistics efficiency, reduce operation cost, and promote service quality. The improvement of transportation systems needs the effort from both public and private sectors. A well-operated logistics system could increase both the competitiveness of the government and enterprises.
THE EFFECTS OF TRANSPORTATION ON LOGISTICS ACTIVITIES Transportation plays a connective role among the several steps that result in the conversion of resources into useful goods in the name of the ultimate consumer. It is the planning of all these functions and sub-functions into a system of goods movement in order to minimize cost maximize service to the customers that constitutes the concept of business logistics. The system, once put in place, must be effectively managed. Traditionally these steps involved separate companies for production, storage, transportation, wholesaling, and retail sale, however basically, production/manufacturing plants, warehousing services, merchandising establishments are all about doing transportation. Production or manufacturing plants required the assembly of materials, components, and supplies, with or without storage, processing and material handling within the plant and plant inventory. Warehousing services between plants and marketing outlets involved separate transport. Merchandising establishments completed the chain with delivery to the consumers. The manufacturers limited themselves to the production of goods, leaving marketing and distribution to other firms. Warehousing and storage can be considered in terms of services for the production process and for product distribution. There have been major changes in the number and location of facilities with the closure of many single-user warehouses and an expansion of consolidation facilities and distribution centres. These developments reflect factors such as better transport services and pressures to improve logistics performance.
MARITIME LOGISTICS Maritime industry plays an important role in international freight. It can provide a cheap and high carrying capacity conveyance for consumers. Therefore, it has a vital position in the transportation of particular goods, such as crude oil and grains. Its disadvantage is that it needs longer transport time and its schedule is strongly affected by the weather factors. To save costs and enhance competitiveness, current maritime logistics firms tend to use largescaled ships and cooperative operation techniques. Moreover, current maritime customers care about service quality more than the delivery price. Thus, it is necessary to build new logistics concepts in order to increase service satisfaction, e.g. real-time information, accurate time windows and goods tracking systems. The operation of maritime transport industry can be divided into three main types: (1) Liner Shipping: The business is based on the same ships, routes, price, and regular voyages. (2) Tramp Shipping: The characters of this kind of shipping are irregular transport price, unsteady transport routes, and schedule. It usually delivers particular goods, such as Dry Bulk Cargo and crude oil. (3) Industry Shipping.
AIR FREIGHT LOGISTICS Air freight logistics is necessary for many industries and services to complete their supply chain and functions. It provides the delivery with speed, lower risk of damage, security, flexibility, accessibility and good frequency for regular destinations, yet the disadvantage is high delivery fee. Reynolds-Feighan (2001) said air freight logistics is selected ‗when the value per unit weight of shipments is relatively high and the speed of delivery is an important factor‘. The characteristics of air freight logistics are that: (1) airplanes and airports are separated. Therefore, the industries only need to prepare planes for operation; (2) it allows to speed delivery at far destinations; (3) air freight transport is not affected by landforms.
LAND LOGISTICS Land logistics is a very important link in logistics activities. It extends the delivery services for air and maritime transport from airports and seaports. The most positive characteristic of land logistics is the high accessibility level in land areas. The main transport modes of land logistics are railway transport, road freight transport and pipeline transport. Railway transport has advantages like high carrying capacity, lower influence by weather conditions, and lower energy consumption while disadvantages as high cost of essential facilities, difficult and expensive maintenance, lack of elasticity of urgent demands, and time consumption in organizing railway carriages. Road freight transport has advantages as cheaper investment funds, high accessibility, mobility and availability. Its disadvantages arelow capacity, lower safety, and slow speed. The advantages of pipeline transport are high
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 48
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology capacity, less effect by weather conditions, cheaper operation fee, and continuous conveyance; the disadvantages are expensive infrastructures, harder supervision, goods specialization, and regular maintenance needs.
EXPRESS DELIVERY As the increasing demand of time accuracy and decentralization of production, the need to reduce stock costs has led to the Just-In-Time (JIT) delivery principle, which involves more frequent delivery of materials at the right time and at the right place in the production process. The characteristics of express delivery are: (1) door-to-door service; (2) efficiency; (3) traceability; (4) Just-In-Time (JIT); (5) growing various delivery demands The trend toward increasingly compact products is expected to improve the cost-benefit ratio of express delivery by decreasing the transportation cost share. Smaller products will enlarge the market for express delivery services. Also, the increasing value of products requires rapid transportation, because companies want to reduce the interest costs bound up in stock and inventories. For future development, the industries should consider integrating the services with 24-hour stores so that customers could choose a certain shop as the pick-up station. Meanwhile, the services would become more efficient and controlled due to more regular routes to those shops instead of personal houses.
CONCLUSION It includes the increasingly complex information, communication and control systems required in today's business environment.The planning, execution, and control of the movement / placement of goods and / or people, and the related supporting activities, all within a system designed to achieve specific objectives.Logistics management is that part of supply chain management that plans, implements, and controls the efficient, effective forward and reverse flow and storage of goods, services and related information between the point of origin and the point of consumption in order to meet customers' requirements.A widespread idea prevails that logistics is 'movement of goods'.
REFERENCES 1. Khot, A.P. & Kulkarni, P.P. (2012) Supply Chain Performance Measurement. MPGI National Multi Conference (MPGINMC). 2. Stroh, M.B. (2002) What is Logistics? Logistics NetoworkInc, New Jersey. 3. Rushton, A., Croucher, P. & Baker, P. (2006). The handbook of logistics and distribution management. Kogan Page Limited: London. 4. Stroh, M.B. (2006). A practical guide to transportation and logistics. Logistics Network Inc: New Jersey. 5. Rushton, A., Croucher, P. & Baker, P. (2006). The handbook of logistics and distribution management. Kogan Page Limited: London. 6. Stroh, M.B. (2006). A practical guide to transportation and logistics. Logistics Network Inc: New Jersey. 7. Harland, C.M., Lamming, R.C., Walker, H., Phillips, W.E., Caldwell, N.D., Johnsen, T.E., Knight, L.A. & Zheng, J. (2006). Supply management: Is it a discipline? International Journal of Operations and Production Management, 26 (7), 730-753. 8. Kent, J.L. & Flint, D.J. (1997). Perspectives on the evolution of logistics thought. Journal of Business Logistics, 18 (2), 15-30 9. Rushton, A., Croucher, P. & Baker, P. (2006). The handbook of logistics and distribution management. Kogan Page Limited: London. 10. Stroh, M.B. (2006). A practical guide to transportation and logistics. Logistics Network Inc: New Jersey.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 49
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
STUDY OF EFFECT OF ANXIETY ON ACADEMIC ACHIEVEMENT OF SENIOR SECONDARY SCHOOL STUDENTS IN RELATION TO THEIR INTELLIGENCE
DEEPIKA MEHTA Presented at the International Conference on recent trends in arts, science, engineering & technology. ICRTASET-2018 +91-8447801256, [email protected]. Teacher and Research scholar, SOFL, IGNOU, New Delhi. India.
ABSTRACT Scholastic or academic achievement is an important aspect of school education which frames the future scope for students‘ higher education and career options. There are different factors that contribute towards the academic achievement of the students like students‘ conceptual learning and understanding in class which further depends on numerous factors like child interest and motivation in the subject that they study, the devices, and teaching methods adopted by teachers in class and family setup. The experts believe that intelligence can‘t be increased as it is inborn and students differ from one another in intelligence, motivation, anxiety and educational interests. All these factors influence the academic achievement of students. In terms of intelligence, achievement is directly proportional to the intelligence level of the student. To achieve high scores in exams, anxiety is inevitable which may be an obstacle in scholastic achievement. As per previous studies, anxiety can bear positive as well as negative effect on the achievement level. If the anxiety level is moderate, it positively affects the achievement of the students but if the anxiety level is low or high, it affects negatively. With a quest to find the impact of anxiety on the academic achievement of students in relation to their intelligence, the article has presented quantitative investigation and findings to comprehend the influence of anxiety on the relationship of the academic achievement and intelligence among X, XI and XII grades‘ students of a Senior Secondary Schools of Bahadurgarh, an urban city of Haryana state. From the study, it was found that there was a positive correlation. The correlation between anxiety and intelligence was found to be +.19. The correlation between intelligence and academic achievement was +.65 and between anxiety and academic achievement pertaining out intelligence was +.40. Partial correlation showed that anxiety negatively influence intelligence and intelligence had positive impact on the academic achievement of the students.
KEYWORDS: Anxiety, Intelligence, Academic achievement, School students.
INTRODUCTION The world has become a competitive playground for a children, whereacademic achievement is the key factor for their personal progress. Parents‘ desire that their children climb the ladder of achievement as high as possible whichputs pressure on the students, teachers and in general education system itself. Achievement of students in our country is measured in terms of her/hisperformance in examination. It appears as if the whole system of education revolves round the academic achievement of students.Learning and achievement of students largely depends on guidance available to them. Teacher is the first source of guidance for students to guide them properly thoroughly in respect to their personality characteristics and environmental conditions. There are several factors and with constraints of time and space it is not possible to control and study them all factors in one research work. Within such constraints, the investigator has no alternative but to delimit his study to two variables which are intimately related to the child‘s achievement i.e. Anxiety and Intelligence. Good (1973) in his dictionary defined achievement as academic knowledge attained or skills developed in the school subjects usually designed by list scores or by marks assigned by the teachers or by both. An achievement test is used to measure nature and extent of students learning in a particular subject. Various factors and conditions affect the achievement of a particular student in particular field. Out of which, intelligence is one which affects the most but it is not the sole factor determining the academic achievement of students. Sometimes quite able student may not achieve as can be expected on the basis of his abilities because the student ay not take interest in the field. Teacher‘s methodology of teaching plays a significant role in academic achievement of students. Economic conditions and family setup also effect student‘s performance directly or indirectly. In addition to all these, there are certain factors genetically determined or environment based. Among these factors or primary importance are emotional factors. Emotionality of a child may seriously affects child‘s achievement because anxiety may occur in various forms and at various levels. So it is very difficult to see its effect on academic achievement as it may act as a motivating factor. But anxiety exceeding a particular threshold level may disturb child‘s emotional functioning and may also be a hurdle in concentration and motivation for achievement. The desire to achieve high adds a lot of pressure on students which develops tension and anxiety. Anxiety in a way, is the most intimate experience to man. It enters into man‘s life with the first breath and ends with the last. It is the main cause of all mental disorders. The word ‗anxiety‘ came from the Latin word‗anxietus‘ which means ‗experience of varying blends of uncertainty, agitation and threat‘. According to
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 50
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
May (1950), ―Anxiety is diffuse apprehension differing from fear in its vagueness and objectives senses and as a state that is associated with feeling of uncertainty, helplessness and threat to core or essence of personality‖.According to Sullivan (1953), ―Anxiety is a state of tension arising from the experience of disapproval in interpersonal relation.‖ According to Sarason et al. (1960), ―The anxiety experience involves the fundamental emotions of fear, shame, guilt and anger.‖According to Dutt (1974), ―Anxiety constitutes particular unpleasant psychological and physiological reactions of an organism to extrinsic or/and intrinsic threat which amounts to disintegration or extinction of the organism.‖ The term ‗Anxiety‘ seems to be diffused if one looks at the various definitions because it lacks singular operational reference. Nevertheless, there is substantial convergence of opinion of its general nature. But there is agreement that the effects of anxiety are generally maladaptive and debilitating rather than adoptive and facilitating with respect to scholastic behavior.Freud identified three kinds of anxiety viz. – objective anxiety, neurotic anxiety and normal anxiety, depending on whether the source of danger was from external world or from internal impulses or conflicts. Objective anxiety which was synonymous with fear was evoked by real dangers in external world. The intensity of objective anxiety was proportional to the actual danger. Neurotic Anxiety was evoked by unaccepted sexual and aggressive impulses that had been severely and consistently punished in childhood. A study of research reveals four bases of classification of anxiety which are listed below or are briefly described in the section to follow:(i) Normal anxiety and Neurotic anxiety.(ii) Situational anxiety and Characterological anxiety. (iii)Conscious anxiety and Unconscious anxiety. (iv) State anxiety and Trait anxiety
Anxiety as a Motivator:There are many positive aspects of anxiety, but usually the negative aspects are highlighted. A little anxiety from time to time can be beneficial to task performance. Illustrated by Yerker- Dodsn law (1908) which postulated that the relationship between anxiety and learning is curvilinear. Neither lower nor higher level of anxiety improves performance. Optional positive effect is obtained in the middle range. There is research evidence which supports it and indicates a curvilinear relationship between test anxiety and performance. Applications of Yerker-Dodsn Law to human learning seems eminently sensible.
Intelligence: Literaturereview in the field of intelligence in last decades, indicates three main perks in the development of the understanding of abilities. The first begins with Spearman and Binet, when Spearman propounded the notion of general factor of intelligence. The second follows with the discovery of the primary abilities through the more, advanced method of factor analysis which resulted in many primary abilities. The third around 1950's when G factor of the Spearman was divided into more than one factors usually located at second order level. Wechsler (1943) defined intelligence as "The aggregate or global capacity of individual to act purposefully, to think rationally and to deal effectively with his environment."Thorndike defined intelligence as "The ability to adopt new situations or adjust with environment." Various theories of intelligence can be classified as Unifactor or Monarchic theory, Two Factor theory, Multi Factor or Group Factor theories, Hierarchical theories, Developmental theories and Cognitive or Information Processing theories.
Spearman‘s two Factors Theory:In 1904, Charles Spearman propounded two factor theory of intelligence. The basic assumption of Spearman's theory is that all mental tasks require two kinds of abilities, a general ability 'G' and a specific ability 'S‘. General ability is common to all intellectual tasks and it is 'central fund of intellectual energy' in the brain. Spearman suggested that each individual possesses this mental energy (G) in limited amount and at the same time, there are individual differences also with respect to the amount of G factor. It is basically the ability to grasp relationship between fundamentals promptly and use them effectively.In the light of further research findings, Spearman revised his theory. Later he acknowledged the possibility of group factors such as verbal ability and spatial ability without changing the original positions of 'G' and 'S'. The new group factors are conceived to be intermediate in scope, while 'G' remains the factor of overall importance.Intelligence tests can be broadly classified into two groups:
On the basis of administration of test:Intelligence tests can be divided into two groups: 1) Individual Tests: The tests which are given to one individual at a time. 2) Group Tests: The test which can be administered on large number of individuals at a time. On the basis of form:Intelligence tests are again divided into two types: 1) Verbal Tests: The test in which language is used to give response to a question. 2) Non-Verbal Tests: The tests in which language is used only for giving necessary instructions to the subject. The tests, involve such activities in which the use of language is not necessary.
INDIVIDUAL VERBAL TESTS: The tests which require the use of language and are administered to one individual at a time e.g. Stanford Binet Scale
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 51
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
INDIVIDUAL NON-VERBAL TESTS: The tests in which language is used only to give necessary directions to the subject. There are mostly performance tests. Generally following activities are used in such tests:to fit blocks in the holes, e.g. Senguin Form Board Test; block building, e.g. Kohn's Block Design Test; Picture- completion test. e.g. Healy's Pictorial Completion Test.
GROUP VERBAL TESTS: The tests in which language is used and are administered to large no. of individuals simultaneously, e.g.Army Alpha Test and Army General Classification Test.
GROUP NON-VERBAL TESTS: These tests are administered to a group at him- and they don't require the use of language. Such tests include:Army Beta Test; Test of General Ability; CattellCulture Free Intelligence Test; Raven's Progressive Matrices. The main objectives were to quantitatively study the relationship between anxiety and academic achievement, to study the relationship between anxiety and intelligence, to study the relationship between intelligence and academic achievement, to study the effect of anxiety on achievement pertaining out intelligence, to study the effect of anxiety on intelligence pertaining out achievement and to study the effect of intelligence on achievement pertaining out anxiety.
THE HYPOTHESES OF THE STUDY: There is no relationship between anxiety and academic achievement.There is no relationship between anxiety and intelligence. There is no relationship between intelligence and academic achievement. There is no effect of anxiety on academic achievement. There is no effect of anxiety on intelligence. There is no effect of intelligence on academic achievement.
DELIMITATION OF THE STUDY: The present study was delimited to the delimited to three variables: Anxiety, Academic Achievement, and Intelligence on students of class X, XI and XII of one school only between the age group of 14-18 years only. Previous Studies conducted in India and abroad:Sarason (1963) reported a low negative but significant correlation between anxiety and achievement. He suggested that anxiety scales which are specific to certain kinds of situations may prove to be more useful inacademic situations than the general anxiety scale. His results supported this suggestion and there was a more significant negative correlation between test anxiety and achievement than between general anxiety and achievement. Negative correlation was stronger for females than males. Sarason and Stoopes on their study recorded that high anxious students made higher estimates than the low anxious students.Lunneborg (1964) reported a low negative correlation between anxiety and achievement when he gave three anxiety scales (TASC, GASC, CMAS) to 213 boys and girls in Grade IV to VI. The negative correlation between anxiety on TASC scores and -achievement scores tended to be higher than was the case for other two general anxiety measures. Further, the negative correlation tended to be larger for boys than for girls.Sharma (1970) supported the Verkes Dodson Law by his studies on the school sample. The law states that the relationship between anxiety and learning takes the form of inverted U-shaped curve which means that the optimum level of motivation for effective performance, lies in the middle ranges, rather than at the high or low ends of the curve.Bhagirath (1978) conducted a study ―correlates of academic achievement as perceived by the teachers and students of high school‖. He stated that teachers and students perceived the correlates of academic achievement as intelligence, character, creativity, punctuality, alertness,work efficiency, social and emotional adjustment. Pandit (1979) conducted a study on the role of anxiety in learning and academic achievement. He used the Test Anxiety Scale for Children and self-made achievement test. The results of his study shown that anxiety bore a negative relationship with learning and academic achievement and when anxiety was experimentally induced, the lowest anxiety' group showed a significant improvement in the re- test.Mithlesh Dixit (1985) designed a comparative study of the academic achievement and intelligence of adolescent boys and girls studying in classes IX and XI. Half of them were boys and half were girls. The results indicated that there was no difference in the academic achievement of intellectually superior and very superior boys and girls. At all other intellectual levels, the academic achievement of the girls was superior to that of boys. In general, the intelligence test scores of the boys were higher than those of the girls.Thilalgavathi, T. (1990) studied the academic achievement in relation to intelligence, creativity and anxiety. The sample comprised of 400 first year higher secondary boys and girls who were selected from a population of 2,871 students from 20 higher secondary schools of Kanya Kumari revenue district, by random sampling technique. The major findings of the study were that of the total 400 students of the sample, the 19.25% were high achievers, 60.75% were average achievers and 20% were low achievers. The high, average and low achievers differed significantly among themselves in their intelligence. The high achievers secured comparatively high mean score than the average and the low achievers in creativity. The high achievers group belonged to low level anxiety group and the low achievers group belonged to high level anxiety group. The influence of anxiety was found to be negative on the academic achievement.Shanti Pramod (1997) conducted a study on ―Future Time
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 52
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Perspective, Cognitive Efficiency, Achievement Motivation, Anxiety and Academic Performance among Xlth Standard Boys and Girls. The present research was conducted on 300 Xlth standard, boys and girls studying in matriculation school of Tamil Nadu, on the variables of future time perspective, cognitive efficiency, achievement motivation, anxiety and academic performance. Data were collected using suitabletools of measure and processed. Results indicated that these factors contribute significantly to academic performance suggesting that these personal variables of future time perspective, cognitive efficiency, achievement motivation and anxiety have a predictive value on academic performance.Saxena (2004) conducted a study to investigate the relationship between intelligence and academic achievement in English. This study is an attempt to study that how far intelligence is related to students‘ academic achievement in English. The objectives of the study were: (1) To find out whether students differ in their I.Q. score w.r.t. sex, medium of instruction, locality and nature of management (2) To find out the extent of relation to achievement in English. (3) To find out whether sex of the students, medium of instruction, locality and nature of management of the school have any influence on students‘ academic achievement. The sample of this study comprises of 320 boys and 260 girls of XII grade from 16 higher secondary schools of Coimbatore district, both from rural and urban areas. After investigation,, researcher concluded that (i) Intelligence of students positively influenced their academic achievement in English, (ii) Students having higher level of intelligence preferred English medium classes and urban schools, (iii)Sex of the students had no influence on their intelligence, as well as academic achievement in English, (iv) Students preferred school of different types of management irrespective of their level of intelligence, (v) The medium of instruction and the locality of school had influenceon students‘ academic achievement in English, (vi) The sex of the students and the nature of management of the school had no significant influence on their academic achievement.Nimavathi and Gnandavan (2007) conducted a study of relationships between achievement and anxiety of high school students. The study has following objectives: (1) To find out the level of achievement motivation of high school students; (2) To find out the level of anxiety of high school students; (3) To find out whether there is a significant relationship between achievement motivation and anxiety of high school students; (4) To find out whether there is a significant relationship between achievement motivation and anxiety of high school students with respect to (a) gender; (b) type of school; (c) locality of the school. Rao‘s achievement motivation test (1974) and Sinha‘s Anxiety Scale (1966) have been administered to a random sample of 200 high school students of Chidambaram. The main findings of the study were: (1) Achievement motivation of high school student is high; (2) Anxiety of high school students in low; (3) There is a significant relationship between high school students‘ achievement motivation and anxiety; (4) There is a significant relationship between achievement motivation and anxiety in the case of boys; (5) There is no significant relationship between achievement motivation and anxiety in the case of girls; (6) There is a significant relationship between achievement motivation and anxiety in the case of student studying private schools; (7) There is a significant relationship between achievement motivation and anxiety in the case of students studying in urban schools; (8) There is a significant relationship between achievement motivation and anxiety in the case of student studying in rural schools. Sandra Hampel, Susanne Weis, Wolfgang Hiller, Michael Witthoft (2011) conducted a study, the relations between social anxiety and social intelligence: A latent variable analysis. Social anxiety has been associated with biases in cognitive processing and deficits in social performances. Yet, it remains unclear if these variations may be partly attributable to deficits in fundamental social abilities: for example, social intelligence (SI). Using the Magdeburg Test of Social Intelligence (MTSI) as an objective and performance based SI measure, we examined the relationship between social anxiety and SI in a general population sample (N=110) using Structural Equation Modelling. Dimensions of social anxiety as postulated by Clark and Wells (1995) and facets of SI (social understanding, social memory, and social perception), were negatively correlated. Use of safety-behaviour in particular was related to deficits in social understanding (r = - 0.25; p < 0.05) and social perception and memory (r = -0.24; p < 0.05). Results suggest small to medium sized relationships between specific facets of social anxiety and certain domains of SI. Therapeutic implications for socially anxious individuals concerning SI are discussed.
METHODOLOGY: The methodology procedure for the study covers the research method used, the sample selected, the research tools used and the procedure of their administration and scoring.
SAMPLING: The investigation was carried with the sample of total of 100 students studying in three grades X, XI and XII of Bahadurgarh based co-ed., Adarsh High School. The students studying in these school come from different socio-economic status group.
RESEARCH INSTRUMENTS USED: For the investigation the tools used were Hindi version of Test Anxiety Scale (TAS) developed by Dr.V.P.Sharma; Hindi version of Jalota's General Mental Ability Test (GMAT) and Academic achievement scores of the students obtained from their previous exams.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 53
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
The Test Anxiety Scale (TAS)evaluates test performance in a more comprehensive and valid way, Test Anxiety Scale was developed for the first time in 1950 by Sarason and Mandler - 'Test Anxiety Questionnaire'. Keeping in view the examination pattern and the cultural findings in India, this Test Anxiety Scale has been red-developed by Dr.V.P.Sharma for school children.The TAS was administered in the class on all students together. They were given some instructions related to the test. They were told that the test was a very simple and interesting one. There are a no. of statements given, to which you have to choose one answer out of 5 alternatives and mark (V) on the answer sheet against that option. There was no time limit in the test but the students completed it quite soon.They took an average of 10-12 minutes in answering the questions. Jalota‘s General Mental Ability Test was prepared to test general mental ability in 1980 with 100 items. The items were mixed and arranged in an empirically determined order of increasing difficulty. This test has been in use since 1951 in a variety of schools. In situations of Hindi speaking areas of North India, the test result appear to have been used in academic research studies. Test is a reliable and valid test. It is found to be equally valuable and suitable to the assessment of under graduate classes of Hindi speaking areas.Jalota's test of general mental ability was administered in the class on all the students present. They were assured of the secrecy of their results. They were told the test was an ability test. They have to answer 100 questions in 20 minutes. The students were asked to start only when their doubts had been cleared. The test had a time limit. The answer sheets and booklets were taken after 20 minutes and no student was allowed to continue with their task after the time was over and Academic achievement's data consisted of students‘ aggregate marks secured in their previous annual examination which were obtained from the record registers of the school. Statistical techniques used were Product Moment Correlation and Partial Correlation. Frequency distributions, Means, Medians, Standard Deviations, Skewness and kurtosis of all the variables included in the study were also computed.
ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION OF DATA: Frequency Distribution for three variables namely Anxiety, Academic Achievement and Intelligence were included in the study for a total group of 100 students. These distributions along with their' Mean, Median, Standard Deviation, Skewness and Kurtosis reported in Tables 1 to 3.Inspection of these tables reveals that the distributions are more or less normal.mFor Correlational Analysis, Product Moment Correlation were computed among all the variables used in the study and shown in Tables 4 to 6.Partial correlation was calculated between Anxiety and Academic Achievement keeping the Intelligence as constant, Anxiety and Intelligence keeping the Academic Achievement as constant and Intelligence and Academic Achievement keeping the anxiety as constant. The partial correlations shown in Tables 7 to 9.
FREQUENCY DISTRIBUTION TABLES 1, 2 ,3 ON SCORES OBTAINED 1. Anxiety (N=100) 2. Academic Achievement(N=100) 3. Intelligence (N=100) Class Frequency Class Interval Frequency Class Interval Frequency Interval 71-80 18 91-100 01 61-70 48 401-500 02 81-90 11 51-60 24 301-400 70 71-80 25 41-50 10 201-300 28 61-70 27 51-60 22 41-60 14 Mean 62.91 Mean 318.13 Mean 64.94 Median 63.5 Median 318 Median 64 Standard 8.33 Standard 32.46 Standard -12.62 Deviation Deviation Deviation Skewness -0.37 Skewness 0.33 Skewness 0.12 Kurtosis 0.17 Kurtosis -0.10 Kurtosis 0.94
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 54
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Table-4: Table showing relationship between Anxiety and Academic Achievement
Anxiety Academic Achievement Mean 62.91 Mean 318.13 X2 402637 Y2 10225035 XY=2012567 Pearson‘s Correlation r13=+.42 Interpretation: The Pearson‘s Correlation between Anxiety and Academic Achievement is +.42. It means Anxiety and Academic Achievement has positive correlation i.e. there is positive effect of Anxiety on Academic Achievement.
Table-5: Table showing relationship between Anxiety and Intelligence Anxiety Intelligence Mean 62.91 Mean 64.94 X2 402637 Y2 437504 XY=2012567 Pearson‘s Correlation r12=+.19 Interpretation:The Pearson‘s Correlation between Anxiety and Intelligence = +.19. It means Anxiety and Intelligence has positive correlation i.e. there is positive effect of Anxiety on Intelligence.
Table 6: Relationship between Intelligence and Academic Achievement Intelligence Academic Achievement Mean 64.94 Mean 318.13 X2 437504 Y2 10225035 XY=2092343 Pearson‘s Correlation r23=+.65 Interpretation:The Pearson‘s Correlation between Intelligence and Academic Achievement is +.65. It means Intelligence and Academic Achievement has positive correlation i.e. if Intelligence will be less, then Academic Achievement will also be less and if Intelligence will be more, then Academic Achievement will be high.
Table 7: Relationship between Intelligence and Academic Achievement Variable Anxiety Academic Achievement
Partial Correlation r13.2 +0.40 Interpretation: Partial Correlation between Anxiety and Academic Achievement is +0.40. It means anxiety has positive effect upon academic achievement, i.e. anxiety positively effects academic achievement.
Table 8: Relationship between Anxiety and Intelligence Variable Anxiety Intelligence
Partial Correlation r12.3 -0.17 Interpretation: Partial Correlation between Anxiety and intelligence is +0.17. It means anxiety has negative effect upon intelligence i.e. anxiety negatively effects intelligence.
Table 9: Partial correlation between Intelligence and Academic Achievement Variable Intelligence Academic Achievement
Partial Correlation r23.1 +0.71 Interpretation: Partial Correlation between intelligence and Academic Achievement is +0.71. It means intelligence has positive effect upon academic achievement i.e intelligence positively effects Academic Achievement.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 55
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
FINDINGS, CONCLUSION AND EDUCATIONAL IMPLICATIONS 1) Frequency Distributions, Means, Medians, Standard Deviations, Skewness and Kurtosis of all the variables included in the study showed them to be normally distributed. 2) There is correlation between Anxiety and Academic Achievement i.e. +.42. From her studies, the investigator has found that there is positive correlation between anxiety and academic achievement. It means anxiety positively influence academic achievement. 3) There is correlation between Anxiety and Intelligence i.e. +.19. From her studies, the investigator has found that there is positive correlation between anxiety and intelligence. It means anxiety positively affects intelligence. 4) There is correlation between Intelligence and Academic Achievement i.e. +.65. The investigator has found that there was positive correlation between intelligence and academic achievement. It means intelligence influences academic achievement of the students. 5) Partial correlation between Anxiety and Academic Achievement pertaining out Intelligence i.e. +.40. It means anxiety has positive effect on academic achievement i.e. anxiety positively effects academic achievement. 6) Partial correlation between Anxiety and Intelligence pertaining outAchievement was -0*17. It means anxiety has negative effect on intelligence i.e. anxiety negatively effects intelligence. , 7) Partial correlation between intelligence and Academic Achievement pertaining out Anxiety was +0.71. It means intelligence has positive influence on achievement i.e. intelligence positively affects achievement. : , Conclusively,we can say that this study was basically oriented to investigate the effect of anxiety on academic achievement in relation to intelligence. Anxiety was found to have effect on academic achievement of the students. Similarly, intelligence also has positive effect on the academic achievement of the students. On the basis of different findings, it is suggested that the students who are highly intelligent and are anxious achieve high in academics.The same study can be conducted on large sample and with other variables and can be further extended to other Districts and Universities. Educational implications of the study: 1) The teacher should study the students' achievement and if thestudents are successful then it can be increased by reward and applause. But if the level of students' achievement is not good then find out the problem so that it can be removed. 2) Anxiety and intelligence affect the scholastic achievement of the students. If the students of lower anxiety are inspired then the results will be positive. Parents and teachers'should keep the students away from anxiety prone environment. 3) The teacher‘s behaviour should be impartial and should pay complete attention towards poor students. He should solve their problems sympathetically and if possible separate classes should be arranged for backward students. 4) The teacher should pay special attention to backward students. Theyshould not be criticized. Special classes should be arranged to help them. 5) The parents should not compare their children's achievement from highly intelligent students because intelligence is an inborn ability. 6) Attitude of parents and teacher's towards the children should be sympathetic and co-operative. They must provide congenial environment at home and schools.
REFERENCES 1. Abdullatif, H., & Hamada, L. (1998). Optimism and pessimism: Their relationship with the two dimensions of personality, extraversion and neuroticism. Journal of the Social Sciences, 26(1), 84-104. (In Arabic). 2. Albert, R. and Habert, R.N. (1960). Anxiety in academic achievement situation. Journal of Abnormal Psychology. 61, 207-215. 3. Atkinson, J.W. and Litvin, G.H. (1960). Achievement motive and test anxiety as motives to approach success and avoid failure. Journal of Abnormal Sociological Psychology, 60, 52-53. 4. Basu, A. Kumar and Bose, S. (1979). Anxiety, Intelligence and scholastic achievement in secondary school children. Bombay Psychology, 3(2), 16-20. 5. Bist, A.R. (1979). Academic Achievement and Academic Stress. 1SPT. Journal of Research, 3(2), 16- 20. 6. Broen, W.E. (1959). Anxiety, Intelligence and Achievement, Psychology Rep., 5, 701-704. 7. Carier, N,L. and Jewell, D.O. (1966). Efficiency in measuring the effect of anxiety upon academic performance. Journal of Educational Psychology, 57, 23-28. 8. Cattell, R.B., and Scheir, L.H. (1961). The Meaning and Measurement of Neuroticism and Anxiety, New York: Ronald press.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 56
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
9. Compeau, Paggu.L. (1968). Test anxiety and feedback in programmed instructions. Journal of Educational Psychology, 59, 159-163. 10. Cox, EN. (1960). Correlates of general and test anxiety in children. Aust. Jr. Psychol., 12,596-602. . 11. Creed, P. A., Patton, W., &Bartrum, D. (2002). Multidimensional properties of LOT-R: Effects of optimism and pessimism on career and well-being related variables in adolescents. Journal of Career Assessment, 10, 42-61. 12. D. Da Fonseca, F. Cwy, E. Fakra, M. Rufo, F. Poinso, L. Bounoua, P. Huguet (2008). Implicit theories of intelligence and IQ test performance in adolescents with Generalized Anxiety Disorder, Behaviour Research and Therapy, Volume 46, Issue 4, April 2008, pp. 529-536 13. Dayal, G.T. and Forsyth, R.A. (1972). The effect of test anxiety, intelligence and sex on children‘s problem solving ability. J. Exp. Educ., 41(2), 23-26. 14. El-Zayat, F. An analytic study of self-concept dimensions and its relationship with academic achievement of primary school students in Saudi Arabia. The College of Education, AL Mansoura University, Egypt. Unpublished manuscript. 15. Gaudry, E. and Spielberger, C.D. (1971). Anxiety and Educational Achievement. John Wiley and sons. 16. Grooms, R.R. and Endler, N.S. (1960). The effect of anxiety on academic achievement, Journal of Educational Psychology, 51, 299-304. 17. Gupta, M. and Gupta, P, (1980). Worry and anxiety among failures and non-failures. Psychological Studies, 25 (10, 6365). 18. Heinrich, D. L. (1979). The causal influence of anxiety on' academic achievement for students of differing intellectual ability. Applied Psychological Measurement, 15, 1-11. 19. Hundal,T\s. and Sudhkar, Y.P. and Sidhy, K. (1972). Factor analytical study of measures of anxiety, intelligence and academic achievement. J.Psychol Res., 16, 28-34. 20. Jindal,C.R. and Panda, S.K. (1982). Anxiety and achievement: A Rorschach study of high and low achievers. Indian' Education Review, Vol. 17(4), 48-124. 21. Kazem (1973). A study of the relationship between anxiety level and university academic achievement. College of Girls, Ain Shams University, Cairo, Egypt. Unpublished PhD thesis. 22. Keller, - E.D. and Rowley, V.N. (1982). Anxiety, intelligence and Scholastic achievement in elementary school children. Psychol. Rep. 4, 19-22. 23. Kirkland, IC. and Hollands, Worth, J.G. (1978). Effective test taking: skills acquisition versus anxiety education techniques. Journal of Consultant Clinical Psychology, 25, 499-505. 24. Leith, G.O. and Davir, J.N. (1972). Age changes in relationship between neuroticism and achievement. Research in Education. No., 8, 61-70. 25. Lockett, C. T., & Harrell, .T. P. (2003). Racial identity, self-esteem, and academic achievement: Too much interpretation, too little supporting data. Journal of Black Psychology, 29, 325-336. 26. Lotmeborg, P.W. (1964). Relations among social desirability, achievement and anxiety measures in children. Child Development, 35, 169-182. 27. Noris, S. A., & Wright, D. (2003). Moderating effects of achievement striving and situational optimism on the relationship between ability and performance outcomes of college students. Research inHigher Education, 44, 327-346. 28. Sandra Hampel, Susanne Weis, Wolfgang Hiller, Michael Witthoft (2011) The relations between social anxiety and social intelligence: A latent variable analysis, Journal of Anxiety Disorders, In Press, Corrected Proof, Available online 20 January 2011.
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 57
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
Appendix: Data collection of the scores S.No Name TAS GMAT Final S.No. Name TAS GMAT Final . exam exam scores scores 1. Permila 71 65 325 2. Sachin 65 49 350 3. Teena 77 53 280 4. Sanya 63 74 298 5. Praveen 64 43 265 6. Sudhir 60 58 289 7. Munni 66 60 320 8. Nidhi 71 78 360 9. Surender 60 46 302 10. Monika 44 51 267 11. Raj 63 5 335 12. Anju 63 81 343 13. Yogesh 74 78 325 14. Rajesh 79 69 323 15. Abhay 72 49 315 16. Manjeet 61 63 301 17. Rahul 61 66 350 18. Pawan 57 86 365 19. Vijay 6 42 265 20. Ayush 69 67 308 21. Amit 6 49 350 22. Tushar 58 77 335 23. Sandeep 57 86 365 24. Himanshu 61 7 318 25. Anand 71 54 335 26. Aditya 43 59 265 27. Vivek 57 77 350 28. Uday 58 70 341 29. Sanjay 58 86 300 30. Preeti 68 79 319 31. Man Deep 62 50 306 32. Renu 49 54 283 33. Anil 68 89 355 34. Suman 61 66 350 35. Ramesh 56 52 275 36. Jitender 59 62 280 37. Ravinder 56 72 340 38. Geetanjali 66 61 316 39. Ashish 65 52 325 40. Bijender 65 42 265 41. Deepak 53 61 308 42. Pradeep 47 56 277 43. Tarun 59 68 325 44. Prachi 67 77 326 45. Chetna 69 48 295 46. Savita 65 52 325 47. Ojasvi 71 76 309 48. Satish 63 74 298 49. Rashmi 67 63 304 50. Mahender 67 63 304 51. Rashu 71 78 360 52. Akshay 68 73 71 53. Varun 44 51 267 54. Karan 63 81 346 55. Tushar 71 65 325 56. Kapil 77 83 403 57. Harshit 60 58 289 58. Karamveer 58 86 309 59. Ramesh 61 63 301 60. Dinesh 66 60 320 61. Jaspreet 72 49 315 62. Reema 69 67 318 63. Nicky 71 76 309 64. Gunjan 52 67 285 65. Ranjeet 66 76 340 66. Seema 68 89 355 67. Inderjeet 67 6 304 68. Sonia 67 63 328 69. Monika 77 53 280 70. Mukesh 83 92 415 71. Chirag 49 54 283 72. Shiv 58 77 335 73. Pooja 59 62 289 74. Hema 57 77 352 75. Shekahar 64 43 265 76. Sneh 47 53 279 77. Ritesh 58 73 387 78. Ritika 47 56 277 79. Meenakshi 62 50 308 80. Nitu 56 53 278 81. Sunil 67 58 287 82. Krishan 33 65 335 83. Yogita 69 81 369 84. Jaya 53 61 308 85. Ashu 56 72 340 86. Nidhi 60 46 302 87. Sunny 61 73 318 88. Jasbir 69 48 295 89. Deepanshu 43 59 265 90. Neelam 65 49 350 91. Karan 68 79 341 92. Prabha 71 78 360 93. Seema 71 54 335 94. Nisha 74 78 325 95. Khushi 79 69 323 96. Gauri 55 67 295 97. Simran 61 66 353 98. Manish 68 89 375 99. Yogesh 57 86 365 100. Kanta 66 63 378
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 58
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
PERFORMANCE EVALUATION OF EDGE DETECTORS - ADAPTIVE THRESHOLDING BASED EDGE DETECTION FOR BRAIN TUMOR FROM MR IMAGES
Dr.S.MANIKANDAN1, B.CHITRADEVI2& S.DEVI THIRUMAGAL3
1Head, Department of Computer Science and Engineering, Sri Ram Engineering College, Chennai, 2Assistant Professor, Thanthai Hans Roever College(Autonomous), Perambalur, 3Research Scholar,Thanthai Hans Roever College(Autonomous), Perambalur.
Abstract Edge detection is one of the fundamental approaches in image processing which aim at identifying points in a digital image. It is an important method for medical image segmentation. Generally, edge has detected according to some early brought forward algorithms, but they are not so good for noisy medical image edge detection. In order to overcome this problem, adaptive threshold and canny algorithm has proposed. Proposed technique is used for computing an optimal threshold value used by adaptive threshold for edge detection. The various edge detection algorithms are compared with the proposed algorithm and their performance are evaluated using the evaluation metrics. From the experimental results, the proposed algorithm was better than the existing methods.
Keywords:Medical image processing, Brain tumor, Edge detection, Adaptive threshold, MRI images.
INTRODUCTION Magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) is a non-invasive imaging technique which is used in medical applications to produce high quality images of the inside of the human body. Recently, this technique is successfully applied to obtain detailed pictures of organs, soft tissues, bones and virtually all other internal body structures [1]. However MRI is especially popular in routine clinical practices as the most sensitive imaging test of the brain and nerve tissues. It provides clear images of the brainstem and posterior brain which allow demonstrating pathological alterations of the nerve tissues and detecting most of the brain disorders. After MRI image acquisition various post processing algorithms are applied to magnetic resonance images in order to extract more information or enable better visualization of information in magnetic resonance images. Especially, detection of tissue borders is performed, as a process of a great importance while recognition of pathological alternations in MRI images. In medical image processing, edge detection is a fundamental task that needs to point out the exact edges to get the best results [1]. The image edge detection refers to extraction of the edges in a digital image. The aim of this process is to find points in an image where discontinuities or sharp changes in intensity arise. This process is vital to understanding the content of an image and has its applications in image analysis. The edge detection aims to localize the boundaries of objects in an image and it is a basis for many image processing applications. Usual approaches to edge detection are computationally expensive because each set of operations has conducted for each pixel. In usual approaches, the computation time rapidlyrise with the size of the image. Aproposed approach has the potential of overcoming the limitations of usual methods [2]. In this research, the edges are extracted more precisely which defines the boundaries of the object from the given image. It is used as a trained set for recognizing a particular object from the group image. In this paper, an effort is made to study and analyses the performance of frequently used edge detection techniques. The well-liked parameters such as signal to noise ratio (SNR), Mean square error (MSE) andstructure similarity Index (SSIM) are considering to analysis the performance of proposed method and existing methods [3].
EDGE DETECTION METHODS Edge detection is a fundamental method used in most image processing applications to get information from images as aancestor step to feature extraction and object segmentation. This process detects boundaries between objects and the background in the image at which the image brightness changes sharply or more formally has discontinuities. The image containing these boundaries is known as edge map [4]. In this paper, the various edge detection techniques are applied for obtaining the fine edges as follows:
i. Canny edge detector ii. Sobel edge detector iii. Prewitt edge detector iv. Robert edge detector v. Proposed System
ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 59
International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology
CANNY EDGE DETECTOR The Canny edge detection operator was developed by John F. Canny in 1986 and uses a multi-stage algorithm to detect a wide range of edges in images. An optimal edge detector is based on the following three criteria:
1. Good detection: The algorithm should mark as many real edges in the image as possible. 2. Good localization: Marked edges should be close as possible as to the edge in the real scene. 3. Minimal response: A given edge in the image should only be marked once, and where possible, image noises should not create false edges [5].
This edge detection method has following in five important steps:
Smoothing: The image is smoothened using the Gaussian filter, to reduce noise. Detecting gradients: The edges ought to be checked where the angles of the image have vast extents. The local gradient G(x,y) is calculated by using the following equation,
The edge direction is computed at each point with the values of Gxand Gyby using the following equation,
The strength of edge point is non-maximum suppression. In this method, only local maxima should be marked as edges. The edge points detected in step 2 give rise to ridges in the gradient magnitude image. The technique then follows beside the top of these points as well as sets to zero every pixel which are not really on the ridge top so as to provide a thin line in the output, a process which is known as non maximal suppression. Double thresholding: Potential edges are determined by thresholding. The ridge pixels are then thresholded using two thresholds, T1 T2, with T1 Gx= Gy= ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 60 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology The canny edge detector has smoothing effect to remove noise and good localization response. It enhances signal noise ratio as well as immune to noisy Environment but difficult to implement to real time response and also time consuming [7]. SOBEL EDGE DETECTOR The Sobel operator is particularly used for edge detection algorithms. Technically, it is a discrete differentiation operator, computing an image intensity function. At each point in the image, the result of the Sobel operator is either thecorresponding opposite of the gradient vector or the norm of this vector. The Sobel operator is based on convolving the image with a small, separable, and integer valued filter in horizontal and vertical direction and is therefore relatively inexpensive in terms of computations [8]. On the other hand, the opposite of the gradient approximation that it produces is relatively crude, in particular for high frequency variations in the image.Here, Gx and Gyare masks represented as follows, G = Gx= y ퟐ ퟐ |푮| = 푮풙 + 푮풚 The point of introduction of the edge (with respect to the pixel framework) offering ascend to the spatial angle is given by: 퐺 3휋 θ = 푎푟푐푡푎푛 푦 - 퐺푥 4 In this system, orientation θ is taken to mean that the direction of maximum contrast from black to white runs from left to right on the image, and other angles are measured anticlockwise from this. Often, this absolute magnitude is the only output the user observes the two components of the gradient are conveniently computed and added in a single pass over the input image [9]. PREWITT EDGE DETECTOR The Prewitt operator is used for edge detection algorithms. This operator does not place any pixels which are closer to the center of the mask. Technically, it is a discrete differentiation operator, computing an image intensity function. At each pixel in the image, the result of the Prewitt operator shows the corresponding gradient vector or the norm of this vector. The prewitt operator is based on convolving the image with a small, separable, and integer valued filter in horizontal and vertical direction and in terms of computations. On the other hand, the gradient operator is relatively crude for high frequency variations in the image.Prewitt operator is similar to the Sobel operator and is used for detecting vertical and horizontal edges in images [10]. In simple terms, the operator calculates the gradient vector of the image intensity at each point, giving the direction of the largest possible increase from light to dark and the rate of change in that direction. Mathematically, the operator uses two 3×3 kernels which are convolved with the original image to calculate approximations horizontal and vertical changes of the derivatives. Here A as the source image, the row mask and the column mask are two images which at each point contain thehorizontal and vertical derivative approximations, the latter are computed as: Gx= Gy= These parts are intended to react maximally to edges running vertically as well as on a level plane in respect to the pixel matrix, one portion for every one of the two opposite introductions. The bits can be connected independently to the given image, to create separate estimations of the slope part in every introduction (call these Gx as well as Gy). These would then be able to be joined together to locate the total extent of the slope at each point moreover Δf = (푮ퟐ) X + (푮ퟐ) Y ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 61 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Δf = |(푮ퟐ) X | +|(푮ퟐ)) Y | The point of introduction of the edge (in respect to the pixel framework) Giving ascent to the spatial slope is given by The above condition appears Computation of the inclination of an image depends on acquiring the halfway subordinates. Let the 3×3 are appeared as The 3×3 region of an image represents the grey levels in a neighborhood of an image. These subsidiaries can be actualized for a whole image by utilizing the masks with the strategy of convolution. A slide variation of these two equations uses a weight of 2 in the center coefficient. A weight value of two is used to achieve some smoothing by giving more importance to the centre point figure 1,called the Prewitt operators, is used to implement these two equations [11]. ROBERT OPERATOR The Roberts edge detection technique is the most basic of all the techniques discussed. It performs a simple, quick to compute, gradient measurement on an image. Pixel values at each point in the output represent the estimated absolute magnitude of the spatial gradient of the input image at that point. The operator consists of a pair of 2×2 convolution kernels as shown in equation. Extension to the higher image dimensions is not possible in this edge detection technique [12]. Gx= Gy= Robert mask convolve with the entire image using horizontal and vertical Robert masks to give edge detected image in x direction and y direction respectively. 2×2 region of an image is given as follows, Horizontal and vertical derivative approximate equation: ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 62 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology The magnitude of this edge detector is given by The in addition to factor of this administrator is its straightforwardness however having little portion it is exceedingly delicate to commotion not and very little good with the present innovation. This administrator plays out a basic, snappy to figure, 2-D spatial inclination estimation on a picture. It therefore features areas of high spatial inclination which frequently compare to edges. In its most regular utilization, the contribution to the administrator is a dark scale image, just like the yield. Pixel esteems at each point in the yield speak to the evaluated total size of the spatial inclination of the info picture by then [13] [14]. PROPOSED SYSTEM Thresholding is called adaptive threshold when a different type of threshold is used for different regions in the image. This is known as local or dynamic Thresholding. Thresholding assumes that the image have pixel values generally different from the background. In the proposed approach, initially edges are extracted using an adaptive variation threshold. The connectivity of the edges is increased and then obtained using ACO. The threshold is used to segment an image by setting all pixels whose intensity values are above a threshold to a foreground value and all the remaining pixels to a background value. Whereas the conventional threshold operator uses a global threshold for all pixels, adaptive threshold changes the threshold dynamically over the image [15]. This more sophisticated version of threshold can accommodate changing lighting conditions in the image, e.g. those occurring as a result of a strong illumination gradient or shadows. The threshold value is calculated for each pixel in the image. If the pixel valueis below the threshold value it is set to the background value, otherwise it assumes the foreground value[16]. RESULTS AND DISCUSSIONS This section presents the experimental results of the proposed techniques of edge detectors such as Canny, Sobel, Prewitt, Roberts operator and Adaptive threshold method. One major reason to design an objective quantitative evaluation method is to compare the results from f different edge detection techniques. So here the performances of the algorithms are measured using the metrics such as PSNR, MSE, and SSIM. Figure1 shows the resultant images obtained by various edge detection methods. The following figure shows the resultant images obtained by various edge detection methods, Proposed Original Canny Sobel Prewitt Robert Method ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 63 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology FIGURE1: RESULT OF EDGE DETECTION METHODS TABLE1: PERFORMANCE METRICS FOR VARIOUS EDGE DETECTION METHODS Proposed Sobel Prewitt Robert Canny Method 23.032 SNR 23.032 23.03 23.144 24.184 MSE 5.8077 5.8085 5.5254 7.5106 4.9085 SSIM 0.8625 0.8664 0.9474 0.9853 0.9983 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 64 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Table1 shows the performance metrics obtained for the various edge detection methods.From table1, it has been observed that the PSNR and SSIM values for adaptive threshold method are higher when compared to other methods and MSE value is lower than for proposed method. Hence, the adaptive threshold method would be the best method to reduce the redundant edge pixels, and to detect the correct edges. CONCLUSION This paper has presented comparison of various edge detection algorithms by measuring their performance using evaluation metrics. Here, the adaptive threshold is proposed for edge detection. From the experimental results, it is inferred that the proposed method shows good result when compared to other methods. REFERENCES 1. Anna Veronica Baterina, Carlos Oppus,‖Image Edge Detection using ACO‖, WSEAS transaction on Signal Processing, Volume6, Issue2, 2010, Pages: 2-5. 2. GholamaliRezai-Rad, Majid Aghababaie,‖Comparison of SUSAN and Sobel Edge Detection in MRI Images for Feature Extraction‖, IEEE transaction on Information and Communication Technologies, volume1, October 2006, Pages 1103 - 1107. 3. P.Subashini, M.Krishnaveni, Suresh Kumar Thakur, ―Quantitative Performance Evaluation on Segmentation Methods for SAR ship images‖, Proceedings of the Third Annual ACM Bangalore Conference, 2010. 4. Taghizadeh, M.; Hajipoor, M.,‖Hybrid Algorithm for Segmentation of MRI Images Based on Edge Detection‖, IEEE transactions on Soft Computing and Pattern Recognition, Dec2011, Pages 107 - 111. 5. Moslem Taghizadeh, Mohammad Reza Mahzoun, ‖Bidirectional Image Thresholding algorithm using combined Edge Detection and P-Tile algorithms‖, The Journal of Mathematics and Computer Science, Volume2, 2011, Pages 255-261. 6. N. Senthilkumaran and R. Rajesh,‖ Edge Detection Techniques for Image Segmentation – A Survey of Soft Computing Approaches‖,International Journal of Recent Trends in Engineering, Vol. 1, No. 2, May 2009 250 . 7. HarelimanaJoyeuse, et.al, ―Implementation of Edge Detection for a Digital Image‖, KIST-AO Electronics and telecommunication engineering 2008. 8. Guennadi (Henry) Levkine,‖Prewitt, Sobel and Scharr gradient 5x5 convolution matrices‖, Image Processing Articles, Second draft, June 2012. 9. Wenshuo Gao; Xiaoguang Zhang; Lei Yang; Huizhong Liu, "An improved Sobel edge detection," Computer Science and Information Technology (ICCSIT), 2010 3rd IEEE International Conference on , vol.5, no 1. 10. HarelimanaJoyeuse, et.al, ―Implementation of Edge Detection for a Digital Image‖, KIST-AO Electronics and telecommunication engineering 2008. 11. Vishwadeep Garg et.al.,‖ Image Texture Enhancement through an Improved Grunwald-Letnikov Fractional Differential Mask, International Journal of Advanced Computer Science and Applications, Vol.3, No.3, Dec2011. 12. Sharifi, M.; Fathy, M.; Mahmoudi, M.T.,‖A Classified and Comparative Study of Edge Detection Algorithms‖, IEEE, International conference on Information Technology: Coding and Computing, 2002, Pages 117 - 120. 13. Raman Maini, HimanshuAggarwal,‖Study and Comparison of various image edge detection techniques‖, International Journal of Image Processing (IJIP), Volume (3) : Issue (1), 2009. 14. Yang Chao,‖A comparison of medical image analysis algorithms for edge detection‖, Bachelor Thesis, June2010. 15. Tarek A. Mahmoud, Stephen Marshall, ―Medical Image Enhancement Using Threshold Decomposition Driven Adaptive Morphological Filter‖, 16th European Signal Processing Conference (EUSIPCO 2008), EURASIP, 2008. 16. Manisha Kaushal, ArjanSingh ,Baljit Singh, ―Adaptive Thresholding for Edge Detection in Gray Scale images‖, International Journal of Engineering Science and Technology, Volume2(6), 2010, Pages2077- 2082. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 65 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology SOCIOLOGICAL STUDY OF LABOURWELFARE MEASURES IN KSRTC- SPECIAL REFERENCE TO BANGALORE CITY Dr.N.PARAMESHWARA *Assistant Professor, (Guest), Dept, of Sociology, P.G.centre Ramanagara, Bangalore University, Ramanagara. (M) 9886181031, Mail:- [email protected] ABSTRACT The present study was under taken with such a task in mind and it aims at unearthing the strengths and weakness of the welfare measures in ksrtc- special reference to Bangalore city. Road Transport is indispensable for the development of the economy of a country. It remains the elementary choice of mobility of people and transport of goods due to its deftness in utility, efficiency and unique litheness enhanced by a flawless link to other transport means. Road Transport always plays a principal role of transporting short and medium distance passenger interchange. In India, it is the only mode of transport capable of linking villages to the mainstream. Goods/passengers have been moved by land and sea ever since our human race settled in town and urban areas. With the increase in road network, and linking of more villages with urban centers, the pressure on public Passenger Transport System is ever on the increase. In India, passenger road transportation is afforded and operated by both public and private sectors. This survey is done within the organization. The sample size is 100. The data was collected by administering questionnaire and by adopting direct personal contact method. The persons met are all employees of the concern. Key words: welfare measures, Transportation, INTRODUCTION: Welfare is comfortable living and working conditions´. Employee welfare means the efforts to make life worth living for workman. Welfare is comfortable living and working conditions´. People are the most significant asset of an association, and the accounting occupation has to assess and record the value and cost of people of an organization. Once this is accepted, the need for measuring the value for recording it in the books of accounts arises. The value of human assets can be increased considerably by making investment in their training and welfare activities in the same way as the value of repairs/overhauling, etc. A well-know and co-ordinate system of transport role in the sustained economic growth of a country. Like many economic activities that are incentives infrastructures; the transport sector is an important component of the economy impacting on development and the welfare of population. When transport systems are efficient, they provide economic social opportunities and benefits that results in positive multipliers effects such as better accessibility to markets, employment and Additional investments. When transport systems are deficient in terms of capacity or reliability, they can have an economic cost such as reduced costs, while inefficient transportation increases costs, the impacts of transportation are not always intended, and can have unforeseen or united consequences such has congestion. Transport also carries an important social and environmental load, which cannot be neglected. The added value and employment effect of transport services usually extend beyond employment and value generated by that activity; indirect effect are salient. For instance, transportation companies purchase a part of their inputs from local suppliers. The production of these inputs generates additional value added and employment in the local economy. The suppliers in turn purchase goods and services form other local firms. There are further rounds of local re- spending which generate additional value added and employment. Labor health, safety and welfare are the measures promoting the efficiency of labor. Employee welfare is an important feature of industrial relations and is a vital ingredient in smooth employer-employee relations. Employers offer extra incentives in the form of employee welfare schemes on order to increase employee welfare and to make it possible to persuade workers to accept mechanization. Sometimes employers use employee welfare as a tool to minimize the effect of the influence of outside agencies on their employees. Measures related to employee welfare are key to bringing about the desired level of employee satisfaction, motivation and productivity in an organization. The basic objective of employee welfare measures is to ensure wellbeing, both physical and mental, of an employee. An organization must view employee welfare measures as an investment rather than an expense because its profitability is directly significantly in employee welfare measures. The primary purpose of undertaking employee welfare measures is to win and preserve the goodwill and loyalty of employees (Durai, 2010). The progress of both a company and a country are largely dependent on worker welfare and attitude towards work. Thus, evaluating the employee welfare facilities provided by an organization assumes importance. The focus of the present research is to study the employee welfare facilities in four public sector undertakings in Karnataka. The basic features of labor welfare measures are as follows: ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 66 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 1. Labor welfare includes various facilities, services and amenities provided to workers for improving their health, efficiency, economic betterment and social status. 2. Welfare measures are in addition to regular wages and other economic benefits available to workers due to legal provisions and collective bargaining 3. Labor welfare schemes are flexible and ever-changing. New welfare measures are added to the existing ones from time to time. 4. Welfare measures may be introduced by the employers, government, employees or by any social or charitable agency. 5. The purpose of labor welfare is to bring about the development of the whole personality of the workers to make a better workforce. NEED FOR THE STUDY Employees play an important role in the industrial production of the country. Hence, organizations have to secure the cooperation of employees in order to increase the production and to earn higher profits. The cooperation of employees is possible only when they are fully satisfied with their employer and the working conditions on the job. In the past, industrialists and the employers believed that their only duty towards their employees was to pay them satisfactory wages and salaries. In course of time, they realized that workers require something more important. In addition to providing monetary benefits, human treatment given to employees plays a very important role in seeking their cooperation. Further, human resource managers realized that the provision of welfare facilities contribute a lot towards the health and efficiency of the workers. All the same, organizations need to provide various social security benefits such as medical care, mortality benefits, pension etc., as specified by law. It is a fact that the provision of social security benefits is a kind of wise investment that offers good social dividends in the long run. REVIEW OF LITERATURE Gilmer.B.A (1998) Journal, Industrial and Labour Relations, Commel University, Ithaca, Vol.36, observes that labour welfare amenities will cement Labour‘s ties with the management and restrict its mobility. But this will also increase the employer‘s power and influence over the workers personal lives. Pande Arvind (1999), in his article ―A Public Sector Competitiveness‖, Productivity Vol.40, No.2 July-September critically examines the situation of the public sector competitiveness-globalisation and liberalization have affected the public sector performance and hence its performance needs to be judged in the backdrop of such competition winds of change. Performance of Public sector is to be judged in an environment of competition and liberalization. Kannan (2001) stated that the ever increasing demand for welfare funds for each and every sub-sector of the informal sector may be viewed as a desperate reaction of the workers for a measure of social security in an unprotected labour market. Punekar, Deodhar and Sankaran (2004) in their book, ―Labour Welfare, Trade Unionism and Industrial Relations‖ stated that labour welfare is anything done for the comfort and improvement, intellectual and social-well being of the employees over and above the wages paid which is not a necessity of the industry. Malik (2007) in his book discussed the various welfare measures to be provided to workers and employees under various Acts Viz., Mines Act, 1952, Factories Act, 1948, Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 etc. OBJECTIVES The main objective of the study is to inquire into the welfare and social security measures provided to employees and the specific objectives are as follows. To study the organisational framework and operational policies of A Study on Labour Welfare Measures in KSRTC (with reference to Bangalore City) To know the opinions of employees about the provision of welfare and social security benefits and also to know the adequacy of these facilities. To find out the extent to which employees are satisfied or dissatisfied with the various welfare and social security benefits. HYPOTHESES Welfare measures help in improving the standard of living of employees directly and increase their real incomes indirectly thereby these measures create a contended workforce leading to improved performance of the company in terms of achievement of targets, increased production, productivity etc. The provision of social security benefits protects employees against contingencies of modern life such as sickness, old-age, invalidity, unemployment etc due to which employees develop emotional bondage with the company leading to industrial peace and reduced absenteeism. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 67 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology METHODOLOGY There is consensus among social science research that use of proper methodology and research techniques plays a crucial role. Such techniques when guided by the objectives of the study yield accurate results. As explains in research the choice of an appropriate techniques must be dictated by the objectives if the study under consideration. SELECTION OF SAMPLE ORGANISATION AND RESPONDENTS As it was felt to take up a study on employee welfare and social security measures in a Karnataka state road transport company in Bangalore. With lots of efforts, the researcher could get the permission from the management of KSRTC, Bangalore to collect the necessary data. The company also permitted the researcher to elicit the views of employees on employee welfare and social security measures in KSRTC labors. A sample of 100 respondents, who include 50 women labors and 50 men labors have been chosen from the using stratified random sampling technique or method. SOURCES OF DATA COLLECTION Data were collected both from primary and secondary sources. The researcher personally visited the KSRTC; Bangalore city bus divisions to collected first hand information through personal contacts, and extensive interviews. Data collection was a pains-taking effort, and all endeavors were made to collect the relevant information with missionary zeal. SECONDARY SOURCES Secondary sources of data were also used. They include annual reports, office records, files, brochures and other published and unpublished material of the company as well as books, and Government reports. PRIMARY SOURCES Data were collected through the principal tools of questionnaires, interviews and observation. A questionnaire on employee welfare and social security measures has been designed and developed after referring various standard text books and magazines and it was used as the principal instrument for data collection. The sample is found suitable to serve the purpose of the present enquiry and the questionnaire was administered to all the sample respondents. Interview technique too was used to supplement the data obtained through questionnaires SIGNIFICANCE OF THE STUDY The study is of great significance for it ascertains the opinions of employees on welfare and social security measures in a big Government sector undertaking like KSRTC. The assessment of employee welfare and social security measures will be of immense help to the management of the company and also the government for the formulation of sound employee oriented policies in future. Further, the study provides scope for implementing changes in the policies relating to employee welfare and social security measures. LIMITATIONS The study has the following limitations. The researcher has to make indefatigable efforts to collect relevant information by running from pillar to post. Employees were hard pressed for time in view of the job demands, and rigorous work schedules. Hence, the researcher has to persuade them for sparing time for responding to the questionnaires and interviews. When he found that the respondents were not able to spend adequate time for the purpose, he had to request them to allot time after the shift timings. In fact, establishing rapport with the respondents posed a problem initially. COMPANY PROFILE The Karnataka State Road Transport Corporation (KSRTC) is a state-owned road transportation company in the state of Karnatakain India. Corporation has the largest fleet of Volvo buses among state owned transport companies in India. It is wholly owned by the Government of Karnataka. Urbanization in India has never been as rapid as it is in the recent times. The urban population in India is currently growing at around 2.3 per cent per annum. The tier II and III cities are growing very fast and in the coming 20 years would contribute enormously to the city population. Proper urban transportation system in most of the cities has been absent, leading to dependence on personalized vehicles and also on IPTs. HISTORY The state of Mysore, Mysore Government Road Transport Department (MGRTD) was inaugurated on 12 September 1948 with 120 buses. The transport department of The Mysore state is administrated until 1961. After the Government of Mysore was subsequently converted into an independent Corporation under Section 3 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 68 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology of the Road Transport Corporation Act, 1950 on 1st of August 1961, In 1961 after successfully converted into an independent corporation all assets and liabilities of MGRTD has transferred to MSRTC. In 1st of October 1961 Bangalore Transport Service [BTS] also merged with the MSRTC. In 1 November 1973 the Mysore state was renamed into Karnataka state, also 1 November 1973 MSRTC is rename into KSRTC. In August 1997, KSRTC was divided to form Bengaluru Metropolitan Transport Corporation (BMTC). In November 1997, another new road transport corporation called North Western Karnataka Road Transport Corporation (NWKRTC) was formed to cater to the transportation needs of North Western parts of Karnataka. Later, the North Eastern Karnataka Road Transport Corporation (NEKRTC) was also formed with its corporate office in Gulbarga. PRESENT STATUS Corporation has its corporate office at Shanthi Nagar, Bangalore. Presently, it covers seventeen Districts (Bengaluru Urban, Bengaluru Rural, Ramanagara, Kolar, Chickballapur, Tumkur, Chitradurga, Davanagere, Shivamogga, Mangaluru, Udupi, Chikkamagaluru, Hassan, Mysuru, Mandya, Chamarajnagar, and Kodagu) in the State under its operational jurisdiction. It has totally 17 Divisions – 16 operating Divisions viz. Bengaluru Central, Ramanagar, Tumkur, Kolar, Chickballapur, Mysuru City, Mysuru Rural, Mandya, Chamarajnagar, Hassan, Chikkamagaluru, Mangaluru, Puttur, Davanagere ,Shivamogga,Chitradurga and 1 bus station division viz., KBS. 79 Depots, 4 Regional Workshops, 1 Central Training Institute, 2 Regional Training Institutes, 1 Printing Press and 1 Hospital. It has a workforce of about 37019 employees. It operates 26.65 lakh km daily holding a fleet of 10829 vehicles (Volvo 190, Volvo Multi Axle 141, Volvo City 50, Mercedes-Benz 10, Mercedes-Benz Multi Axle 20, Corona Sleeper 74, Corona Seater 7, Scania 56, Tata 4605, Ashok Leyland 2856, Eicher 336 and Swaraj Mazda 3 and more.), earns traffic revenue of Rs. 747.08 lakh daily catering to 26.18 lakh passengers on an average. It stands 5th amongst STUs in the Nation by size. Corporation services covers 92% villages in Karnataka. KSRTC operates with a total fleet of 23829 buses (KSRTC-8348, NEKRTC-4343, NWKRTC-4716, BMTC–6422). It transports, on an average, 74.57 lakh passengers per day. It also operates to the neighboring states of Maharashtra, Andhra Pradesh, Telangana, Tamil Nadu, Puducherry, Goa and Kerala. KSRTC was the first state transport corporation to introduce Volvo B7RLE low floor city buses in India in 2005. At present, KSRTC operates TATA, Ashok Leyland, Eicher Motors are More, Also Volvo, Mercedes Benz, Scania buses under the A/C (Airavat) services (Airavat means the mythical white elephant in Kannada). Number of bus by corporation:- KSRTC – 8348, NEKRTC – 4343, NWKRTC – 4716, BMTC – 6422, Total – 23,829 LABOUR WELFARE: Labour welfare measures implemented in KSRTC : KSRTC has introduced many labour welfare measures for the benefit of the employees out of them a few major welfare schemes are explained below. ‗ De-addiction centre : A de-addiction programme, WAPPA (Work place alcohol prevention programme and activity) was implemented in KSRTC since 1997 as a worker reach out program. The policy objectives are. To prevent alcohol abuse among all employees as a part of the corporations commitment to the health and welfare of its employees, Operational safety and the environment. To educate the employees on the dangers and consequences of alcohol abouse especially in the interest of the commuter safety and assist all employees to overcome this habit. Preventive medicine & healthy life style clinic at Bangalore and Mysore Established to provide a comprehensive annual health checkup program for all the employees. Insurance scheme: - An internal insurance scheme called KSRTC employees family welfare scheme with contribution from both employee and the employer is introduced which provides a compensation of Rs.3 lakhs to the dependent to the employee who die while in service. Merit award:- Merit awards for children of employees/officers who secure higher marks in SSLC, PUC and Degree examinations. Educational loan :- A scheme of extending educational loan up to a maximum of Rs.1 lakh for coverage of tuition fee to the employees children who are admitted to professional and their dependents. Medical reimbursement: - Reimbursement is given on with state government. Advance for major illness and personal sickness of the employee and their dependents. Recognition of hospitals: - To provide adequate medical facilities to the employees and their dependents more than 108 reputed private hospitals and 7 diagnostic centers have been recognized by the corporation. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 69 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Educational assistance:- A scheme to provide monthly scholarships to children of employee/officers studying in different courses. Award schemes : Awarding gold and silver medals to the accident free drivers of the corporation. Gold medal: Awarded to the drivers who render accident free service for a period of fifteen years in mofusil divisions and seven years in city services. Silver medal: Awarded to the drivers with five years accident free record in mofussil divisions and three years accident free record in city services. Shouryaprashasti medal scheme : Shouryaprashasti medal scheme has been introduced in KSRTC as per approval of the board of directors vide resolution No.9129, dated 25.11.09 at grant cash award upto the maximum of R.20,000/- and gold medal for meritorious/exemplary services and sacrifice rendered by the employee while discharging their legitimate duties after examining case wise. Sports and cultural activities : Divisional and inter divisional sports and cultural activities for the employees are held annually. Traffic revenue incentive scheme : This scheme is applicable to drivers and conductors. In city and suburban services 3% of traffic revenue collection. In respect of ordinary, mofussil, express, semi luxury services 2% of traffic revenue. Counseling : To motivate the labour force for maximum productivity a counseling scheme is implemented in KSRTC. It helps in reducing absenteeism there by increasing the productivity, reduction in the accident rate and improvement in the behavior of the employees with the passengers. Voluntary retirement scheme : A voluntary retirement scheme is implemented form 12.08.2005. Under the scheme an employee who opts for voluntary retirement gets an additional financial benefit ranging from Rs.75,000/- to Rs.2,00,000/- The minimum benefit has been enhanced to Rs.1,25,000/- with effect from October 2010. FINDINGS OF THE STUDY Hence, this being the case, such an assumption is being examined with the help of data in table 1. As is evident, among different factors considered, of the 100 respondents 50 (50%) were Male and 50 (50%) were female. And it is known form the field study that the male part were more dominant in the different types of work performing the machinery to be handled which cannot be done by women. The field work carried out starting from the age profile of the respondents with the above table shows that 4% of the respondents were young aged (18-25 years) 50% of the respondents were between the age group of 26-35 years, over 34% of the respondents were in between the age group of 36-45 years, and 4% of the respondents were in between the age group of the 56& above years. The Table 3 reveals that the marital status of respondents and the majority of them i.e., 68% of the respondents were married, where as 18% of the respondents were unmarried, 6% of the respondents were Widow and 8% of the respondents were Widower, Table 4 reveals that type of the family of the respondent. The majority of the respondents i.e., 66% of the respondents living in Nuclear family, rest of 34% of the respondents having a joint family. The majority of the respondents are have awareness of the health measures because the labours working very hard that‘s why they want some awareness.From above table and chart shows that 60% of the respondents have awareness abouot the health and safety measures, 40% of the respondents are not have awareness about the helath and safety measures. From the above table shows that the majority of the respondents awareness measures of the health and safety, welfare measures health camps, health is more importance ot KSRTC labours because they are working hard. From the above table and chart shows that 65% of the respondents are aware about the health camps, 15% of the respondents are have awareness about proper caution boards near work place, 20% of the respondents are have awareness about welfare measures progrmmes. The majority of the respondents are using safety measures because of the labours work is very hard that‘s why all the employees using the safety measures. From the abouve table and chart shows that 74% of the respondents using safety measures, 26% of the respondents are not using the safety measure. The majoriy of the respondents are getting good salary because they are all work hard and difficulty that‘s why company was giving good salary. From the above table and chart shows that 27% respondents are saying that salary is excellent, 13% of the respondents are saying salary is very good, 50% of the respondnents are saying that salary is goodm remaining 10% of the respondents are saying salary is average. Majoity of the respondents are using the canteen facilities is good because the workers maintained the canteen facilites is good and clean environment. From the above table and chart shows the canteen ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 70 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology facilites in work place 29% of the respondents are usin the canteen facilites are excellent, 35% of the respondents are using the canteen facilites is good, 24% of the respondents are using canteen facilites is very good, reamaining of the 15% of the respondents are using canteen facilities are averagly. Majority of the respondents are maintained the work place is very clean because they are clean everyday in the work place that‘s why working place is maintained very clean. From the above table and chart shows that the work place clean and hygiene. 65% of the respondents are maintained the work place clean and hygiene, remaining 35% of the respondents are not maintained the work place clean and hygiene. The most of the respondents are satisfied by the medical facilites because there are giving medical facilites for employees and labours are working very hard that‘s why they need some medical facilites. From the above table and chart shows that respondents medical facilites. 27% of the respondents are completely satisfied with KSTC giving medical facilites, 53% of the respondents are satisfied, remaining 20% of the respondents are not satified about medical facilites. The most of the respondents are having health problems because they are not using safety measures. From above table and chart shows that the respondents health problems, 65% of the respondents are having helath problems and 35% of the respondents are not facing any health problems. The table and chart shows that 74% of the respondents are aware what KSRTC giving training about rehabilitation programmes, remaining 26% of the respondents are not aware. The table and chart shows that 64% of the respondents are aware what KSRTC and government are giving employees and their families for training about rehabilitation programmes; and welfare measure, remaining 36% of the respondents are not aware. The above table and chart shows that 56% of the respondents are satisfied what KSRTC and government are giving for employees and their families for training about rehabilitation programmes; and welfare measure, remaining 44% of the respondents are not satisfied. SUGGESTIONS 1. The corporation can recruit young people so as to use their power and force in certain areas of the technical and operational field. 2. As the mean score rating arrived at in respect of corporations‟ canteen, trade unions relationship, employee grievance handling, transfer policy, higher officials‟ approach, library facilities and retirees‟ welfare, was found to be low, it is suggested that the corporation must concentrate objectively on satisfying the employees in respect of the above factors. 3. The recruitment policy of the corporation can be redefined in all the categories of employees in the corporation particularly, in respect of drivers and conductors. The corporation requires more drivers and conductors to operate the existing fleet. To manage the situation, the corporation avails the casual labourers‟ assistance which means that an unskilled or less skilled worker is employed to perform the skilled job which will produce undesired results in the performance. Therefore, instead of using casual unskilled labour or less skilled, the corporation may recruit skilled drivers and conductors on the basis of experience. 4. The corporation should evolve a formula to place the deserving and eligible dependents of the employees by allowing certain reservation percentage which will motivate the employees to some extent. 5. The perceived Employee Work life climate level of technical staff is found low. Therefore, certain motivation schemes specially meant for technical staff may be formulated and implemented. It would motivate them to contribute their might to the prosperity of the corporation. 6. The employees are not so satisfied or feel convenient with the wages and salary given to them by the corporation and it has to be improved according to the working condition so as to improve the perception leading to the satisfaction of the employees to the high degree level, as this factor has a direct bearing on the work output of the corporation. BIBLIOGRAPHY 1. Joshi, M.M, ―Trade Union Movement in India‖, Bombay, 1927, pp.157-169. 12. Seth, B.R, ―Labour in Indian Coal Industry‖, D.B Taraporawala Sons & Co., Bombay, 1940. 2. Radhakamal Mukerjee, ―The Indian Working Class‖, Hindi Kitabs, Bombay, 1945. 3. Srivastava, V.L, ―A Socio-economic Survey of the Workers in the Coal Mines of India (With special reference to Bihar), Scientific Book Agency, Calcutta, 1970. 4. Hasan, N. ―The Social Security System of India, S. Chand & Co, New Delhi, 1972. 5. Kudchelkar, D.L.S. ―Aspects of Personnel Management and Industrial Relations‖, Excel Books, New Delhi, 1979. 6. Tyagi, B.P. ―Labour Economics and Social Welfare‖, Educational Publishers, Meerut, 1982. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 71 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 7. Pramod Varma, ―Labour Economics and Industrial Relations‖, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Limited, New Delhi, 1987. 8. Ahuja, K.K. ―Labour Welfare and Social Security‖ in Personnel Management, Kalyani publishers, New Delhi, 1988. 9. Michael, V.P. ―Labour Welfare Measures and Labour Welfare Officers‖ in Human Resource Management and Human Relations, Himalaya publishing House, Mumbai, 2001. 10. Kannan, K.P. ―State Assisted Social Security for poverty Alleviation and Human Development: Kerala‘s Record and its Lessons‖, In Mahendra Devetal, Social and Economic Security in India, New Delhi, Institute of Human Development, 2001. 11. Pylee M.V. and Simon George A, ‖Retirement Benefits in Industrial Relations and Personnel Management, Vikas Publishing House Pvt. Ltd, New Delhi, 2003. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 72 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology INFLUENCE OF GGBFS ON STRENGTH AND PERMEABILITY PROPERTIES OF CONCRETE WITH M SAND Dr.M.DEVI Department of Civil Engineering, Paavai college of Engineering, Namakkal, Tamilnadu,India. Email: [email protected] ABSTRACT Ground granulated blast furnace slag (GGBFS), which is derived as a by-product from the steel manufacturing industry, can be effectively used as partial replacement material for both cement and fine aggregate in concrete. In this paper an experimental investigation has been carried out to determine the significance of Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag (GGBFS) on the strength and permeability properties of concrete containing manufactured sand (M sand) as fine aggregate. GGBFS was utilized as partial replacement for cement at 10%, 20%, 30%, 40% and 50% by weight of cement. The effect of GGBFS on the properties that were investigated in the experimental program include; strength properties namely compressive, split tensile, flexural and bond strength, micro structural properties such as water absorption, permeable voids and bulk density analysis and determination of permeability by rapid chloride penetration test(RCPT). The optimum percentage of GGBFS to be added to get maximum strength and durability was also determined. KEYWORDS Concrete, M sand, Corrosion, Mineral admixture, GGBFS, Strength, Durability INTRODUCTION Manufactured Sand (M-Sand) is a sand produced from hard granite stone by crushing. The crushed sand is of cubical shape with grounded edges. It is then washed and graded with consistency to be used as a substitute of river sand as a construction material. Manufactured sand is now a days utilized as an alternative for river sand since the demand for sand has increased tremendously, causing deficiency of suitable river sand and also because of is its availability and transportation cost. Since manufactured sand can be crushed from hard granite rocks, it can be readily available at the nearby place, reducing the cost of transportation from far-off river sand bed. Thus, the cost of construction can be controlled by the use of manufactured sand as an alternative material for construction[1]. The other advantage of using M-Sand is, it can be dust free, the sizes of m-sand can be controlled easily so that it meets the required grading for the given construction [2]. In addition to that, manufactured sand provides an opportunity to control the mineral content in the particles since natural sand often contains undesirable minerals and clays, and the effect of these materials on both the fresh and the hardened states of concrete can be extremely harmful[3- 4]. The use of mineral admixtures such as fly ash, silica fume, slag and metakaolin in concrete improves workability, reduces the heat of hydration, minimizes cement consumption and enhances strength and durability properties by reducing the porosity due to the pozzolonic reaction[5-8]. Ground Granulated Blast Furnace Slag which is a by-product of steel manufacturing industry enhances the strength and durability characteristics when used in concrete due to its cementitious nature[9-12]. In this paper, an experimental study dealing with the strength and permeability behavior of concrete with M sand as fine aggregate and GGBFS as mineral admixture at the dosage of 10%, 20%, 30%, 40% and 50% by weight of cement was carried out[13-15]. The effect of GGBFS on the strength properties was analyzed by conducting compressive, split tensile, flexural strength and bond strength tests in addition to water absorption and bulk density analysis. The durability test to determine the permeability characteristics was Rapid Chloride Penetration Test (RCPT). The optimum ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 73 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology percentage of replacement of cement by GGBFS to give maximum strength and durability was determined. MATERIALS AND METHODOLOGY Ordinary Portland Cement (OPC 43 Grade) was used throughout the investigation. M-sand, conforming to Zone-II having specific gravity 2.68 and fineness modulus 2.70 was used as fine aggregate. Natural granite aggregate having density of 2700kg/m3, specific gravity 2.7and fineness modulus 4.33 was used as coarse aggregate. High yield strength deformed bars of diameter 16mm was used for corrosion tests. To attain strength of 20 N/mm2 a mix proportion was designed based on IS 10262-1982 and SP23:1982(21). The mixture was 1:1.517:3.38 with water cement ratio 0.45. Concrete cubes of size 150 x 150 x150mm, beams of size 500 x 100 x 100 mm, cylinders of size 150mm diameter and 300 mm long were cast for compressive, flexural and split tensile strength tests. The Rapid Chloride Penetration Test (RCPT) is used to determine the electrical conductance of concrete to provide a rapid indication of its resistance to the penetration of chloride ions. The RCPT was performed by monitoring the amount of electrical current that passes through concrete discs of 50mm thickness and 100mm diameter for a period of six hours. A voltage of 60 V DC is maintained across the ends of the specimen throughout the test. The total charge passed through the cell in coulomb has been found in order to determine the resistance of the specimen to chloride ion penetration. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION STRENGTH TESTS The compressive, flexural, split tensile and bond strength development of M sand concrete containing 10% to 50% replacement of ground granulated blast furnace slag after 3, 7, 28, 56, 90, 180 days curing is shown in Figures 1 to 4. FIG 1 COMPRESSIVE STRENGTH ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 74 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology FIG.2 SPLIT TENSILE STRENGTH FIG 3. FLEXURAL STRENGTH FIG 4. BOND STRENGTH Compressive, split tensile, flexural and bond strength results obtained after3, 7, 28, 56, 90,180 days have been shown in Figures 1 to 4. It can be seen that at the age of 3 and ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 75 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 7days, the strength values of GGBFS blended M sand concrete specimens are lower than the control specimen. When early strength is considered, the rate of strength gain is generally inversely proportional to the amount of GGBFS used in the blend. But from 28 days onwards, the strength values were found to be increase consistently with time and the magnitude of the strength was more than the control specimen for all percentages of GGBFS. Hence, the drop in early strength should not be considered as sign of poor quality as this is often accompanied by enhancement of other properties.This is because the rate of hydration is slow at early ages hence delay in setting time leading to increased loss of moisture which decreases the strength development for the concrete incorporating GGBFS. When comparing the strength test results it is observed that the addition of GGBFS as partial replacement of cement up to 40% in M sand concrete produces increase in strength properties. However, the strength of the 50% blended GGBFS is comparatively lower than the control specimen at all ages due to extension in initial and final set and quick loss of workability. Among all the percentages of GGBFS, the specimens with 40% of GGBFS have shown maximum improvement in compressive, split tensile, flexural and bond strength tests which was considered to be the optimum percentage addition. MICRO STRUCTURAL PROPERTIES Water absorption of hardened concrete specimens was calculated based on ASTM C642-81. Cubes of size150X 150 X 150mm were cast and after 28 days curing the cubes were taken out and dried in an oven at 105°C for 24 hours. The dried specimens were cooled to room temperature (25°C), weighed accurately and noted as dry weight (Wd). Dry specimens were immersed in water and the weight of the specimens at predetermined intervals was taken after wiping the surface with dry cloth. The values obtained from the water absorption, permeability and bulk density tests performed on the quarry dust concrete and GGBFS blended quarry dust concrete specimens are tabulated in Table 1. TABLE 1 . MICROSTRUTURAL PROPERTIES S. Water Permeable Bulk density Identification No. absorption (%) voids (%) kg/m3 1 C- Control 4.15 2.812 2410 2 G10 (GGBFS 10%) 3.9 1.568 2414 3 G20 (GGBFS 20%) 2.55 1.291 2428 4 G30 (GGBFS %) 2.19 0.985 2530 5 G40 (GGBFS 40%) 1.78 0.648 2538 6 G50 (GGBFS 50%) 1.65 0.626 2542 The test values obtained on the micro structural properties of GGBFS and quarry dust concrete specimens reveal that, the increase in GGBFS percentages, resulting in decrease in water absorption, percentage of voids and increase in bulk density. The incorporation of GGBFS in cement paste helps in the transformation of large pores in the paste into smaller pores, resulting in decreased permeability of the matrix. Because of the reduction in permeability, concrete containing GGBFS require less depth of cover than conventional concrete requires protecting the reinforcing steel. PERMEABILITY TEST (RCPT) Chloride diffusion results of the different percentages of GGBFS after 28, 56, 90 and 180 days curing are are displayed in Table 1. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 76 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology TABLE 1 RAPID CHLORIDE PENETRATION TEST RESULTS Use of GGBFS as a partial replacement of portland cement has been found to reduce permeability and has shown to result in good resistance to chloride penetration The pore structure of the paste is changed through the reaction of the slag with the calcium hydroxide and alkalis released during hydration. The pores are filled with calcium silicate hydrates instead of calcium hydroxide. Additionally, because workability is enhanced, the water cement ratio can be lowered, thus resulting in a denser paste structure. It has been postulated that slag replacement of portland cement will decrease the permeability by producing a finer pore size distribution even though the total porosity may increase. Thus 40% GGBFS blended cement concrete is found to be more effective in limiting chloride diffusion than normal concrete. CONCLUSION The test results of GGBFS incorporated specimens have shown that the addition of GGBFS replacing cement partially up to 40% in M sand concrete produces increase in strength. However, the strength of the 50% blended GGBFS is comparatively lower than the control specimen at all ages due to extension in initial and final set and quick loss of workability. Among all the percentages of GGBFS, the specimens with 40% of GGBFS have shown 23.84%, 21.72%, 20.95% and 22.22% improvement respectively for compressive, split tensile, flexural and bond strength tests after 180days curing which was considered to be the optimum percentage addition. Similarly GGBFS shows decrease in permeability rate when compared with control specimen which is concrete without GGBFS. From the above results, it is revealed that the 40% replacement of cement with GGBFS shows maximum improvement and strength and permeability properties and hence it is considered to be the optimum percentage to be added in concrete containing M sand as fine aggregate. REFERENCES 1. S.C.Pal, Abhijit Mukherjee and S.R.PathakCorrosion Behavior of Reinforcement in Slag Concrete, ACI Materials Journal/ November-December, pages521-527,(2002) 2. S.N. Raman, M.F.M. Zain and H.B. Mahmud, "Influence of quarry dust and mineral admixtures on the 28th day initial surface absorption of concrete", in Sustainable Development in Concrete Technology: Proceedings of the Seventh International Conference on Concrete Technology in Developing Countries, Kuala Lumpur, Malaysia, pp. 33-42,(2004). 3. S.Pavia and E.Condren, Study of the durability of OPC versus GGBS Concrete on Exposure to Silage Effluent, Journal of Materials in Civil Engineering, , pages313-320,April 2008 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 77 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 4. Rose, J ―The Effect of Cementitious Blast Furnace Slag on Chloride Permeability of Concrete,‖ Corrosion, Concrete, and Chlorides, SP-102, American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, Mich., 19 p. (1987) 5. Regourd, M, ―Structure and Behavior of Slag Portland Cement Hydrates,‖ Seventh International Congress on the Chemistry of Cement, V. I, Sept. 1980, pp. 63-67(1980). 6. Sahu A.K., Sunil Kumar and Sachan A.K.. Quarry stone waste as fine aggregate for concrete. The Indian concrete journal. pp. 845-848. (2003) 7. Roy, D. M., and Idorn, G. M., ‖Hydration, Structure, and Properties of Blast Furnace Slag Cements, Mortars, and Concrete,‖ ACI Journal, Proceedings, V. 79, No. 6, , pp. 445-457 (1982) 8. Roy, D.M. and Parker, K.M., ―Microstructures and Properties of Granulated Slag Portland Cement Blends at Normal and Elevated Temperatures,‖ Fly Ash, Silica Fume, Slag, and Other Mineral By- Products in Concrete , SP-79, American Concrete Institute, Farmington Hills, Mich, pp. 397-414, 1983 9. Saika, K., Watanabe, H., Suzuki, M. and Hamazaki, K. ―Properties of Granulated Blast Furnace Slag Cement Concrete,‖ Fly Ash, Silica Fume, Slag and Natural Pozzolans in Concrete, V. II, , pp.1367- 1400. 77 (1992), 10. Saraswathy V., and H.-W. SongCorrosion Performance of Fly Ash Blended Cement Concrete: A State- of-Art Review, Corrosion Review; 24(1-2): pp.87-122(2006). 11. Sanjayan, J. G., and Sioulas, B., ―Strength of Slag Cement Concrete Cured in Place and in Other Conditions,‖ ACI Materials Journal, V. 97, No. 5, pp. 603-611 (2000). 12. Safiuddin M., M.F.M. Zain, M.F. Mahmud and R.S. Naidu, ―Effect of quarry dust and mineral admixtures on the strength and elasticity of concrete‖, Proceedings of the Conference on Construction Technology, Kota Kinabalu, Sabah, Malaysia, pp. 68-80. (2001) 13. Santhakumar.A.R. ―Concrete Technology‖, Oxford University Press 14. Rafat siddique, ,Special Structural concretes, Galgotia publications(2000). 15. Ramakrishnan, V. and Akman, M. S., Proceedings of the US-Turkey Workshop, Fly Ash, Silica Fume, Slag and Natural Pozzolans in Concrete, Istanbul, Turkey, May 9 1992, pp. 97-98(1992). ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 78 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology PERSONALITY INTELLIGENCE MODEL Dr. M. UMAMAHESWARI Research Dean and Associate Prof, PG Department of Management Studies, Dr. SNS Rajalakshmi College of Arts and Science, (Autonomous) Coimbatore – 641 049. email id : [email protected] ABSTRACT Each of us in the world is unique. Everyone has unique way of seeing, hearing, thinking, understanding and perceiving the world. When we say someone is good or bad, strong or weak, active or calm we use our personality intelligence to evaluate others. When we meet anyone, as soon what we reason out is his personality. We decide about the person with the perception process by our old memories, experiences, motives, ethics, etc.. This decision is about the personality of the person in our point of view. Also how do we need to act or react in front of the person is the decision about our personality. How intelligent in reason out the right personality can depends on personality intelligence. Dr. John D. Mayer says that the personal intelligence is an intelligence that involves reasoning about personality and personality-related information. At what extent that one knows the personality of an individual and anticipates its future behavior determines one‘s personal Intelligence. Personality emerges and adapts in part by molding the major parts of our mental life—our motives, feelings, thoughts and self-control—into a functioning system. Because none of us possesses the same exact qualities, our personality must organize our particular psychological pieces in a way that is adapted to our specific environment with its unique opportunities and challenges. KEY WORDS : Personality, Motives, Feelings, Thought, Self – Control INTRODUCTION OBJECTIVES To study the significant difference among the personal intelligence, interpersonal orientation and Adjustment of students in terms of gender, locality , age, level, economic status, family status, stc. To find out the relationship among personality intelligence, interpersonal orientation and adjustment of the employees in terms of gender, locality , age, level, economic status, family status, stc. To study of the effect of independent variable on dependent variables. VARIABLES CONSIDERED FOR THE PRESENT STUDY Main Variables 1. Level of personality intelligence 2. Level of interpersonal skills 3. Level of adjustment Background Variables 1. Male and Female gender, 2. Age 3. Education 4. Experience, 5. position, 6. Income level, 7. Family status HYPOTHESES OF THE STUDY Under the purview of the derived objectives, the following null hypotheses are formulated: A. There is no significant difference between 1. Male and Female gender, 2. Age 3. Education 4. Experience, 5. position, 6. Income level, 7. Family status ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 79 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology with respect to personality intelligence. B. There is no significant difference between 8. Male and Female gender, 9. Age 10. Education 11. Experience, 12. position, 13. Income level, 14. Family status with respect to interpersonal skill. C. There is no significant difference between 15. Male and Female gender, 16. Age 17. Education 18. Experience, 19. position, 20. Income level, 21. Family status in respect of adjustment. 22. There is Age 23. Education 24. Experience, 25. position, 26. Income level, 27. Family status with respect to personality intelligence. D. There is no significant relation between 28. Male and Female gender, 29. Age 30. Education 31. Experience, 32. position, 33. Income level, 34. Family status with respect to interpersonal skill. E. There is no significant relation between 35. Male and Female gender, 36. Age 37. Education 38. Experience, 39. position, 40. Income level, 41. Family status in respect of adjustment. . F. There is no significant difference among 42. Male and Female gender, 43. Age 44. Education 45. Experience, 46. position, 47. Income level, in respect of personality intelligence, interpersonal skills and adjustment of the employees. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 80 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology MEASURING INSTRUMENTS Following measuring instruments were used in the present study: 1. Test of Personal Intelligence Scale (TOPI). 2. Fundamental Interpersonal Relation Orientation (FIRO). 3. Adjustment scale. TEST OF PERSONAL INTELLIGENCE SCALE (TOPI). The TOPI and its derivative scales (e.g., the TOPI MINI-12, described below) use a veridical scoring method. Test items were developed by consulting the literature on personality psychology and in most cases a single, correct answer was selected based upon that literature. For example, an item asking about the co variation of two personality traits was based upon research examining the correlations among the Big Five personality traits. A handful of items on the TOPI itself have items where some response options receive partial credit. RATIONALE FOR THE TOPI MINI 12 As of summer, 2013, we have continued to examine the full TOPI 1.2 in preparation for a revision. To continue research in the area while we work on the longer scale, we have sought to create a short scale: the TOPI MINI-12 is that scale, and includes 12 items from the TOPI 1.2 Rf (a reformatted version of the TOPI 1.2 (Study 3 of Mayer, Panter & Caruso, 2012). CONTENT OF THE TOPI MINI-12 The TOPI-MINI-12 is composed of two sets of 6 items; the first six are from the Forming Models section of the TOPI 1.2 Rf; the second six are from the Guiding Choices section. More specifically, the 12 items include the first six items of Forming Models, Cluster D (FMD) and the first six items of Guiding Choices, Cluster C (GCC). FUNDAMENTAL INTERPERSONAL RELATION ORIENTATION (FIRO). Interpersonal relationships take place in a variety of context in industries such as HR, production team, quality, etc.. William schutz (1958) developed a theory explains the interpersonal underworld of a small group known as Fundamental Interpersonal Relation Orientation (FIRO). The theory is based on the belief that when people get together in a group, there are three main interpersonal needs they are looking to obtain- affection/openness, control and inclusion. ADJUSTMENT INVENTORY The term adjustment means accommodation and adaptation of our behavior on physical, mantel and environmental life. In practical sense, adjustment is a condition of harmonious relationship between the social and the physical environment wherein a person is able to obtain optimum satisfaction for most of his need and to meet fairly well the physical and a social demand imposed upon him. Hence, adjustment is a process of making the changes needed or desired, in oneself and /or in one‘s social and physical environment to experience what is termed as feeling of adjustment. The concept of adjustment refers to active and creative efforts to live effectively and satisfactorily. This scale has 48 items questionnaires of five dimensions. They are: A. Adjustment in home B. Adjustment in health C. Social Adjustment D. Emotional adjustment E. Educational adjustment. ADMINISTRATION AND SCORING The subjects were contacted in their respective departments and administered to conduct Personal Intelligence Scale, FIRO and adjustment. All the measures being group tests these were administered in-group setting with 10 to 15 subjects in one batch. The subjects were told that they were part of an experiment although the scores on the tests would not affect their performance appraisal. They were also told that their scores would be kept secret so that they could complete the test without any fear or hesitation. All the 3 tests were administrated in accordance with the procedure described in the test manual or as described by the test author/s. Although there was no time limit to administer the test the subjects were asked to complete the test as early as possible. To make the task easier the instructions were also explained verbally. All the subjects gave their response in the separate answer sheet in the presence of the investigator. The testing procedure was all through uniform. The responses of the subjects were scored as per the scoring procedure described by the test authors or as in the respective test manuals. Personality research has suggested that there is a natural basis to tactics, such that individual personalities ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 81 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology cause them to be predisposed toward certain special tactics. The personality systems structure began as an outline of the pattern of person in a systematic and integrated fashion. The structure is developed from psychological work of Dr. Mayar‘s personality framework followed his theory, students needs and sociological perspectives to further develop and enrich how the structure envisions personality. This personality can be defined as structarized system because the system provides complete detail of theory. Von Bertalanffy‘s General Systems Theory maintained that all systems, from cells to human personality to climate, share certain principles in common by virtue of being organized groups of parts (Von Bertalanffy, 1950). General systems theory seeks to describe the universal principles of systems such as whether they are closed to their surroundings or open to their neighbors, how systems are structured, and to describe self-regulatory processes such as feedback loops (Powers, 1990; Royce & Powell, 1981b). Almost all personality psychologists agree that personality is a system. Hall and Lindzey (1957), in their authoritative mid-20thcentury review of the discipline, asked: The study concludes with an examination of how the structure integrates key ideas in the field of personality and how we may use unique mental ability, ―personal intelligence‖ to understand one another. Understanding and Identifying personality by defining the physical appearance, thinking process, intelligence, social approach, moral life, mental life how do we express with the environment. Mayar says that defining the personality system and then understanding the boundaries of personality, its expressions, and the neighboring systems with which it interacts. All personality can define by the key parts of our mental life including our Motives, Traits, Schemas, And Other Key Elements Personality is designed, organized and developed from our birth including its structure and dynamics. Structure refers to the physical and mental system developed in long-term and enduring aspects of the system; dynamics to how the parts interact and change over time. Tracing personality development by examining the developing and changing nature of personality over time (e.g., Mayer, 1998; Mayer & Allen, 2013). PERSONALITY INTELLIGENCE MODEL Everybody think that they know or think they know something about personality. We develop everyday (lay) theories of personality, form opinions of one another and try to anticipate one another‘s behaviors (Andersen & Chen, 2002; Cantor & Mischel, 1977; Plaks et al., 2009). ‗‗Personal intelligence‘‘, is our knowledge about personality to reason in this area. We use our personal intelligence to solve problems in four areas in particular: personality intelligence can be defined by following four factors. The four parts of the personality systems decides our success and performance. It makes the awareness of personality and its parts to organize and develop for career growth. Mayar says this the theory of personal intelligence argues that human beings evolved an interconnected set of mental abilities for reasoning about personality in everyday life—for tracking clues to one another‘s personalities. Understanding these mental abilities helps for developing models of personality and anticipating what people will do. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 82 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Fig.1. UMA – ANAND Personal Intelligence model. We apply our personal intelligence to four areas of problem- solving: personality awareness, developing model of personality, guiding personal choices with inner awareness, and systematizing plans and goals. Each area can be further divided into 20 specific areas 5 dimension each as indicated in the diagram. We use our personal intelligence to solve problems in four areas in particular: We (a) personality awareness, (b) developing personality model (c) use that personality-relevant information to guide our choices (d) on that basis systematize our plans and goals (see Fig. 1). ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 83 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology DEFINITION OF FACTORS A. Personality Identification Awareness (PIA) PIA includes identifying various personality types by information collected about personality, reading personality from the facial expressions and body languages, perceiving personality accurately by introspection process and judging right pattern of personality. a. Identifying Personality Types (IPT): IPT can be defined as ability to judge people personality from their behavior. We evaluate people from the way they act indifferent situations. We observe other people and decide about ourselves by noticing visible behavioral expressions such as ‗‗is cheerful,‘‘ ‗‗is a talkative individual,‘‘ and ‗‗tends to arouse liking and acceptance‘‘ (Funder, 2001; Funder & Dobroth, 1987; Human & Biesanz, 2011; Kenny, Snook, Boucher, & Hancock, 2010). b. Reading Personality from Faces (RPF) (accuracy of judging others) RPF is an ability to describe clues to people‘s personalities from their facial expression, gestures and body languages. Facial structure and expression may indicate whether a person is agreeable or neurotic (Penton-Voak, Pound, Little, & Perrett, 2006; Zebrowitz, 2006). c. Perceiving Personality by Introspection (PPI): Introspection means a self observation in a systematic way. We also perceive information from a context of people dressing and grooming. If we notice that someone‘s house is clean, well organized and lacks clutter we might guess—with better-than-chance accuracy—that the person is conscientious (Gosling, Ko, Mannarelli, & Morris, 2002; Gosling, Sandy, & Potter, 2010; Mehl, Gosling, & Pennebaker, 2006). Analyzing ourselves by looking inside gives clear decision of personality. Self talk with inner voice for any decision, many question for every situation, argue and reason about the situation. d. Judging Personality Pattern (JPP) : By integrating all the above process we come to the conclusion about ourselves, others and situations. Accurate judgment about ourselves gives us clarity on our self concept. We can match with our needs , motives and emotions. Confusion on this will result in frustration and internal conflict. B. Developing Personality Model of individuals (DPM) a. Forming modals of personality (FMP): We use our personal intelligence to label personality‘s parts and that helps us to understand other people‘s intentions. For example, if I know a person who is an extravert, and he invites me to go with him to a party. I will interpret the invitation in light of his natural desire for company rather than as a particular interest he might have in forming a closer relationship with me. By comparison, if an introvert were to ask me to a party, the invitation would take on more important because I know that introverted people aim toward the more gradual development of a friendship and are more selective about the company they keep (Nelson & Thorne, 2012). b. Labeling Traits in Ourselves and Others (LTO): The theory of personal intelligence predicts that some people will be better than others at noticing and labeling parts and anticipating people‘s behaviors on that basis. They can find out what type of trait and character of them is right for the life and situation and also what is the right and wrong trait of others. c. Understanding Motives and Intention (UMI): Motives are the inner drives of a person reason for every internal and external behavior. Per example, if you are hungry, you will search for food. If your motive is to achieve, you will work hard, If you want power you will dominate. Likewise our every action has got clear inner motives and all behavior has clear intention. d. Recognizing Personality Pattern (RPP): RPP is to accurately understand our personality model, inner psychological system for our success and mental defense mechanism used for our failures. Like blaming others for our mistakes (projection), justifying our inability (justification), Showing anger inappropriate places (displacement) and so on. Our mind has got short cut method for unrealistically satisfying us. Intelligence of RPP can decide our life script such as how to live in future, what is the right personality for us and purpose of life. C. Guiding Personal Choices with inner awareness (GPC) a. Guiding Career Choice based on our modal (GCC); Once we formed a right models of personality (the second area of reasoning) we draw not only on one trait at a time to describe a person, but consider groups of traits and their interactions in gauging what someone is like. Then we make our choice according to our modal. We mostly unconsciously choose what want according to the modal we decided. b. Discovering our Personal Interest (DPI): We guide our life choice according to the personal interest. Our interest and passion decides our choice in life and lead us for successful or failure in life. Who discover better themselves and their personal interest can get harmonious life. c. Deciding Choice with our personalities in Mind (DCM): People higher in personality intelligence make all their life choice and decision according to the suitability of their personality. d. Regularizing and Managing Personality (RMP) : People always would not get the situation and ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 84 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology environment as they like. They should learn to adjust their personality according to the situation and changes. They know best out of any situation is the maximum life experience. External situation is always changing. They understand the changes and managing personality to adjust with situation. D. Systematizing life Plans and Goals (SPG) a. Planning Satisfying life Direction (PSD): This area of problem solving with personal intelligence involves systematizing one‘s goals and plans. For example, people vary both in how well they formulate goals that work well together, as well as the memories they draw on to motivate themselves (Emmons & King, 1988; Pillemer, 2003; Sheldon & Kasser, 1995). b. Scheduling Plans to fit Social Expectation (SPE) : Planning and organizing skill gives strategic system for any functions. Being resourceful, setting time line, coordinating tasks for self and others, prioritizing the task are very important for personality intelligence. The Test of Personal Intelligence assesses whether people can distinguish between goals that are attainable and consistent. c. Finding Meaningful Themes (FMT): Adapting resource allocation to cope with and manage contingencies, establishing clear social life, participating in contentious improvement on self satisfaction and others, understanding basic life and their relationship to each other etc d. Prioritizing Activities and Updating (PAU): Analyzing long term and short term goals, listing down necessary activities to be done, prioritizing activities for every year, month, day and every hours are very strong personality intelligence one can have. People of high personality intelligence know the difference between important and urgent work to be done on time. Finally, one who updates the personality depends on the changing situation, environment with a proper feedback system for updating. They are considered to have better personality intelligence. RELIABILITY TEST The data collected from the study were subjected to reliability test. The reliability coefficient of all the five scales was determined using Cronbach‘s alpha and Spearman Brown Split-half method. The Cronbach‘s alpha test is used to assess internal consistency, essentially assessing whether all the items in a scale measure the same concept. However, it has been suggested that Cronbach‘s coefficient alpha represents the lower bound of the reliability coefficient, because it assumes that all individual items measure the true score of the latent variable equally well (Bollen, 1986). The coefficient alpha represents a classic model of reliability estimation where an individual‘s true score is viewed as the average of an infinite number of respondents‘ scores of the same test. Therefore, the Split-half test is also used. It is a measure of reliability derived from correlating two halves of the scale. It reduces the potential for both random and systematic errors by using a single measure on one occasion with one set of subjects. But when the data from the respondents are divided into two parts and the scores are correlated the resultant is the correlation between values on an assessment that is only one half as long as the original items. The Spearman-Brown formula is used to estimate the internal consistency of instrument. The formula for calculating Split-half reliability is, Where, rtt = Reliability of the two halves n = Number of items p = Proportion of correct response to each item in turn q= 1-p Sigma square t = Total variance of test SPSS Version-21 was used to calculate reliability scores. Table 1 shows the reliability coefficient using Cronbach‘s alpha and Table 2 shows the reliability of each dimensions of investment decision-making along with another variable, namely decision- making used in the present study. Based on the information gathered through a pilot study, questionnaire structure has been redesigned. TABLE 2 RELIABILITY COEFFICIENT USING CRONBACH‘S ALPHA S.No. Dimensions Reliability Coefficient 1 Personal Intelligence 0.846 From the Table 2, it is found that the reliability coefficient for the variable chosen for the study is more than 0.70, which is an acceptable value (Nunnally, 1967). So, the items constituting each variable under study have reasonable internal consistency. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 85 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology TABLE 3 RELIABILITY COEFFICIENT USING SPLIT-HALF METHOD S.No. Dimensions Split –Half reliability scores 1. FMD 0.702 2 GCC 0.724 3. IPA 0.828 4. SPG 0.808 From the table 3, it is found that the reliability coefficient for the subscales chosen for the study is more than 0.70, which is an acceptable value (Nunnally, 1967). So, each subscale contributing to the variable has reasonable internal consistency. DATA ANALYSIS TABLE 4 ANALYSIS ON MEAN AND SD OF PERSONALITY INTELLIGENCE. N Mean SD Identifying personality 174 40.55 4.8 Forming models of personality 174 44.72 5.5 Guiding personal choice 174 39.97 5.4 Systemizing plans and goals 174 43.26 6.2 Personal Intelligence 275 169 16.06 DISCUSSION AND CONCLUSIONS Personality psychology has a mixed record of study on personality. Scientists from outside the discipline who have functional it to personality often generated ideas that were theoretical and unsatisfactorily developed to make good contact with the field. The theory‘s founder, Von Bertalanffy, was a biologist by training, and enumerated several principles of personality in the Journal of Personality. He began with the idea that ‗‗A living organism is a hierarchy of open systems maintaining itself in a steady state ...‘‘ (Von Bertalanffy, 1951, p. 37). He argued there were neurological, paleo-brain and cognitive brain levels of personality much like MacLean‘s (1973) three brains, and that goal seeking and true purposiveness were necessary elements of human being. We mostly agree with Von Bertalanffy‘s explanation but also appreciate how little they add to current attempts at addressing what personality is and how it functions. Royce and Powell (1981a, 1981b), professors at the University of Alberta‘s Center for Advance Study in Theoretical Psychology, published three systems- inspired articles in the Journal of Personality and Social Psychology in a similarly abstract vein. An idea of personality perhaps there has been a flaw recently in theorizing at the initial stage of personality psychology— where we address questions such as what personality is and where it is. Although early theorists such as Freud, Allport, Cattell, and others addressed questions about what personality was and it‘s major divisions, some of their answers were never fully worked out and other answers seemed individual. Cattell‘s idea of where personality was—surrounded by a personality sphere–was never fully elucidated, and Freud‘s division of the mind into the id, ego, and superego, was never well supported and does not suit the thinking of our modern discipline (Cattell, 1965; Freud, 1923). Contemporary researchers typically focus on specific lines of theorizing and research within our discipline; bigger conceptions enter in only when they are relevant to individual research lines. The systems framework revisits these questions about what and where personality is. The framework‘s overview provides a impressive meaning of personality and its surroundings—providing models of where personality is and its major areas of functioning. By doing so, the framework develops and formalizes a holistic vision that is both useful and compatible with contemporary theory and research. Compared to the framework, the theory of UMA –ANAND personality intelligence provides an initial attempt to understanding how and why we know one another as specific individuals. Those of us who can comprehend people well have an adaptive advantage compared to others who are less perceptive. Research results indicate that people who can problem-solve in one area of personality (e.g., recognizing clues) are good at solving problems in the other areas as well (e.g., forming models, systematizing plans and goals). Such findings suggest that a previously unidentified but naturally-arising broad intelligence exists in our everyday understanding of personality. UMA-ANAND personality intelligence model depicts on the regulation of personality psychology to offer a more proper idea of who we are. This approach helps us to better understand and navigate our human life. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 86 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology REFERENCES 1. Andersen, S. M., & Chen, S. (2002). The relational self: An interpersonal socialcognitive theory. Psychological Review, 109(4), 619–645. http://dx.doi.org/ 10.1037/0033-295X.109.4.619 .0 2. Ashton, M. C., & Lee, K. (2010). Trait and source factors in HEXACO-PI-R self- and observer reports. European Journal of Personality, 24(3), 278–289. http:// dx.doi.org/10.1002/per.759 . 3. Carver, C. S., & Scheier, M. F. (1982). Control theory: A useful conceptual framework for personality – Social, clinical, and health psychology. Psychological Bulletin, 92(1), 111–135. http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/0033-2909.92.1.111. 4. Cattell, R. B. (1965). The scientific analysis of personality . Chicago, IL: Aldine Publishing . 5. Christiansen, N. D., Wolcott-Burnam, S., Janovics, J. E., Burns, G. N., & Quirk, S. W. (2005). The good judge revisited: Individual differences in the accuracy of personality judgments. Human Performance, 18(2), 123–149. http://dx.doi.org/ 10.1207/s15327043hup1802_2 . 6. Deary, I. J., Penke, L., & Johnson, W. (2010). The neuroscience of human intelligence differences. Nature Reviews Neuroscience, 11(3), 201–211. 7. Erikson, E. H. (1950). Childhood and society. New York: W.W. Norton. Fajkowska, M. (2013). Personality coherence and incoherence. Clinton Corners, NY: Eliot Werner Publications . 8. Funder, D. C. (2001). Accuracy in personality judgment: Research and theory concerning an obvious question. In R. Hogan (Ed.), Personality psychology in the workplace (pp. 121–140). Washington, DC, US: American Psychological Association. http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/10434-005 . 9. Goldberg, L. R., & Rosolack, T. K. (1994). The big five factor structure as an integrative framework: An empirical comparison with eysenck‘s P-E-N model. In R. P. Martin (Ed.), The developing structure of temperament and personality from infancy to adulthood (pp. 7–35). Hillsdale, NJ England: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates Inc. 10. Gosling, S. D., Sandy, C. J., & Potter, J. (2010). Personalities of self-identified ‗dog people‘ and ‗cat people‘. Anthrozoös, 23 (3), 213–222. http://dx.doi.org/10.2752/ 175303710X12750451258850 . 11. Hall, C. S., & Lindzey, G. (1957). Theories of personality . New York: John Wiley & Sons. Haselton, M. G., & Funder, D. C. (2006). The evolution of accuracy and bias in socialjudgment. In D. T. Kenrick (Ed.), Evolution and social psychology (pp. 15–37). Madison, CT, US: Psychosocial Press . 12. Horowitz, L. M., Wilson, K. R., Turan, B., Zolotsev, P., Constantino, M. J., & Henderson, L. (2006). How interpersonal motives clarify the meaning of interpersonal behavior: A revised circumplex model. Personality and Social Psychology Review, 10(1), 67–86. 13. Kozak, M. N., Marsh, A. A., & Wegner, D. M. (2006). What do i think you‘re doing? Action identification and mind attribution. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 90(4), 543–555. http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/0022-3514.90.4.543 . 14. Mayer, J. D. (1993). A system-topics framework for the study of personality. Imagination, Cognition and Personality, 13(2), 99–123. http://dx.doi.org/10.2190/ 0B5Y-6M4L-7939-FJD8 . 15. Mayer, J. D. (1995). A framework for the classification of personality components. Journal of Personality, 63 (4), 819–878. http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/14676494.ep9512221953 . 16. Mayer, J. D. (1998). A systems framework for the field of personality. Psychological Inquiry, 9 (2), 118–144. http://dx.doi.org/10.1207/s15327965pli0902_10 . 17. Mayer, J. D. (2001). Primary divisions of personality and their scientific contributions: From the trilogy-of-mind to the systems set. Journal for the Theory of Social Behaviour, 31(4), 449. 18. Mayer, J. D. (2003). Structural divisions of personality and the classification of traits. Review of General Psychology, 7 (4), 381–401. http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/10892680.7.4.381. 19. Mayer, J. D. (2004). A classification system for the data of personality psychology and adjoining fields. Review of General Psychology, 8 (3), 208–219. http:// dx.doi.org/10.1037/1089-2680.8.3.208 . 20. Mayer, J. D. (2005). A tale of two visions: Can a new view of personality help integrate psychology? American Psychologist, 60(4), 294–307. http://dx.doi.org/ 10.1037/0003-066X.60.4.294 . 21. Mayer, J. D. (2007a). Asserting the definition of personality. P: The Online Newsletter for Personality Science, 1(1) . 22. Mayer, J. D. (2007b). Personality: A systems approach . New York: Pearson Educational . 23. Mayer, J. D. (2014a). Personal intelligence: The power of personality and how it shapes our lives . New York: Scientific American/Farrar Strauss & Giroux. 24. Mayer, J. D. (2014b). Personality: A systems approach (edition 1.5). Durham, NH: Rubber Duck Publishing . 25. Mayer, J. D., & Allen, J. L. (2013). A personality framework for the unification of psychology. Review of General Psychology, 17(2), 196–202. http://dx.doi.org/ 10.1037/a0032934 . 26. Mayer, J. D., Panter, A. T., & Caruso, D. R. (2014). Test of personal intelligence (TOPI 1.4) manual . Durham, NH: University of New Hampshire. Mayer, J. D., & Korogodsky, M. (2011). A really big picture of personality. Social and Personality Psychology Compass, 5 , 104–117. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 87 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.17519004.2010.00336.x . 27. Mayer, J. D., & Lang, J. L. (2011). A three-dimensional view of personality. Psychological Inquiry, 22 (1), 36–39. http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/1047840X.2011.544635 . 28. Mayer, J. D., Lin, S. C., & Korogodsky, M. (2011). Exploring the universality of personality judgments: Evidence from the great transformation (1000 BCE-200 BCE). Review of General Psychology, 15, 65–76. http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/ a0020711 . 29. Mayer, J. D., Panter, A. T., & Caruso, D. R. (2012). Does personal intelligence exist? Evidence from a new ability-based measure. Journal of Personality Assessment, 94, 124–140. http://dx.doi.org/10.1080/00223891.2011.646108 . 30. McAdams, D. P., & Olson, B. D. (2010). Personality development: Continuity and change over the life course. Annual Review of Psychology, 61 , 517–542. http:// dx.doi.org/10.1146/annurev.psych.093008.100507 . 31. McAdams, D. P., & Pals, J. L. (2006). A new big five: Fundamental principles for an integrative science of personality. American Psychologist, 61(3), 204–217. http:// dx.doi.org/10.1037/0003- 066X.61.3.204 . 32. Nettle, D. (2006). The evolution of personality variation in humans and other animals. American Psychologist, 61 (6), 622–631 . 33. Penton-Voak, I., Pound, N., Little, A. C., & Perrett, D. I. (2006). Personality judgments from natural and composite facial images: More evidence for a ‗kernel of truth‘ in social perception. Social Cognition, 24 (5), 607–640. http://dx.doi.org/ 10.1521/soco.2006.24.5.607 34. Royce, J. R., & Powell, A. (1981a). An overview of a multifactor-system theory of personality and individual differences: I. The factor and system models and the hierarchical factor structure of individuality. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 41(4), 818–829. 35. Sheldon, K. M., Cheng, C., & Hilpert, J. (2011). Understanding well-being and optimal functioning: Applying the multilevel personality in context (MPIC) model. Psychological Inquiry, 22, 1–16. 36. Skinner, N., & Brewer, N. (2004). Adaptive approaches to competition: Challenge appraisals and positive emotion. Journal of Sport & Exercise Psychology, 26 (2), 283–305 . 37. Von Bertalanffy, L. (1951). Theoretical models in biology and psychology. Journal of Personality, 20, 24–38. http://dx.doi.org/10.1111/j.1467-6494.1951. tb01511.x . 38. Wundt, W. (1897). Outlines of psychology (C.H. Judd Trans.) . Leipzig, Germany: Wilhelm Englemann . 39. Zebrowitz, L. A. (2006). Finally, faces find favor. Social Cognition, 24 (5), 657–701. http://dx.doi.org/10.1521/soco.2006.24.5.657 . 40. Zuckerman, M., Kuhlman, D. M., Joireman, J., Teta, P., & Kraft, M. (1993). A comparison of three structural models for personality: The big three, the big five, and the alternative five. Journal of Personality and Social Psychology, 65 (4), 757–768. http://dx.doi.org/10.1037/0022-3514.65.4.757 . ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 88 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology ENHANCEMENT OF DURABILITY PROPERTIES IN FLY ASH BLENDED CONCRETE USING DIETHYLAMINE Dr.V.RAJKUMAR Department of Civil Engineering Government College of Engineering Salem, Tamilnadu, India Email : [email protected] ABSTRACT This paper presents the experimental results of the investigation on various properties related to the durability of fly ash blended cement concrete. Durability of concrete may be defined as the ability of concrete to resist weathering action, chemical attack, and abrasion while maintaining its desired engineering properties. The main aim of this investigation is to study the performances of an organic inhibitor namely diethylamine, added in various percentages to fly ash blended cement concrete in enhancing its durability without affecting its mechanical and micro structural properties and also determine the optimum percentage of inhibitor to be added for obtaining maximum strength and durability. KEYWORDS Concrete, Fly ash, Inhibitor, strength, Durability, Corrosion resistance INTRODUCTION Concrete resists weathering action, chemical attack, and abrasion while maintaining its desired engineering properties. Different concretes require different degrees of durability depending on the exposure to the environment and the properties desired. It is now universally recognized that the needs of environment protection and sustainability of concrete construction demand that fly ash is not used in landfills or dumped as a waste material but instead utilize the availability of these pozzolanic and cementitious admixtures to enhance the quality of concrete construction[1-4]. Since fly ash can offer a positive, eco-friendly and sustainable cementitious material for the regeneration and rehabilitation of concrete structures, in this study cement is partially replaced with various percentages of fly ash[5-9]. The corrosion of steel reinforcement causes an increase in the volume of oxidized compounds when compared with the volume of the base metal dissolved. Protection of reinforcement from corrosion is provided by the alkalinity of concrete which leads to the passivation of steel[10-13]. National Association of Corrosion Engineers defines inhibitors, as substances which can retard the rate and extent of cor rosion, when added to a corroding environment in small concentrations. These inhibitors function by reinforcing the passive layer or by forming oxide layer and preventing chloride ions reacting from it [14-15].This paper is intended on the study of corrosion inhibitor namely diethylamine, added during casting of concrete in fly ash blended concrete in which cement is replaced by 25% of flyash.The inhibitor was added at the dosage of 1%, 2% and 3% by the weight of cement. MATERIALS Ordinary Portland Cement (43 Grade) was used throughout the investigation. In this experiment, river sand with fineness modulus of medium sand equal to 2.06 conforming to grading zone III of IS 383-1970 was used as fine aggregate. Locally available well-graded granite aggregates of normal size greater than 4.75 mm and less than 16 mm having fineness modulus of 2.72 was used as coarse aggregates. Potable water has been used for casting concrete specimen. High yield strength cold twisted deformed bar of Fe 415 graded conforming to IS 1786 has been used. Mechanical properties are, yield strength of 475 N/mm, ultimate tensile strength of 582 N/mm, % of elongation on 30 cm gauge length is 11%. Fly ash was obtained from Mettur thermal power plant in Tamilnadu. In this study, 25% by weight of cement is replaced by class C fly ash. The grade of concrete used is M20 having mix proportion of 1:1.464:3.21 with water cement ratio 0.50.Organic inhibitors were used in this study. Application of these admixtures in reinforced concrete was possible by adding it to the mixing water during concrete preparation. The inhibitor diethylamine was added at the dosage of 1%, 2%and 3% by weight of cement EXPERIMENTAL PROGRAM Experiments were conducted on concrete specimens to study strength and micro structural properties. Strength tests include compressive strength, split tensile strength, flexural strength and bond strength. The micro structural properties studied were percentage of water absorption, percentage of permeable voids and bulk ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 89 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology density. To study the migration and dispersion of the organic inhibitors Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM), open circuit potential test, impressed voltage measurement and gravimetric weight loss tests were performed. RESULTS AND DISCUSSION STRENGTH TEST RESULTS TABLE 1. STRENGTH TEST RESULTS WITH DIETHYLAMINE (DE) Sl. Compressive Split tensile strength Flexural strength Bond strength in Specim No strength in N/mm2 in N/mm2 in N/mm2 N/mm2 en 28 days 90days 28days 90 days 28days 90 days 28days 90 days 1 F25 24.8 31.4 2.6 4.6 4.4 8.2 4.2 5.2 2 1% BE 19.6 31.4 1.7 4.7 4.0 8.1 3.7 5.1 3 2% BE 20.7 33.5 1.3 4.1 4.1 8.5 3.9 5.4 4 3% BE 22.1 32.8 1.1 4.9 4.2 8.4 4.0 5.3 Table 1 presents the test values on the 28thand 90th day of compressive, split tensile, flexural and bond strengths for various percentages of diethylamine inhibitor added.In all the mechanical tests, incorporation of inhibitor enhanced the compressive, split tensile and flexural strengths of the fly ash blended cement concrete. MICRO STRUCTURAL PROPERTIES The values obtained from the various micro structural properties tests performed on the hardened concrete specimens with 25% fly ash and with various percentages of the two organic inhibitors are tabulated below. TABLE 2. MICRO STRUCTURAL TEST VALUES OF 25% FLY ASH BLENDED CONCRETE WITH DIETHYLAMINE INHIBITOR S. Coefficient of water absorption Percentage Effective Bulk density Identification No. x 10-10 m2/sec of voids(%) porosity% Kg/m3 1 FA 25 0.85 0.55 9.05 2302 3 1.0% DE 0.58 0.52 8.93 2324 5 2.0% DE 0.38 0.48 8.84 2332 7 3.0% DE 0.28 0.45 8.72 2341 Tables 2 presents the test values for various percentages of inhibitor added.There was appreciable reduction in the porosity and water absorption values for the specimens cast with the inhibitor. This was evident from the picture taken using Scanning Electron Microscope (SEM) shown in Figure. Diethylamine has migrated effectively through the pores in the concrete, making it impermeable to a larger extent for any foreign element to ingress through it. SCANNING ELECTRON MICROSCOPIC ANALYSIS From the following photographs of the scanning electron microscope taken for different dosages of the inhibitor it is obviously seen that diethylamine inhibitor had effectively diffused through the pores of concrete comparatively and had formed compounds that reduce the permeability and porosity upto 2% of dosage. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 90 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology FIG1. SEM PHOTOGRAPHS F25 Control – without inhibitor DE -1% DE – 2% DE – 3.0 % When the dosage of the inhibitors was increased to 3%, the pictures show that these compounds are not effective. OPEN CIRCUIT POTENTIAL (OCP) TEST The probability of steel reinforcement to corrode was assessed by measuring the Open Circuit Potential (OCP) of embedded steel with respect to standard reference electrode as was conducted earlier for specimens with various percentages of fly ash. Similar specimens were cast with different dosages of inhibitor and their values of corrosion potential were measured between a single half cell and the reinforcement indicating probabilities of corrosion risk. Corrosion initiation time 500 400 300 200 100 Time in hours in Time 0 FA25 DE1% DE2% DE3% Percentage of inhibitors Fig.2 Open Circuit Potential (OCP) test Fig.3 Impressed Voltage Test ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 91 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology IMPRESSED VOLTAGE TEST As carried out earlier for different percentages of fly ash, similar specimens were cast with different dosages of the two organic inhibitors and the test was performed. On applying a constant impressed voltage from a D.C. source, the variation of current was recorded with respect to time. A sharp rise in current indicated the onset of corrosion and cracking of the concrete was usually visible thereafter. The time taken for initiation of first crack was considered as a measure of their relative resistance against chloride permeability and reinforcement corrosion. GRAVIMETRIC WEIGHT LOSS METHOD The specimens with 1%, 2% and 3% of the inhibitor were broken and the corroded rebars were again immersed in pickling solution, cleaned and weighed. The difference between the initial and final weights were taken as the weight loss of the specimen and it was converted into reduction in thickness and expressed as loss in thickness in mm per year (mmpy). TABLE 3 WEIGHT LOSS MEASUREMENTS S. No. Identification Corrosion rate in mmpy 1 FA 25 0.0431 2 BENZ – 1% 0.0299 3 BENZ – 2% 0.0101 3 BENZ – 3% 0.0131 DISCUSSION ON TEST RESULTS The results of all the corrosion tests performed prove that due the decrease in the permeability and porosity of the fly ash blended concrete with increase in dosages of the inhibitors, the ingress of chlorides through the dense concrete medium took more time and hence the corrosion initiation times were increased. With increase in percentage of inhibitors, the corrosion initiation time accordingly increased in the impressed voltage test. The same trend was observed in OCP and weight loss measurement techniques. CONCLUSION It was determined that 2% diethylamine inhibitor added specimens performed well when compared with other percentages of inhibitor both in strength, micro structural and durability tests. 3% of organic inhibitors though enhanced the corrosion resistance proved inferior in mechanical strengths. Hence 2% has been validated as the optimal dosage to be added in 25% fly ash blended concrete with respect to strength and durability. REFERENCES 1. Ampadu K.O. et al (1999), ‗Beneficial effect of fly ash on chloride diffusivity of hardened cement paste‘ Elsevier – Science Direct, Cement and Concrete Research, 1999, 29 : 585-590. 2. ASTM C 618-03, ‗Standard specification for coal fly ash and raw or calcined natural pozzolan for use as a mineral admixture in concrete‘. Annual book of ASTM standards, V.4.02, American Society for Testing and Materials, Philadelphia, PA; 2003. 3. Balouch S.U. et al (2010), ‗Surface corrosion of steel fibre reinforced concrete‘ Elsevier – Science Direct, Cement and Concrete Research 40 (2010) 410-414. 4. Behera J.P. et al (2000), ‗Investigations on the development of blended cements using activated fly ash‘ Indian Concrete Journal 2000, 74: 260-263. 5. Bjegovic D et al (1999), ‗Migrating corrosion inhibitor protection of concrete‘ Mater. Perform 11 (1999) 52-56. 6. Nmai C.K. (2004), ‗Multi-functional organic corrosion inhibitor‘ Elsevier – Science Direct, Cement & Concrete Composites 26 (2004) 199-207. 7. Ormellese et al (2006), ‗Corrosion inhibitors for chlorides induced corrosion in reinforced concrete structures‘ Elsevier – Science Direct, Cement and Concrete Research, No. 36, pp. 536-547. 8. Pengfei Huang et al (2005), ‗Influence of HCl corrosion on the mechanical properties of concrete‘ Elsevier – Science Direct, Cement and Concrete Research 35 (2005) 584-589. 9. Phanasgaonkar A et al (1997), ‗Corrosion inhibiting properties of organic amines in simulated concrete environment: Mechanism, International Conference on Understanding Corrosion Mechanism in Concrete: a key to improve infrastructure durability, Cambridge, 1997. 10. Santhakumar A.R. (2010), ‗Concrete Technology‘, Oxford University Press, India. 11. Saraswathy V et al (2001), ‗Evaluation of a composite corrosion-inhibiting admixture and its performance in concrete under macrocell corrosion conditions‘ Elsevier – Science Direct, Cement and Concrete Research 31 (2001) 789-794. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 92 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 12. Scott A. Civjan et al (2005), ‗Effectiveness of corrosion inhibiting admixture combinations in structural concrete‘ Elsevier – Science Direct, Cement & Concrete Composites, No. 27, pp. 688-703. 13. The Electrochemical Society of India (1998), ‗Corrosion handbook‘, Associate (Data) Publishers Pvt. Ltd., India. 14. Trepanier S.M. et al (2001), ‗Corrosion inhibitors in concrete: Part III. Effect on time to chloride- induced corrosion initiation and subsequent corrosion rates of steel in mortar‘ Elsevier – Science Direct, Cement and Concrete Research 31 (2001) 713-718. 15. Tae-Hyun Ha et al (2005), ‗Accelerated short-term techniques to evaluate the corrosion performance of steel in fly ash blended concrete‘ Elsevier - Science Direct, Building and Environment, August 2005. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 93 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology RESPONSE OF SWEET CORN (Zea mays L. saccharata) CULTIVARS TO FERTILITY LEVELS IN MEDIUM BLACK SOILS OF NORTHERN TRANSITIONAL ZONE OF KARNATAKA * FAVIDA BEGUM 1 & R. BASVARAJAPPA 2 * Department of Agronomy, College of Agriculture, Dharwad University of Agricultural Sciences, Dharwad, Karnataka, India * Presently Dean (Hort.), College of Horticulture Hiriyur, Chitradurga, Karnataka, India.* Email. [email protected] ABSTRACT A field experiment was conducted during Kharif 2016 at Main Agriculture Research Station, Dharwad, which lies in Northern Transition Zone of Karnataka. The experiment consists of three sweet corn genotypes (Sugar-75, Hi-brix 39 and Hi-brix 53) in main plot and sub plot consisting of three fertility levels (75 per cent RDF, 100 per cent RDF and 125 per cent RDF). The sweet corn hybrid Hi-brix 39 recorded significantly higher plant height (168.85 and 192.25 cm),), LAI (3.37 and 4.40) and total dry matter production (48.45 and 120.50 g plant-1) at 60 DAS and at harvest respectively. Significantly higher cob and green fodder yield (226 q ha-1 and 278 q ha-1), gross returns ( 230969), net returns ( 167764) and B: C ratio (3.65) was recorded with genotype Hi-brix 39 over Sugar-75 and Hi-brix 53. Among the sub plot treatments application of 125 per cent -1 RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) showed significantly taller plants, LAI, total dry matter production, SPAD values, cob and green fodder yield, gross returns, net returns and B:C ratio over other fertility levels. Interaction effect showed that Hi-brix 39 supplemented with 125 per cent RDF recorded significantly higher plant height (197.51 cm), LAI (4.92), total dry matter production (128.86 g plant-1) at harvest, further cob and green fodder yield (243 q ha-1 and 287 q ha-1 ), as well as B: C ratio (3.81) were higher than other treatment combinations. KEY WORDS: Economics, Sweet corn genotypes, Fertility levels, fresh cob yield, green fodder yield INTRODUCTION Sweet corn (Zea mays L. saccharata) also known as sugar corn, is a hybridized variety of maize (Zea mays L.) specifically bred to increase the sugar content. It is a mutantype with one or more recessive alleles in homozygous condition that enable the endosperm to accumulate twice the sugar content as that in seed corn. Sweet corn was introduced to India from United States of America. The fruit of sweet corn plant is kernel. It has sugary rather than a starchy endosperm with a creamy texture. The low starch level makes the kernel wrinkled rather than plumy. It is one of the most popular vegetable in the USA, Canada and Australia. It is becoming popular in India and other Asian countries. The production potential of maize in the state and the high economic returns from sweet corn, created immense scope of growing maize as a sweet corn to improve economic status of poor maize growers. In addition, it has potential to generate the employment opportunities in rural area. Higher yield of sweet corn can be obtained through the use of high yielding genotypes and inorganic fertilizers as a source of nutrients. Judicious use of plant nutrients is a key to realize higher productivity as it alone contributes 40 – 60 % of the crop yield in Maize (Dayanand, 1998). The mineral fertilizers continue to play the key role in the augmentation of the food production in the entire world. In India the high yielding varieties of cereals used in the 'Green Revolution' have worked as a catalyst in increasing the fertilizer demand (Prasad and Rajendra, 2000). At present, the fertilizer recommendation exists only for grain maize and information on fertilizer requirement of sweet corn is scanty and there is no separate fertilizer recommendation in package of practice. Hence, there is need to work out suitable fertilizer dosage and there is also a need to study the effect of nutrient levels on the growth, yield and quality of sweet corn. In light of the above, a field experiment was conducted at the Main Agricultural Research Station, Dharwad during Kharif, 2016 to study response of sweet corn (Zea mays L. saccharata) cultivars to fertility levels. MATERIAL AND METHODS The present investigation was carried out at the Main Agricultural Research Station, Dharwad during Kharif, 2016. The farm is located at 150 26‘ N latitude, 75o 07‘ E longitude and at an altitude of 678 m above mean sea level and falls under Northern Transition Zone (Zone-8) of Karnataka which lies between the Western Hilly Zone (Zone-9) and Northern Dry Zone (Zone-3) of Karnataka. The rainfall during cropping period was (568.22 mm) and mean maximum and minimum temperature were 30.84 and 14.53 ⁰C, respectively. The ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 94 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology experiment was laid out in split plot design with three main plot and three sub plot treatments. Main plot consists of three sweet corn cultivars (sugar-75, Hi-brix 39 and Hi-brix 53) and sub plot consists of three fertility levels (75% of RDF, 100% of RDF and 125% of RDF). The soil of experimental site was black clayey soil, with neutral in pH (7.3), low in electrical conductivity (0.27 dS/m), medium in organic carbon (0.60 %), low in available nitrogen (230.2 kg ha-1), medium in phosphorus (42.8 kg ha-1) and high in potassium (361.5 kg ha-1). SPAD chlorophyll meter readings were recorded with the help of SPAD meter at middle lamella of youngest fully opened leaf at different stages (Rostami et al., 2008). The fertilizers were applied as per recommendation, basal half of nitrogen, entire dose of phosphorus and potassium in the form of urea, DAP and MOP were applied as per the treatments. Remaining half of recommended nitrogen was top dressed at 30 DAS. Farm yard manure was applied to entire field 15 days prior to sowing at the rate of 7.5 t ha-1. Experimental plot was kept free from weeds throughout the crop growing period. Atrazine was applied as a pre-emergent herbicide at the rate of 1 kg a.i. ha-1 immediately after sowing. One inter-cultivation was carried out at 30 DAS by passing the bullock drawn hoe. Two hand weedings were carried out at 30 DAS and 60 DAS. For stem borer management, Furadon was applied @ 7.5 kg ha-1 after 25 days of sowing. All growth and yield components were recorded at different growth stages of the crop. Agronomic data collected included plant height, number of leaves and leaf area index (LAI) at different growth stages of the crop. Grain and stover yield from net plot area was converted into per hectare basis. Economic returns were worked out based on the prevailing market prices of input, cost of fertilizers and outputs. Returns per rupee invested were worked out by considering net returns and cost of cultivation. The experimental data were analyzed statistically as per the procedures given by Gomez and Gomez (1984). RESULTS AND DISCUSSION RESPONSE OF SWEET CORN GENOTYPES The sweet corn hybrid Hi-brix 39 produced significantly higher fresh fresh cob yield and green fodder yield (226 q ha-1 and 278 q ha-1) which was significantly superior over Hi-brix 53 (210 q ha-1 and 266 q ha-1 ) and Sugar-75 (183 q ha-1 and 249 q ha-1). The increase in the fresh cob yield with Hi-brix 39 over Hi-brix 53 and Sugar-75 was to the extent of 7.6 and 23.49 per cent respectively (Table 2). This could be ascribed on account of their genetic capabilities to exploit available resources for growth and development (Suthar et al., 2012). The significant increase in yield of Hi-brix 39 might be a result of overall improvement in growth as evinced from higher plant height, LAI, total dry matter production, at 60 DAS and at harvest stages over other genotypes (Table 1). It could be ascribed to genetic potential of Hi-brix 39 in utilization of all the resources which are essential for better growth performance of crop. Significantly higher SPAD and lower LTR values were recorded with Hi-brix 39 at 60 DAS and at harvest stages (Table 1). This could be a result of higher leaf area and optimum uptake of nutrients specially Nitrogen from the soil resulted in higher chlorophyll content which might have enhanced the photosynthetic rate and their by production of higher dry matter per plant (Kumar and Ponnuswami, 2015). Economical returns are an important factor to assess feasibility of the practices in crop production. Genotype Hi-brix 39 recorded significantly higher gross returns ( 230969), net returns ( 167764) and B: C ratio ( 3.65) over other two genotypes. The increase in gross return, net return and B: C was due to higher cob and green fodder yield. Thus, superiority of the genotype Hi-brix 39, under field experiment situations could be attributed to its versatility with regard to adaptation to different agro climatic situations and management practices. EFFECT OF DIFFERENT FERTILITY LEVELS -1 Application 125 per cent RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) recorded significantly higher fresh cob yield (220 q ha-1) compared to other fertility levels, the fresh cob yield increased to an extent of 13.4 per cent and 7.3 per cent over 75 per cent RDF and 100 per cent RDF respectively. The higher fresh cob yield with successive increase in fertility levels was due to adequate supply of nutrients which might have helped in increased root growth to extract nutrients and moisture more effectively from deeper soil layers, thus improving growth components such as plant height (161.66 and 191.50 cm), LAI (3.69 and 4.58) and total dry matter production (50.74 and 123.22 g plant-1) as a result of increased activity of many enzymes and photosynthesis leading to higher values of total dry matter production. In the present study, the fertility levels significantly influenced the SPAD chlorophyll meter values. Significantly higher SPAD values were recorded with 125 percent RDF at 60 DAS and at harvest. This could be attributed to increase in fertility levels leading to more chlorophyll development in crop plant which probably resulted in higher SPAD values. These results were in line with Ashok (2013). Application of 125 per cent RDF recorded significantly higher gross returns ( 2,25,840), net returns ( 1,60,978) and B: C ratio (3.48) as compared to other two levels of fertility levels (Table 3). This may be due to higher yield obtained with application of 125 per cent RDF. Similar reports on increasing economics returns with increasing fertility levels was reported by Sahoo and Mahapatra (2007) and Panchbhai (2013) ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 95 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology INTERACTION EFFECT OF SWEET CORN GENOTYPES AND FERTILITY LEVELS The genotype Hi-brix 39 supplemented with 125 per cent RDF recorded significantly higher fresh cob yield and green fodder yield (243 q ha-1 and 287 q ha-1) over other treatment combinations (Table 2). Differences observed in cob yield can be related back to the difference in dry matter production and its accumulation in economic parts (cob). Total dry matter production, is the reflection of biological efficiency of cultivar and the nutritional level supplied. During present investigation, Hi-brix 39 supplemented with 125 per cent RDF recorded significantly higher plant height, leaf area index, at harvest of the sweet corn compared to other treatment combination. Higher leaf area and LAI at the time of harvest resulted in better production of photosynthates and their translocation to reproductive parts (cob) was responsible for overall improvement in growth which has positive effect on higher yield. The increase in yield of genotype Hi-brix 39 with successive increase in fertility level is ascribed as ability of genotype to uptake the nutrients due to higher availability of nutrients with increased fertility levels. Similar results were reported by Jogdand et al. (2008) and Dibaba et al. (2013). Among interaction effects of genotypes and fertility levels the treatment combination Hi-brix 39 received 125 per cent RDF recorded significantly higher gross returns ( 2,47,564), net returns ( 1,82,638) and B: C ratio (3.81) over other treatment combinations (Table 3). This might be on account of significant jump in yield of green cobs and green fodder (Suthar et al,. 2012). The results obtained from this experiment clearly suggest that sweet corn genotype Hi-brix 39 performed better with application of 125 per cent RDF which would be economically feasible under northern transition zone of Karnataka. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 96 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology TABLE 1. GROWTH PARAMETERS OF SWEET CORN AT 60 DAS AND AT HARVEST (AH) OF SWEET CORN AS INFLUENCED BY GENOTYPES, FERTILITY LEVELS AND THEIR INTERACTIONS SPAD Total dry matter Leaf Area Plant height (cm) chlorophyll LTR production Index Treatments values (g/plant) 60 60 60 60 60 DAS AH AH AH AH AH DAS DAS DAS DAS Genotypes (G) G1 = Sugar-75 155.09 181.97 3.04 3.94 45.35 43.51 15.63 18.08 45.95 110.56 G2 = Hi-brix 39 168.85 192.25 3.37 4.40 50.82 47.67 10.32 14.21 50.56 124.19 G3 = Hi-brix 53 161.04 189.23 3.23 4.26 48.91 45.78 13.31 15.38 48.45 120.50 S. Em. ± 0.64 0.69 0.04 0.01 0.19 0.25 0.69 0.28 0.36 0.69 C. D. at 5 % 1.92 2.08 0.12 0.04 0.56 0.74 2.07 0.83 1.08 2.09 Fertility levels (F) -1 F1 = 75 % RDF (112.5: 56 : 28 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 156.11 183.53 2.73 3.85 46.95 44.46 11.65 14.62 45.52 113.39 -1 F2 =100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 158.54 188.43 3.21 4.17 48.26 45.17 12.32 15.61 48.70 118.65 -1 F3 = 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 161.66 191.50 3.69 4.58 49.87 47.34 15.29 17.45 50.74 123.22 S. Em. ± 1.04 0.80 0.04 0.03 0.21 0.13 1.11 0.95 0.38 0.90 C. D. at 5 % 2.88 2.23 0.12 0.07 0.59 0.36 NS NS 1.04 2.50 Interaction (G × F) -1 G1 F1 = Sugar-75 with 75 % RDF (112.5: 56: 28 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 152.63 180.94 2.62 3.63 43.94 42.87 12.49 16.57 43.32 107.41 -1 G1F2 = Sugar-75 with 100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 155.81 181.73 3.04 3.95 45.32 42.91 15.84 16.93 46.02 109.98 -1 G1F3 = Sugar-75 with 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 160.36 183.25 3.45 4.24 46.78 44.75 18.57 20.75 48.51 114.31 -1 G2F1 = Hi-brix 39 with 75 % RDF (112.5: 56: 28 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 156.67 184.64 2.81 3.96 49.01 46.24 9.31 12.65 47.71 118.70 -1 G2F2 = Hi-brix 39 with 100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 159.55 194.62 3.33 4.32 51.25 47.09 8.50 15.78 50.98 125.02 -1 G2F3 = Hi-brix 39 with 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 162.79 197.51 3.96 4.92 52.21 49.70 13.15 14.21 53.00 128.86 -1 G3F1 = Hi-brix 53 with 75 % RDF (112.5: 56: 28 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 159.02 185.00 2.76 3.97 47.91 44.26 13.15 14.62 45.54 114.06 -1 G3F2 = Hi-brix 53 with 100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 160.26 188.94 3.27 4.23 48.21 45.51 12.63 14.12 49.09 120.96 -1 G3F3 = Hi-brix 53 with 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 161.82 193.74 3.66 4.59 50.62 47.57 14.15 17.39 50.71 126.49 S. Em. ± 0.39 0.30 0.02 0.01 0.08 0.06 0.40 0.33 0.14 0.33 C. D. at 5 % NS 0.83 NS 0.03 NS 0.16 NS NS NS 0.92 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 97 TABLE 2. FRESH COB YIELD WITH HUSK , GREEN FODDER YIELD AND HARVEST INDEX OF SWEET CORN AS INFLUENCED BY GENOTYPES, FERTILITY LEVELS AND THEIR INTERACTIONS Treatments Fresh cob Green Harvest Index yield fodder yield (%) (q ha-1) (q ha-1) Genotypes (G) G1 = Sugar-75 183 249 42.42 G2 = Hi-brix 39 226 278 44.77 G3 = Hi-brix 53 210 266 44.13 S. Em.± 1.64 14.32 0.28 C. D. at 5 % 4.95 43.19 0.85 Fertility levels (F) -1 F1 = 75 % RDF (112.5: 56 : 28 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 194 253 43.46 -1 F2 =100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 205 262 43.85 -1 F3 = 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 220 279 44.01 S. Em.± 2.44 4.56 0.46 C. D. at 5 % 6.77 12.63 NS Interaction (G × F) G1 F1 = Sugar-75 with 75 % RDF (112.5: 56: 28 kg N: P2O5: -1 K2O ha ) 176 237 42.55 G1F2 = Sugar-75 with 100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: -1 P2O5: K2O ha ) 181 245 42.51 G1F3 = Sugar-75 with 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: -1 K2O ha ) 193 265 42.19 G2F1 = Hi-brix 39 with 75 % RDF (112.5: 56: 28 kg N: P2O5: -1 K2O ha ) 208 269 43.65 G2F2 = Hi-brix 39 with 100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: -1 P2O5: K2O ha ) 226 279 44.74 G2F3 = Hi-brix 39 with 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: -1 P2O5: K2O ha ) 243 287 45.92 G3F1 = Hi-brix 53 with 75 % RDF (112.5: 56: 28 kg N: P2O5: -1 K2O ha ) 199 252 44.16 G3F2 = Hi-brix 53 with 100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: -1 P2O5: K2O ha ) 207 260 44.30 G3F3 = Hi-brix 53 with 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: -1 P2O5: K2O ha ) 223 281 43.93 S. Em. ± 0.89 1.73 0.17 C. D. at 5 % 2.46 4.81 NS TABLE 3. ECONOMICS OF SWEET CORN AS INFLUENCED BY DIFFERENT GENOTYPES, FERTILITY LEVELS AND THEIR INTERACTIONS Gross Net Treatments returns returns B:C ratio ( /ha) ( /ha) Genotypes (G) G1 = Sugar-75 1,89,958 1,26,943 3.01 G2 = Hi-brix 39 2,30,969 1,67,764 3.65 G3 = Hi-brix 53 2,15,465 1,52,259 3.41 S. Em.± 1,936 1,936 0.03 C. D. at 5 % 5,839 5,839 0.09 Fertility levels (F) -1 F1 = 75 % RDF (112.5: 56 : 28 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 2,00,215 1,38,797 3.26 -1 F2 =100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 2,10,337 1,47,191 3.33 -1 F3 = 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha ) 2,25,840 1,60,978 3.48 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology S. Em.± 2,260 2,260 0.03 C. D. at 5 % 6,264 6,264 0.09 Interaction (G × F) G1 F1 = Sugar-75 with 75 % RDF (112.5: 56: 28 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha-1) 1,81,837 1,20,545 2.97 G1F2 = Sugar-75 with 100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha-1) 1,87,682 1,24,663 2.98 G1F3 = Sugar-75 with 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha-1) 2,00,356 1,35,621 3.10 G2F1 = Hi-brix 39 with 75 % RDF (112.5: 56: 28 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha-1) 2,14,048 1,52,566 3.48 G2F2 = Hi-brix 39 with 100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha-1) 2,31,297 1,68,088 3.66 G2F3 = Hi-brix 39 with 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha-1) 2,47,564 1,82,638 3.81 G3F1 = Hi-brix 53 with 75 % RDF (112.5: 56: 28 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha-1) 2,04,762 1,43,280 3.33 G3F2 = Hi-brix 53 with 100 % RDF (150: 75: 37.5 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha-1) 2,12,033 1,48,824 3.35 G3F3 = Hi-brix 53 with 125 % RDF (187.5: 94: 47 kg N: P2O5: K2O ha-1) 2,29,599 1,64,673 3.54 S. Em. ± 838 838 0.01 C. D. at 5 % 2,322 2,322 0.04 REFERENCES 1. Ashok, L. J., 2013, Response of maize hybrids to staggered planting under changing climate scenario. M. Sc. Thesis, Indian Agricultural Research Institute, New Delhi. 2. Dayanand, 1998. Principles governing maize cultivation during rainy season. Indian Farming, 48(1): 84-87. 3. Dibaba, D. H., Hunshal, C. S., Hiremath, S. M., Awankavar, J. S., Wali, M. C., Nadagouda, B. T. and Chandrashekar, C. P., 2013, Performance of maize (Zea mays L.) hybrids as influenced by different levels of nitrogen, phosphorus, potassium and sulphur application. Farm Sci. J., 26(2): 194-199. 4. Gomez, K.A. and Gomez, A. A., 1984, Statistical Procedure for Agricultural Research. An International Rice Research Institute Book, A. Wiley-inter Science, John Wiley and Sons Inc., New York, United State of America, pp.130-150. 5. Jogdand, P. B., Kadam, G. L., Talnikar, A. S. and Karande, D.R., 2008, Response of maize (Zea mays L.) hybrids to fertility levels in kharif season. Inter. J. Agric. Sci. 4(1): 225-230. 6. Kumar, S. and Ponnuswami, V., 2015, Effect of different water regimes and organic manures on indole acetic acid (IAA), oxidase activity, leaf area, light transmission ratio, chlorophyll stability index, relative water content and yield attributes of noni (Morinda citrifolia L.). J. Medicinal Plants Res., 9(16): 550-560. 7. Panchbhai, N., 2013, NPK rate effects on growth and yield of sweet corn. M.Sc. (Agri.) Thesis, Acharya N.G. Ranga Agril. Univ. Rajendranagar, Hyderabad, Telangana (India). 8. Prasad and Rajendra, 2000, Nutrient management strategies for next decade: Challenges ahead. Fertilizer News, 45 (4): 13-18, 21-25 & 27-28. 9. Rostami, M., Koocheki, A. R., Mahallati, M. N. and Kafi, M., 2008, Evaluation of chlorophyll meter (SPAD) data for prediction of nitrogen status in corn (Zea mays L.). Am- Euras. J. Agric. Environ. Sci.,3(1): 79-85. 10. Sahoo, S. C. and Mahapatra, P. K., 2007, Yield and economics of sweet corn (Zea mays) as affected by plant population and fertility levels. Indian J. Agron., 52 (3): 239-242. 11. Suthar, M., Singh, D. and Nepalia, V., 2012, Green fodder and cob yield of sweet corn (Zea mays. L. ssp. saccharata) varieties at varying fertility levels. Forage Res., 38 (2): 115-118. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 99 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology IMPACT OF GST ON REAL ESTATES Dr.S.JEYALASHMI PSG COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCE ABSTRACT Property consisting of land and building is called REAL ESTATE. Talking about real estate, which is globally recognized is the second largest employment producer after agricultural sector and is expected to grow over 30 per cent in coming decade. Factors affecting the growth of this sector are corporate environment which requires huge office space, accommodations for employees, also construction industry which ranks 14th among all other major sectors in India. So far, citizens were playing massive amounts for buying any property or even for construction. With the implementation of GST on real estates, will it be advantages to them? INTRODUCTION Every person wishes to own a property either land or building, and buying them is not an easy task. The taxes or prices they are paying is complicated since there are 39 taxes and charges applicable to real estate and construction industry. Bringing real estate under GST which is goods and service tax and only single tax to be paid by consumer for the goods he purchased /sold and services he received/rendered will complicate the whole taxing and pricing system for real estate since land and building is neither a service nor a good. If the government decides to bring real estates under GST then it has to delete this note from schedule III to and move to schedule II. So far, this sector has been given a 33 percent abatement on the 18 percent GST. But, the effective charge on this sector is 12 percent against listed 18 percent. During the period of construction, when the contractor collects amount from customers/consumers to pay different vendors and services and gets construction done, the under construction product or asset will be considered as service and come in preview of GST, speaking about input credit which the sector is receiving from 267 allied industries when starts flowing in, there would be clarity on how much the prices can drop by. CURRENT SCENARIO: TYPES OF TAXES AND CHARGES APPLICABLE ON REAL ESTATE AND CONSTRUCTION INDUSTRY: S.NO TAX TYPE CENTRAL 01 Corporate income tax Central 02 GST Central & state 03 Gift tax Central 04 Wealth tax Central 05 Swatch bharat cess Central 06 Krishi kalyan cess Central 07 Banking cash transaction tax Central 08 Other cess and surcharges Central & state 09 Custom duty Central 10 Excise duty Central 11 Anti dumping duty Central 12 Dividend distribution tax Central ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 100 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology S.NO TAX TYPE STATE 01 GST Central & state 02 Entertainment tax State 03 Stamp duty State 04 Registration fees State 05 Labour cess State 06 Civil aviation permission State 07 Transfer tax State 08 Toll tax and road tax State 09 Infrastructure cess State 10 Entry tax State 11 Endowment tax State 12 Estate duty State 13 Fuel tax State 14 Property tax State 15 NA tax State 16 Luxury tax State 17 Local body tax State 18 Freight State 19 BOCW it is cess for civil construction in many states State 20 Profession tax State 21 Octroi State S.NO TAX TYPE MUNICIPAL 01 Municipal tax Municipal 02 Capitation fees Municipal ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 101 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 03 TDR & fungible FSI cost Municipal 04 Staircase premium Municipal 05 Land revenue & scrutiny fees Municipal 06 Debris, water connection, electricity deposits Municipal 07 Development charges Municipal Taxes like stamp duty , property taxes come into local that is under state revenue, if the government tries to include these in GST which is for central, the government has to take initiatives to bear state and revenue loss. Since the implementation of demonetization in 2016, the real estate sector did tremble until first quarter of 2017 because the cash transactions for buying and selling of properties has made it stagnant and this eventually helped reduce land prices thereby making the end products more affordable to the consumers. POST IMPLEMENTATION OF RERA, DEMONETISATON AND GST THE FOLLOWING IMPACTS WERE OBSERVED: More demand for 2BHK & 3BHK segment apparent by a steady surge in site visits Preference for ready to move in properties that are hassel-free of any compliance issue. Willingness to pay a premium for long-standing reputed developers. The implementation of RERA in may 2017 has impacted new launches in the market. According to RERA, builders must focus on competing the already started projects rather than launching new one. GOVERNMENT INITIATIVES: The Government of India along with the governments o respective states has taken several initiatives to encourage the development in the sector. The smart city project, where there is a plan to built 100 smart cities is a prime opportunity for the real estate companies. A new public private partnerships (PPP) policity with eight PPP has been unveiled by the MINISTRY OF HOUSING AND URBAN AFFAIRS, Government of India, to push investments in the affordable housing segment. The Reserve bank of India has proposed to allow banks to invest in Real Estate Investment Trust (REITs) and Infrastructure Investment Trust (INVTs) which is expected to benefit both real estate and banking sector in diversifying investor base and investment avenues respectively. The Ministry of housing and urban poverty alleviation has sanctioned the construction of 84,460 more affordable houses for urban poor in five states namely West Bengal, Jharkhand, Punjab, Kerala and Manipur under the Pradhan mantri awas yojana scheme with a total of investment Rs 3073 crores. The GST rate has been reduced to 8% from the existing 12% on purchases of houses avaiting of the credit linked subsidy scheme CLSS under Pradhan mantri awas yojana and under CLSS scheme, a first-house buyer with a household income of upto Rs 18 lakhs per annum can avail a benefit up to Rs 2.7 lakhs while buying a house or apartment of up to 150 sq.mts carpet area. GST RELIEF WILL GIVE A PUSH TO AFFORDABLE HOUSING: Those who do not qualify for credit linked subsidy scheme will continue to pay GST at 12% for same house. The tax benefit will also be extended to an affordable housing project, which has been given infrastructure status, in case the maximum unit size in the project is a carpet area of 646 sq.ft. The first house condition on the buyer will not be applied in this case. The decision will give a push to the real estate sector, particularly affordable housing, as prices will fall up to 4%. The Rs.18 lakh cap on household income is also ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 102 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology sufficiently large to cover most first-time house buyers. But these buying their second house, or more, would not be able to avail this benefit. ROAD AHEAD: The Securities and Exchange Board of India has given its approval for the Real Estate Investment Trust (REIT) platform which will help in allowing all kinds of investors to invest in the Indian real estate market. It would create an opportunity with Rs 1.25 trillion (US$) in the Indian market over the years. Responding to it the consumers, developers, or real estates have accepted the challenge. The growing flow of FDI into Indian real estate is encouraging increased transparency, developers, to attract funding, have revamped their accounting and management systems to meet due diligence standards. CHARTS SHOWING INDIAN REAL ESTATE INDUSTRY: DEMAND ANALYSIS OF OFFICE SPACE OF TOP 8 CITIES 2013-2017: 30 25 20 15 10 5 0 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 KEY DRIVERS: Rapid growth in service sectors : IT/ITES, BFSI & Telecom, rising demand for MNC‘s demand for office space in tier 2 cities. TREND ANALYSIS (STOCK NO OF ROOMS) (‗000): 140 120 100 80 60 40 20 0 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 103 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology KEY DRIVERS A Robust domestic tourism industry, the increasingly global nature of Indian business boosting travel, tax incentives for hotels & higher FSI, expansion of physical infrastructure during the 12th five year plan. CONCLUSION If GST is applied on land and immovable property, the buyer has to pay one tax at uniform rate across states (stamp duty varies state wise). The industry would be benefited on long run, for short term, this sector is already grapping due to RERA, GST, demonetization. However, both, the industry and the consumer, seems to be beneficiaries of a more transparent way of taxation. But implementing GST would take a little longer time and meanwhile government has to make citizens understand its benefits, advantages by taking workshops. Though governments itself at initial stage take careful steps, real estate sector is going to flourish in future. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 104 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology VERSE MAJORITY NEIGHBORHOOD NUMBER FOR GRID GRAPH PAULRAJ JAYASIMMAN.I & DHIVYA.T AMET Deemed to be university, Kanathur,Chennai. email:[email protected] ABSTRACT −1 In this article the inverse majority neighborhood number 푛푀 (퐺) of 퐺 are determined for grid graph. KEYWORDS: Majority Neighborhood number, Inverse Majority neighborhood number INTRODUCTION By a graph, we have a tendency to mean a finite, simple, undirected and connected graph with p vertices and q edges. We have a tendency to follow the notation and language given by Harrary[1]. The neighborhood parameters studied very well within the articles [3],[4],[5],[11].A set S ⊆ V(G) is called a p q majority neighborhood set if G = ⌌N[v]⌍ contains atleast ⌈ ⌉ vertices and atleast ⌈ ⌉ edges. A majority set M v∈S 2 2 S is called a minimal majority neighborhood set if no proper subset of S is a majority neighborhood set. The minimum cardinality of a majority neighborhood set is called the majority neighborhood number of G and is denoted by nM (G).[7] INVERSE MAJORITY NEIGHBORHOOD NUMBER OF A GRAPH Definition 2.1 ′ ′ If SM be the majority set of G. If V − SM contains a majority neighborhood set SM of G, then SM is called an −1 inverse majority neighborhood set of G with respect to SM . The inverse majority neighborhood number nm (G) of G is the minimum cardinality of an inverse majority neighborhood set of G. m Theorem 2.2 The graph G = p × p with m ≥ 3 then n−1(G) = ⌈ ⌉. 2 m m 2 Proof:Let G = p2 × pm with m ≥ 3 and the vertex set V(G) = {v11, v12, v13, . . . v1m , v21, v22, . . . v2m }. d(v1m ) = d(v2m ) = 2. |V(G)| = p = 2m and |E(G)| = q = 2(m − 1) + m. m Claim:S′ be the inverse majority neighborhood set with cardinality ⌈ ⌉ M 2 ′ ′ ′ Case(i):m = even. Let SM be the inverse majority neighborhood set then SM = {v13, v15, . . . v1m−1, v21}.|SM | = m−1 m−1 2(m−1)+m 2m−2+m 3m−2 q 3m p ⌊( )⌋ + 1 ⇒ |⌌N[S′ ]⌍| = 3(⌊ ⌋) + 2 ≥ ⌈ ⌉ ≥ ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈ ⌉. |N[S′ ]| = ⌈ ⌉ > ⌈ ⌉ = 2 M 2 2 2 2 2 M 2 2 2m 3m ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈m⌉. Therefore |S′ | ≤ |n−1(G). Suppose S′ = {v , v , . . . v } then |⌌N[S′ ]⌍| = ⌈ ⌉ − 3 ≤ 2 M m M 13 15 1i−1 M 2 2(m−1)+1 2m−2+m 3m−2 q 3m p 2m ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈ ⌉ ≤ ⌈ ⌉|N[S′ ]| = ⌈ ⌉ − 2 < ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈m⌉.Therefore |S′ | ≥ 2 2 2 2 M 2 2 2 M −1 ′ −1 nm (G).Hence |SM | = nm (G). Case(ii):If m = odd m−1 m+1 q Sub Case(i): If m = 3 then S′ = {v , v }.|S′ | = ⌈ + 1⌉ and |⌌N[S′ ]⌍| = 2(⌈ ⌉) = . |N[S′ ]| = M 22 23 M 2 M 2 2 M m+1 p m−1 m−1 2(⌈ ⌉) + 1 > ⌈ ⌉.Hence |S′ | ≤ n−1(G). Suppose S′ = {v }then|S′ | = ⌈ ⌉ ⇒ |⌌N[S′ ]⌍| = ⌈ ⌉ + 2 ≤ 2 2 M m M 22 M 2 M 2 q ⌈ ⌉.|S′ | ≥ n−1(G). Hence |S′ | = n−1(G). 2 M m M m ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 105 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 3m m−3 Sub Case(ii): If m > 3 then S′ = {v , v , . . . v , v } then |S′ | = ⌊ − 2⌋and |⌌N[S′ ]⌍| = 3(⌈ ⌉) + 4 = M 13 15 1j 21 M 2 M 4 q 3m p m ⌈ ⌉.|N[S′ ]| = + 1 > ⌈ ⌉. Therefore |S′ | ≤ n−1(G).Suppose S′ = {v , v , . . . v } then |S′ | = ⌊ ⌋ and 2 M 2 2 M m M 13 15 1j M 2 3m q |⌌N[S′ ]⌍| = ⌊ ⌋ − 2 < ⌈ ⌉ and |S′ | ≥ n−1(G). Hence S′ = n−1(G). M 2 2 M m M m 2m Theorem 2.3 If the graph G = P × P with m ≥ 3 then n−1(G) = ⌈ ⌉. 3 m m 3 Proof:Let G = P3 × Pm with vertex set V1(G) = {v11 , v12 , v13, . . . v1m }V2(G) = {v21, v22, . . . v2m }V3(G) = ′ {v31, v32, . . . v3m }. |V(G)| = P = 3m|E(G)| = q = 3(2m − 1). d(v2m ) = 4d(v1m ) = d(v3i) = 3.Let SM be the 2m inverse majority neighborhood set with cardinality ⌈ ⌉ 3 2m m−1 3(2m−1) 6m−3 q Case(i):If m is odd then |S′ | = ⌈ ⌉ ⇒ |⌌N[S′ ]⌍| = 5⌈ ⌉ + 1 > ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈ ⌉.Suppose M 3 M 2 2 2 2 5m 3(2m−1) q |⌌N[S′ ]⌍| − 1 = ⌈ ⌉ − 2 > ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈ ⌉. Therefore S′ ≤ n−1(G). M 2 2 2 M m 5m n(m−1)+m(n−1) 2nm −n−m q Case(ii):If m is even then |⌌N[S′ ]⌍| = ⌊ ⌋ − 1 < ⌈ ⌉ = ⌈ ⌉ < ⌈ ⌉.Therefore |S′ | ≥ M 2 2 2 2 M 2m n−1(G) = ⌈ ⌉. m 3 REFERENCES 1. Frank Harry, 1969 Graph theory, Addision-Wesley reading MA. 2. Haynes, T W hedetniemi, S T, and Slater PJ, 1998, Fundamentals of domination in graphs, Marcel Dekker. Inc., New York, 3. Sampathkumar E and Walikar H B, 1979, The connected domination of a graph, Jour. Math.phy.sci. 13.6. 4. Sampathkumar E and Prabha S Neeralagi, 1985, Neighborhood number of a graph, Indian J. Pure. Appl. Math, 16.2, 126-132. 5. Sampathkumar E and Prabha S Neeralagi, Independent, Perfect and Connected neighborhood number of a grph, Journal of combinators Information and System of science. 6. Joseline Manora J and Swaminathan V, 2006, Majority dominating sets- Published in J A R J 3.2,75- 82. 7. Joseline Manora J and Swaminathan V, 2010, Majority neighborhood number of a graph- Published in Scientia Magna, Dept. of Mathematics Northwest University, Xitan, P.R China- Vol(6), 2, 20-25. 8. Joseline Manora J and Paulraj Jayasimman I, 2014, Independent Mjority Neighborhood Number of a graph, International Journal of Applied Computational Science and Mathematics, 4.1, pp. 103-112 9. Joseline Manora J and Paulraj Jayasimman I, 2013, Neighborhood sets polynomial of a graph, International Journal of Applied Mathematical Sciences, ISSN 0973-0176 6. 1, pp.91-97. 10. Paulraj Jayasimman I and Joseline Manora J, Independent Majority Neighborhood Polynomial of a graph, International Journal Mathematical Archive, Vol. 8, 8, pp 109-112. 11. Kulli.V.R and Kattimani, 2008, The Inverse Neighborhood Number of a graph, South.East. Asian.J.Math. and Math. Sc., 6.3,pp. 23-28. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 106 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology ASSESSMENT BY DEGREE SIMILARITY MEASURES OF FUZZY SETS THEORY ON SUPPLY CHAIN PERFORMANCE SANTOSH KUMAR SAHU Department of Mechanical Engineering VSS University of Technology, Burla – 768018, Odisha, India *Corresponding author (e-mail: [email protected]) ABSTRACT In resent scenario supply chain management is the integral key business processes from buyer through suppliers, which provides services, products, and information that add value for buyers and other stakeholders; its success relies on the designed supply chain. The main focus of this research is the assessment of an efficient approach to supply chain performance measurement through FMADM (Fuzzy Multi Attribute Decision Making) method. In the FMADM of supply chain performance measurement, most of the data are qualitative. Here the qualitative data are ambiguous; so this datamust be converted from the qualitative terms into quantities terms through fuzzy mathematics. The FMADM alsoidentifying and prioritization the key factors to enhancing competitiveness. This research forwarded to explore the techniques for design and performance assessment of different supply chain based on fuzzy approach. The Main goal of the proposed approach is to present a structured framework (Decision Support System) analyzing the market winning criteria and market qualifying criteria on the supply chains in a fuzzy environment, based on a novel fuzzy based decision making technique.The supply chain performance assessment using fuzzy logic operation has been identified as a new path counters the uncertainty and ambiguity environment supply chain performance assessment. Keywords: Supply chain management (SCM), Analytic hierarchy process (AHP), Decision-support system (DSS) INTRODUCTION AND STATE OF ART In resent scenario global market, SCM is being viewed asimportanttechnique for enhancing organizational effectiveness and for smooth realization of organizational target such as better customer care,enhanced competitiveness and increased profitability [1]. In recent past, organizational performance assessment and metrics have received much attention from practitionersand researchers. The importance of these assessment and metrics in the success of an organization cannot be exaggerate because they affect tactical, strategic, operational planning and control. Performance assessment and metrics have an important role to play in construct theobjectives, evaluating performance, and finding out future courses of actions [2]. However, the existing performance assessment theory fails to provide its necessary support in strategy development, decision making and performance improvement [3]. Performance evaluation of supply chain provides important and strategic guidance for the effective implementation of supply chain management.Beamon[4] focused on the performance measures used in supply chain models by considering three types of performance measures: resource measures, output measures, and flexibility measures. Gunasekaran et al. [1]proposed a framework for evaluating the strategic, tactical and operational level performance in a supply chain. The focus was on performance assessment dealing with suppliers, delivery performance, customer-service, and inventory and logistics costs in a SCM. Chan [5] presented the formulization of both qualitative and quantitative performance measurements for smooth representation and understanding of SCM. Apart from the genuine criteria such as cost and quality, five (resource utilization; flexibility; visibility; and innovativeness) other performance measurements were defined. In addition, a multi attribute decision making technique, an analytic hierarchy process (AHP), was used to make decisions based on the priority of the said performance measures.Kleijnen and Smits [6]proposed to deal with multiple metrics in SCM via the balanced scorecard, which measured customers, internal processes, innovations, and finance. This paper distinguished four simulation types for SCM such as spreadsheet simulation, system dynamics, discrete-event simulation, and business games. Perona and Miragliotta[7] performed an empirical research to investigate how complexity could affect a manufacturing company‘s performances, and those of its supply chain which an emphasis to sales, inbound and outbound logistics, product and process engineering, production and organizational issues. Agarwal and Shankar [8]investigated about a System Dynamics-based model in order to understand the dynamic behavior of the variables that could play a major role in the performance improvement in a supply chain. The model provided an effective framework for analyzing different variables affecting supply chain performance. Variables emanating from performance measures such as gaps in customer satisfaction, cost minimization, lead-time reduction, service level improvement and quality improvement were identified as goal- seeking loops. Bhagwat and Sharma [9]pro[posed a balanced scorecard for SCM capable of measuring and ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 107 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology calculating day to day business operations from finance, customer, internal business process, and learning and growth perspectives. Aramyan et al. [10]targeted to evaluate the usefulness of a conceptual model for supply chain performance measurement in an agrifood supply chain. A conceptual model for integrated supply chain performance measurement was evaluated in a Dutch German tomato supply chain. From the case study, four (efficiency, flexibility, responsiveness, and food quality) main categories of performance measures were identified as important performance components of the tomato supply chain performance measurement system. GENERAL STEPS FOR ASSESSMENT SUPPLY CHAIN PERFORMANCES Formation of a group of experts (DM) for calculating and appraising of SC Performance. Selection of appropriate linguistic scale to represent DMs‘ subjective judgment in relation to priority importance (weight) against evaluation indices and at the same time to rate the performance extent of individual performance indices. Assignment of performance ratings as well as importance weights of indices using linguistic terms. Approximation of DMs‘ subjective judgment (in linguistic terms) by Interval-Valued Trapezoidal Fuzzy Numbers (IVTFNs). Estimation of appraisement index. Identification of ill performing areas which need future improvement. THE GENERALIZED TRAPEZOIDAL FUZZY NUMBERS ~ A ~ A fuzzy set in a universe of discourse X is characterized by a membership function A xwhich ~ associates with each element x in X a real number in the interval [0, 1]. The function value A xis termed ~ the grade of membership of x in A . A trapezoidal fuzzy number (Figure 1) can be defined as ~ A a ,a ,a ,a ;w~ ~ 1 2 3 4 A as shown in Fig. 1and the membership function Ax: R 0,1is defined as follows: Here, and ~ (1) a1 a2 a3 a4 wA (0,1) Figure. 1: Trapezoidal fuzzy number ~ Suppose that ~ ~ and b b ,b ,b ,b ; w~ are twoa trapezoidal fuzzy numbers, then the a a1,a2 ,a3,a4;wA 1 2 3 4 B 4 ~ ~ x operational rules of the trapezoidal fuzzy numbers a and b are shown as follows: ~ ~ ~ ~ a b ,a b ,a b ,a b ;min (w ~ ,w ~ ) a b a1,a2,a3,a4;wA b1,b2,b3,b4;wB 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 A B (2) ~ ~ ~ ~ a b ,a b ,a b ,a b ;min (w ~ ,w ~ ) a b a1,a2,a3,a4;wA b1,b2,b3,b4;wB 1 4 2 3 3 2 4 1 A B (3) ~ ~ ~ ~ a b a1,a2,a3,a4;wA b1,b2,b3,b4;wB ~ ~ ~ ~ (4) a b a1b1, a2b2, a3b3, a4b4;min (wA,wB) ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 108 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology ~ a ,a ,a ,a ;w ~ ~a/b 1 2 3 4 A ~ b1,b2,b3,b4;wB ~ ~ a1/b4 ,a 2/b3,a3/b2 ,a 4/b1;min (wA ,wB ) The concept of Degree of Similarity between two fuzzy numbers has been adopted for Supply Chain performance evaluation index ranking. Then it has beenevaluatedby degree of similarity between Ideal FPII and FPIIs corresponding to each evaluation index. The particular index which corresponds to high degree of similarity (FPII of an index as compared to Ideal FPII) is assumed to have higher contribution; it indicates high performance and high ranking order. According to the descending order of the DOS values; the ranking order of various performance indices will determine. CASE STUDY Aforesaid appraisement module has been case studied in an Indian famous automobile part manufacturing industry in Eastern part of India. A four-level performance appraisal hierarchy consisting of 1st level evaluation indices, 2nd level attributes, 3rd and 4th level indices has been designed as shown in Table 1. The proposed appraisement modules (Table 1) may help the industries for continuous monitoring of SC performance; it can detect week performing areas which need for future improvement. Mainly the performance metrics being subjective in nature, so a decision making group has been formed to collect subjective evaluation information using linguistic scale. Linguistic information (Table 12) has been correlated with fuzzy logic to provide a strong mathematic base to support the aforesaid evaluation and related decision modeling. Procedural steps of SC performance appraisement module have been highlighted below. Step 1: Formation of a group of experts (DM) for evaluating and appraising of supply chain performance. Step 2: Selection of appropriate linguistic scale to represent DMs‘ subjective judgment in relation to priority importance (weight) against evaluation indices and at the same time to rate the performance extent of individual performance indices. Step 3: Assignment of performance ratings as well as importance weights of indices using linguistic terms. Step 4: Approximation of DMs‘ subjective judgment (in linguistic terms) by Interval-Valued Trapezoidal Fuzzy Numbers (IVTFNs). For evaluating importance weights of evaluation indices at different levels, a committee of five decision makers (DMs), DM1, DM2, DM3, DM4, DM5) has been constructed to express their subjective preferences (priority importance) in linguistic terms; similarly, the decision making group has also been instructed to use the linguistic scale (as shown in Table 2) to express their subjective judgment against performance rating of each 4th level evaluation indices. After that the linguistic variables for assessing performance ratings and importance weights of different evaluation indices has been accepted by the decision-makers (DMs), the decision makers have been asked to use aforesaid linguistic scales to assess performance rating against each of the 4th level criteria. Similarly, subjective priority weight of 1st to 4th level evaluation indices has been assessed by the DMs respectively. Using the concept of IVTFNs in fuzzy set theory, the linguistic variables have been approximated by IVTFNs. Next, the aggregated decision making andassessment matrix has been constructed. The aggregated fuzzy appropriateness rating against individual indices with corresponding importance weight has been computed for the said SC. The fuzzy performance index (FPI) has been calculated first at the 4th level, then at the 3rd level and then extended to 2nd level and finally to the 1st level indices. Considering a 4-level general evaluation system hierarchy for SC performance evaluation; the following notations to be used for computational purpose. th Ci = i first level evaluation index; i = 1, 2, … m. th th st Cij = j second level evaluation index (i.e. attribute) which is under i 1 level evaluation index; j = 1, 2, … n th th nd Cijk = k third level evaluation index (criterion) which is under j 2 level evaluation index (i.e. attribute); k=1, 2,..,p th th rd Cijkl = l fourth level evaluation index which is under k 3 level evaluation index; k = 1, 2,..,q The fuzzy performance measure of 3rd level evaluation indices can be calculated as follows (Equation 1): q wijkl U ijkl l1 U ijk q wijkl l1 (1) Here Uijklrepresents aggregated performance measure (rating); wijklrepresents aggregated fuzzy weight th corresponding to criterion Cijklat 4 level. Also, Uijkrepresents the computed performance. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 109 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology The fuzzy performance measure of 2nd level evaluation indices (attributes) can be calculated as follows (Equation 2): p wUijk ijk l1 (2) Uij p wijk l1 Here Uijk represents computed performance measure (rating); wijkrepresents aggregated fuzzy weight corresponding to criterionCijk at 3rd level. Also,Uijkrepresents the computed performance measure (rating) corresponding to attribute at 2nd level. The fuzzy performance measure of 1st level evaluation indices can be calculated as follows (Equation 3): n wij U ij j1 U i n wij j1 (3) Here Uijrepresents computed (or aggregated) performance measure (rating) andwijrepresent aggregated fuzzy nd weight corresponding to attributesCijat 2 level. Also, Uirepresents the computed performance measure (rating) corresponding to the index Ci at 1st level. TABLE 2. SUPPLY CHAIN PERFORMANCE APPRAISEMENT MODELING Goal, (C) 1st level 2nd level indices, 3rd level 4th level indices, (Ci) (Cij) indices, (Cijk) indices,(Cijkl) Supply Chain Supplying(C1) P & C P & C Design, P & C Design, Performance Design(C11) C111 C1111 (C) P & C Fabrication P & C P & C (C12) Fabrication, Fabrication, C121 C1211 Delivery (C13) Delivery Cost, Delivery Cost, C131 C1311 Delivery Timeliness, Reliability, C132 C1321 Error-Free, C1322 Delivery Frequency, Flexibility, C133 C1331 Amount, C1332 Inbound SB Management SB SB Logistics, (C21) Management, Management, (C2) C211 C2111 Transportation TC, C221 TC, C2211 (C22) TP, C222 TP, C2221 TF, C223 TF, C2231 FU, C224 FU, C2241 Receiving and Receiving and Receiving and Inspection (C23) Inspection, C231 Inspection, C2311 Handling and Handling and Handling and Storing(C24) Storing, C241 Storing, C2411 Core IM Operations( Product Product Manufacturing, C31) Quality, C311 Quality, C3111 (C3) Operation Operation Costs, C312 Costs, C3121 Efficiency, C313 Efficiency, C3131 Flexibility, C314 Flexibility, C3141 Productivity, Productivity, ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 110 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology C315 C3151 R&D( C32) R&D, C321 R&D, C3211 Tech. and Tech. and Tech and Engineering (C33) Engineering, Engineering, C331 C3311 Maintenance and Maintenance Maintenance Storing (C34) and Storing, and Storing, C341 C3411 Outbound Transport (C41) Transport, C411 Transport, C4111 Logistics, Warehouse(C42) Warehouse Warehouse (C4) Costs, C421 Costs, C4211 Inventory Flow Inventory Flow Rate, C422 Rate, C4221 Inventory Inventory Accuracy, C423 Accuracy, C4231 Stock Capacity, Stock Capacity, C424 C4241 Facility Facility Utilization, C425 Utilization, C4251 Packing and Packing and Packing and Shipping, (C43) Shipping, C431 Shipping, C4311 Marketing and Customer Order Response Response Time, Sales, Processing and Time, C511 C5111 (C5) Delivery, Order Fill Rate, Order Fill Rate, (C51) C512 C5121 Order Frequency, Flexibility, C513 C5131 Amount, C5132 Delivery Timeliness, Reliability, C514 C5141 Error-Free, C5142 Advertising and Advertising and Advertising and Customer Customer Customer Services Services, C521 Services, C5211 (C52) TABLE 2.NINE-MEMBER LINGUISTIC TERMS AND THEIR CORRESPONDING INTERVAL- VALUED FUZZY NUMBERS Linguistic terms Linguistic terms for for weight Interval-Valued trapezoidal fuzzy numbers ratings assignment Absolutely high Absolutely impressive [(1.00, 1.00, 1.00, 1.00; 1.00), (1.00, 1.00, 1.00, 1.00; 1.00)] (AH) (AI) Very High (VH) [(0.9465, 0.975, 0.9935, 0.9935; 0.5), (0.930, 0.980, 1.00, 1.0; Very Impressive (VI) 1.0)] High (H) [(0.7835, 0.8150, 0.8850, 0.9065; 0.5), (0.72, 0.78, 0.92, 0.97; Satisfactory (S) 1.0)] Fairly High (FH) [(0.650, 0.6735, 0.7565, 0.790; 0.5), (0.580, 0.630, 0.80, 0.86; Fairly satisfactory (FS) 1.0)] Medium (M) [(0.4035, 0.4535, 0.5365, 0.5666; 0.5), (0.32, 0.41, 0.58, 0.65; Medium (M) 1.0)] Fairly low (FL) [(0.2335, 0.2550, 0.325, 0.3565; 0.5), (0.17, 0.220, 0.36, 0.42; Fairly poor (FP) 1.0)] Low (L) [(0.0865, 0.120, 0.160, 0.1825; 0.5), (0.040, 0.100, 0.18, 0.23; Poor (P) 1.0)] ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 111 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Very low (VL) [(0.0075, 0.0075, 0.0150, 0.0535; 0.5), (0.00, 0.0, 0.02, 0.07; Very poor (VP) 1.00)] Absolutely low [(0.000, 0.00, 0.00, 0.00; 1.00), (0.000, 0.000, 0.000, 0.000; Absolutely poor (AP) (AL) 1.000)] Thus, overall fuzzy performance index U(FPI) can be obtained as follows(Equation 4). m wi U i i1 UFPI m wi i1 (4) th st th st Here Uirating of i 1 level evaluation index; wi = Weight of i 1 level evaluation index. The FPI thus becomes [(0.647, 0.746, 0.1.027, 1.176; 0.5) (0.0.516, 0.644, 1.238, 1.508; 1)]for the said SC under consideration. After evaluating FPI, simultaneously it is felt indeed necessary to identify and analyze weak (ill- performing) areas in which organizational SC may require future improvement. Fuzzy Performance Importance Index (FPII) may be used to identify these ill-performing areas. FPII combines the performance rating and importance weight of various 4th level indices. The higher the FPII of a factor, the higher is the contribution. The concept of FPII was introduced by Lin et al., 2006[14] for agility extent measurement in supply chain. FPII w' U ijkl ijkl ijkl (5) w' 1,1,1,1;1,1,1,1,1;1 w ijkl ijkl (6) Here, th th Uijklis the rating and wijklis the importance weight of l index (at 4 level). ' [(1,1,1,1;1)(1,1,1,1;1)]wwijkl ijkl ' FPII wijkl U ijkl Computation of FPII 4th level indices By using equation 5 and 6 FPII IDEALis[(0.263, 0.303, 0.394, 0.599; 0.5) (0.189, 0.254, 0.443, 0.517; 1)] Fuzzy Performance Importance Index (FPII) has been computed against each of the 4th level evaluation indices. By this way, SC evaluation indices (at 4th level) have been ranked accordingly and thus, improvement opportunities have been sorted out. Highest matrices ranking of C4211 is 0.921(Rank 1) and lowest matrices ranking of C4111 is 0.571(Rank 36). CONCLUSIONS Supply chain management is a key strategic factor for increasing organizational effectiveness and for better realization of organizational goals such as enhanced competitiveness, better customer care and increased profitability.The era of both globalization of markets and outsourcing has begun, and many companies select supply chain and logistics to manage their operations. In this context, present study attempts to develop an efficient fuzzy based decision support system for supply chain performance measurement.The theory behind IVTFNs and ‗fuzzy degree of similarity‘ has been fruitfully explored in the decision modeling. Here highest matrices ranking of C4211 is 0.921(Rank 1) and lowest matrices ranking of C4111 is 0.571(Rank 36). The decision maker focused more attention to C4211 and also also increases the performance of most ill indices like C4111. REFERENCES 1. Gunasekaran, A., Patel, C. andTirtiroglu, E. (2001) Performance measures and metrics in a supply chain environment. International Journal of Operations and Production Management, Vol. 21(1), pp. 71-87. 2. Gunasekaran, A., Patel, C. and Ronald E.M. (2004) A framework for supply chain performance measurement. International Journal of Production Economics, Vol. 87, pp. 333–347. 3. Kamalabadi, N., Bayat, A., Ahmadi, P., Ebrahimi, A. and Kahreh, M.S. (2008) Presentation a New Algorithm for Performance Measurement of Supply Chain by Using FMADM Approach. World Applied Sciences Journal, Vol. 5(5), pp. 582-589. 4. Beamon, B.M. (1999) Measuring supply chain performance. International Journal of Operations & Production Management, Vol. 19(3), pp. 275-292. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 112 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 5. Chan, F.T.S. (2003) Performance Measurement in a Supply Chain. International Journal of Advanced Manufacturing Technology, Vol. 21, pp. 534-548. 6. Kleijnen, J.P.C. and Smits, M. (2003) Performance metrics in supply chain management. Journal of the Operational Research Society, Vol. 54(5), pp. 507-514. 7. Perona, M. and Miragliotta, G. (2004) Complexity management and supply chain performance assessment: A field study and a conceptual framework, International Journal of Production Economics, Vol. 90, pp. 103–115. 8. Agarwal, V. and Shankar, R. (2005) Modeling supply chain performance variables. Asian Academy of Management Journal, Vol. 10(2), pp. 47–68. 9. Bhagwat, R. and Sharma, M.K. (2007) Performance measurement of supply chain management: A balanced scorecard approach. Computers & Industrial Engineering, Vol. 53, pp. 43-62. 10. Aramyan, L.H., Oude Lansink, A.G.J.M., Vander Vorst, J.G.A.J. and Kooten, O.V. (2007) Performance measurement in agri-food supply chains: a case study. Supply Chain Management: An International Journal, Vol. 12(4), pp. 304-315. 11. Mentzer, J.T., DeWitt, W., Keebler, J.S., Min, S., Nix, N.W., Smith, C.D. and Zacharia, Z.G. (2001) What is supply chain management. Supply Chain Management, Sage, Thousand Oaks, CA, pp. 1-25. 12. Hines, T. (2004) The Emergence of Supply Chain Strategy as a Critical Success Factor for Retailing Organizations: International Retail Marketing, 1st ed., Oxford: Butterworth-Heinemann, ISBN 0750657480. 13. Lambert, D. (2008)An executive summary of Supply Chain Management: Process, Partnerships, Performance, Jacksonville: The Hartley Press, Inc. 14. Lin, C.T., Chiu, H., and Chu, P.Y. (2006) Agility Index in the Supply Chain, International Journal of Production Economics, Vol. 100(2), pp. 285-299. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 113 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology ICT: USES IN TEACHER EDUCATION Dr.WILSON Asst.Professor, Government College of Education, Orathanadu, Thanjavur, 9750796659, [email protected] ABSTRACT Information and communication technologies (ICT) have become commonplace entities in all aspects of life. Education is a very socially oriented activity and quality education has traditionally been associated with strong teachers having high degrees of personal contact with learners. The use of ICT in education lends itself to more student-centred learning settings. Teacher Education is to learn to teach and teach to learn. Recent evidence indicates that reforms of teacher education creating more tightly integrated programs with coursework on learning and teaching produce more effective and more likely to enter and stay in teaching. An important contribution of teacher education is its development of teacher‘s abilities to examine teaching from the perspective of learners who bring diverse experiences and frames of reference to the classroom. It is important to recognize that, Teacher Educators and Training Graduates are becoming more knowledgeable of Information and Communication Technology outcomes (ICTs), they continue to have knowledge or skill with which to integrate those technologies into their teaching. But with the world moving rapidly into digital media and information, the role of ICT in education is becoming more and more important and this importance will continue to grow and develop in the 21st century. INTRODUCTION The computers has been documented as influencing classroom use of computers (Becker 1999; Becker, Ravitz &Wong, 1999; Charania & Shelley, 2007), it is not a sufficient factor for use. The World Bank study (2011) suggested that merely putting computers in schools and training teachers to use them will not improve the learning levels in students. A two year study conducted by the World Bank (2011 One of the obvious reasons for this as explained in the study was that the computers in the schools were used to learn computer systems and applications with no plan and efforts to integrate it with the teaching and learning in the classroom. This argument is also consistent with Koehler and Mishra (2009) MEANING OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY (IT) : Information Technology consists of two words Information and Technology. If you know the two words you can understand the word information technology together. The term Information refers to any communication or representation of knowledge such as facts, data or opinions in any medium or for, including textual, numerical, graphic Cartographic, narrative or audiovisual forms. DEFINITION OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY: Information Technology is a scientific, technological and engineering discipline and management technique used in handing the information, it‗s application and association with social, economical and cultural matters. - UNSECO Information technology is a systemic study of artifacts that can be used to give form to facts in order to provide meaning for decision making, and artifacts that can be used for organization, processing, communication and application of information - Darnton and Giacoletto. CHARACTERISTICS OF INFORMATION TECHNOLOGY 1. Acquistion, Storage, manipulation, management, transmission or reception of data or information. 2. Real time access to information. 3. Easy availability of updated data 4. Connecting Geographically dispersed regions 5. Wider range of communication media. USES IN EDUCATION ICT is being utilized in every part of life. Due to the increasing importance of the computer, students-the future citizens cannot afford to keep themselves aloof from this potential medium. In education, use of ICT has become imperative to improve the efficiency and effectiveness at all levels and in both formal and non-formal settings. Education even at school stage has to provide computer instruction. Profound technical knowledge and positive attitude towards this technology are the essential prerequisites for the successful citizens of the coming decades. It can be Used for the Following Purposes : • To broadcast material, online facility or CD-ROM can be used as sources of information in different subjects; To facilitate communication for pupils with special needs; ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 114 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology To use electronic toys to develop spatial awareness and psycho-motor control; To use the Online resource like, email, Chat, discussion forum to support collaborative writing and sharing of information. To facilitate video-conferencing or other form of Tele conferencing to involve wide range of students from distant Geographic areas. For Blended learning by combining conventional classroom learning with E-leaming learning systems To process administrative and assessment data. To exchange and share ideas -among teachers for the professional growth. To carry out internet-based research to enhance , educational process ADVANTAGES OF THE USE OF ICT IN EDUCATION The hardware and software like OHP, Television, Radio, Computers and related software are used in the educational process. However ICT today is mostly focused on the use of Computer technology for processing the data. In this context, advantages of ICT in education can be listed down as follows : Quick Access to Information : Information can be accessed in seconds by connecting to the internet and surfing through Web pages. Easy Availability of Updated Data: Sitting at home or at any comfortable place the desired information can be accessed easily. This helps the students to learn the updated content. Teachers too can keep themselves abreast of the latest teaching learning strategies and related technologies. CONNECTING GEOGRAPHICALLY DISPERSED REGIONS: With the advancement of ICT, education does not remain restricted within four walls of the educational institutions. Students from different parts of the world can learn together by using online, offline resources. This would result in the enriching learning experience. Such collaborative learning can result in developing. divergent thinking ability in students, Global perspectives respect for varied nature of human life and acculturation. Facilitation of learning ICT has contributed in shifting the focus on learning than teaching. ICT helps students to explore knowledge to learn the content through self study. Teacher can help the students by ensuring the right direction towards effective learning. Situational learning, Programmed learning, many Online learning courses are some of the example of self learning strategies that are being utilized with the help of ICT. WIDER RANGE OF COMMUNICATION MEDIA: With the advent of ICT, different means of communication are being introduced in the teaching learning process. Offline learning, on line learning, blended learning are some of the resources that can be used in educational institutions. Collaborative learning, individualized learning strategies can enhance the quality of group as well as individual learning with the real society. This can ensure the applicability of knowledge. WIDER LEARNING OPPORTUNITIES FOR PUPILS Application of latest ICT in education has provided many options to the learners to opt for the course of their choices. Many Online courses are available for them to select any as per their aptitude and interest. Students can evaluate their own progress through different quizzes, ready to use Online tests. This can ensure fulfillment of the employment required in the job market thus minimizing the problem of unemployment. It can also provide more efficient and effective citizens to the society as per the changing needs. CONCLUSION In order to conclude we will try to proceed to synthesize from a general viewpoint the results obtained, taking into consideration the relevant aspects of the literature. The results provided by both the quantitative and qualitative analysis of the literature obtained will be exposed especially regarding those aspects which are related to ICTs for Education and ICTs in Education. ICTs for education refers to the development of information and communications technology specifically for teaching/learning purposes, while the ICTs in education involves the adoption of general components of information and communication technologies in the teaching learning process. REFERENCES 1. UNESCO (2002) Information and Communication Technology in Education–A Curriculum for Schools and Programme for Teacher Development. Paris: UNESCO. 2. UNESCO,(2002),'Open And Distance Learning Trends, Policy And Strategy Considerations',14 UNESCO. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 115 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 3. Becker, H. (1999). Internet use by teachers: Conditions of professional use and teacherdirected student use. Teaching, learning, & computing: National survey (report no.1). Center for Research on Information Technology & Organizations, Irvine, CA: California University, Irvine. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No. ED429564). 4. Becker, H., Ravitz, J., & Wong, Y. (1999). Teacher and teacher-directed student use of computers and software. Teaching, learning, and computing: 1998 national survey (report no. 3). Center for Research on Information Technology & Organizations, University of California, Irvine and University of Minnesota. (ERIC Document Reproduction Service No.ED437927). 5. Charania, A. & Shelley, M. External and Internal Predictors of Technology Use in Classroom. AERA 2007, Chicago, Illinois. 6. Koehler, M. J., & Mishra, P. (2009). What is technological pedagogical content knowledge? Contemporary Issues in Technology and Teacher Education, 9(1). Retrieved from http://www.citejournal.org/vol9/iss1/general/article1.cfm ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 116 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology IMPLEMENTATION OF PREPAID SYSTEM IN ELECTRICITY CONTROL USING EMBEDDED TECHNIQUE L. ARUNRAJA*, L. DHATCHINAMURTHY Department of Electronics & Communication, K.S.Rangasamy College of Arts & Science (Autonomous), Tiruchengode- 637215, Tamilnadu, India *Corresponding author: [email protected] ABSTRACT A Real-Time Operating System is a multitasking operating system intended for real-time applications. Such applications include embedded systems like household appliance controllers, industrial control, and scientific research equipments. In ―EB Prepaid Cards‖ aims at modifying the existing energy monitoring and billing mechanism. The core motive is to automotive the entire system by supplementing a microcontroller to the energy meter there by minimizing the modification required and hence increasing the practical viability of the entire work. The reason behind the work done was to propose a scheme that would appear lucrative to all strata of society. The currently existing method for monitoring the electricity consumption involves a lengthy process of assigning a person with the duty of nothing the consumption reading on the meter and submitting the same to the billing department. The bill is generated accordingly. The consumer goes to the electricity board‘s office and stands in lengthy queues in order to pay the bill. This system has advantages on the consumers end as the consumer does not pay the caution deposit, there by lowering his initial investment. This system has a provision for a secondary card so as to avoid total power failure when the balance in the card goes to zero. An overload protection facility is also provided, in which when load exceeds the limit specified by power supplier the meter will give alarm to warn user to reduce load. Meter will release alarm if user‘s load below the threshold within indicated period and it will cutoff power supply if not Alarm. KEYWORDS- EEPROM, LCD, TACT switch. INTRODUCTION Embedded structures may be described as records processing structures embedded into last products such as cars, telecommunication or fabrication equipment [1]. These systems have many constraints and requirements. Requirements can be useful or nonfunctional. In general, functional description is not sufficient. So, may be important nonfunctional necessities along with performance, cost, power/energy consumption and physical size and weight [2]. Electrical metering instrument technology has come an extended way from the original bulky meters with heavy magnets and coils to the recent electronic meters. There had been many innovations the ones have led to length & weight reduction in addition to development in capabilities and specifications. Despite of the rapid improvement in majority of the sectors in India most effective few trends are made in electricity sector. As confined non-renewable assets are found in our daily existence, electricity is one of them which are utilized in every country [3]. The present practice of electricity billing is manual method only. With this, the total billing is a time consuming process and it requires more manpower. The collection of billing is late procedure and so many consumers may not pay in time. Disconnecting of unpaid connections is also manual. Due to a majority of these drawbacks we cannot have proper auditing. To overcome these drawbacks, we are imposing this work. If this device is available in our everyday life, it will be beneficial for both the Government and the general public [4]. In a completely atomized system is the minimal human interaction with the system [5]. The EB department can cut down the expenditure incurred in the form of minimal power consumption by the user, so the user can plan his electricity budget before consuming the power. Once decided, the user can buy the memory card and consume it. For e.g.: A card bought in one state in India could be used in other states also. APPROACH OF THE PROBLEM The right approach towards a problem is very important. An egregious approach could prove to be drastic and can cause a large number of inconveniences. Taking this into account a large number of approaches were thought of for solving our problem taking into account factors such as complexity, cost, and effectiveness and so on. The present day electricity metering is done manually with the help of an energy meter. Changes in this would cause a large number of overheads. So in our approach we have decided to supplement it with other components. The sensor senses the rotations of the disc in the energy meter and the pulsed output is given to the microcontroller. Every time a pulse is obtained, the microcontroller takes the values stored in the EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable Read-Only Memory) that is currently in use and decrements it by one. This denotes the consumption of a unit (Kilowatt) and this system of metering has been done for simulation purposes. Here we have decided to use 2 cards (EEPROM). The reason being, once the value of the EEPROM becomes zero, the total power supply will be cut off. This would be very inconvenient and not practical for the user. So here we have given a provision where we make use of 2 EEPROM‘s. Once the value in one card goes to zero control is transferred and the value of the second card is verified. If this value is not zero power is supplied. If the values in both the cards are zero total power supply is cut off. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 117 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology As a precaution we have made use of a buzzer where in a alarm is sounded once the value in the card goes below a threshold values, to intimate the user that it is time to replace the card. On commercial implementation, a sight modification to the logic would be required; where in the completion of a rotation causes the increment of a counter, which is checked against another value. For Ex : If 200 rotations of the disk indicate the consumption of one kilowatt, then each time the disk completes a rotation a counter value is incremented and this value is checked with the value 200. If both these values are equal than one unit is decremented from the EEPROM that is currently in use. This decremented value is now written back on to the EEPROM. The count that is maintained ion the EEPROM is explicitly made to zero. This process is repeated till the value in the cards run dry. The balance that is read from the EEPROM is regularly updated on the LCD screen. The display on the LCD tells us about the card number that is currently in use and the balance on that card in term of units. A relay circuit has been designed to cut off the power supply in the event of the cards running dry. The entire work has been shown on a single board but for practical purposes the relay circuit will be part of the electricity post from which energy is distributed to the consumer. This is done to avoid power theft. This work could be propped with a few encryption algorithms and anti strategies, which have been discussed in the subsequent chapters. The design has been done bearing two factors in mind: The cost efficiency Simplicity This means that while the work will be cost efficient it will also not involve any major alterations to the existing system thereby increasing the overall viability of the work. SURVEY Over whelming response obtained from the natives of Kyoto has prompted the Japanese government to implement the same on a larger scale. The implementation of this work is still in the pipeline because of the fear of piracy of the prepaid cards. Another problem is the reprogramming/replacement of the microcontroller involved. The following has been taken care of by sealing the equipment with a hologram which when meddled with will result in prosecution. The menace of piracy has been settled by using the power cable to set up a network with the EB office so as to prove the authenticity of the card. The huge investment involved in creating a wired network has been nullified by using the power cable for data transmission. CARD RECHARGING UNIT FIG.1. PREPAID CHARGING CIRCUIT The recharging unit contains one EEPROM card, LCD display and the Microcontroller 89C51 and four TACT switches [6]. The card to be recharge is placed on the base. Whenever the circuit is turned on the message ―EB PREPAID CARD PROGRAMMER‖ will be displayed in the LCD [7]. Then the first switch is pressed which is used for entering into the recharging program. After pressing switch ‗1‘ the LCD display delivers the message as CARD VALUE = ―0000‖. The second switch is used for moving the cursor to the required place. The third switch is used for incrementing the value in the cursor-denoted digit. After entering the card value in the required place the fourth switch should be pressed for existing from the recharging program. After displaying the message CARD VALUE=‖XXXX‖ is displayed in first line and ―OK‖ is displayed in second line of the LCD display. After that we can remove the card from the base or circuit board (Figure.1). ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 118 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology SENSING UNIT FIG. 2. BLOCK DIAGRAM OF SENSING UNIT CIRCUIT DESCRIPTION FIG.3. METER SENSING CIRCUIT The sensor MOC 7811 always is giving a high current output [8]. It contains one LED with Photo transistor. When the optical signal falls on the surface of the phototransistor it gives normally high output. Whenever the optical signal cuts it gives a low output. This low output is connected with the interrupt pin (INT0) of the microcontroller 89C51 (Figure: 3). The EEPROM prepaid card has charged by the Electricity Board according to the user‘s necessity. Whenever that INT0 gets input then the microcontroller decrements the value of the card by one for each optical signal cut by the rotating wheel of the meter [9]. The EEPROM prepaid card is an external memory for the microcontroller [10]. Here we are using two cards. One is primary and another is secondary. Whenever the value of the card reaches 20 Rs, then the first relay cut-off and the buzzer gives warning to the user. After reaching 10 Rs, the second relay is also goes ‗OFF‘ and the buzzer is in ‗ON‘ condition. When the card value reaches 5 Rs, then the third relay also goes off, the total system goes off. Whenever the card value elapses it displays ‗NIL‘ in the LCD. CONCLUSION The System that we have designed the end-user feel with minimum strain, and Pre-planning of the power consumption is one of the critical tasks for the user. A complicated encryption algorithm and the authenticity of the card could be done in the future. REFERENCES [1] P. Marwedel, ―Embedded Systems Design‖, Dordrecht: Springer, 2006. [2] W. Wolf, ―Computers As Components: Principles of Embedded Computing System Design‖, San Francisco: Morgan Kaufmann, 2005. [3] Tajeen K Hundekari, Prof. G. P. Jain, Mr. Sagar R Somani, ―Microcontroller Based Prepaid Energy Meter to Control Electricity Theft‖, International Journal of Innovative Research in Computer and ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 119 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Communication Engineering, 4 (11), pp.19133-19140, 2016. [4] Pragnya.G, S.Durga Prasad, Tadi chandra sekhar, ―An On Chip Design for Prepaid Electricity Billing System‖, Internationaljournal of Scientific Engineering and Technology Research, ISSN 2319-8885, 03 (2), pp. 0212-0218, 2014. [5] Computer literature index, Volumes 13-14, Applied Computer Research (Firm), Applied Computer Research., 1984, the University of Michigan, 30 Jul 2007. [6] Kenneth J. Ayala, ―The 8051 microcontroller architecture, programming, and applications‖, ISBN 0- 314-77278-2 (soft). [7] Richa Shrivastava and Nipun Kumar Mishra, "An Embedded System for Wireless Prepaid Billing of Digital Energy Meter," International Journal of Advances in Electronics Engineering, pp. 322-324. [8] Mazidi Muhammad Ali, Mazidi Janice gillispie and McKinlay Rolin D, ―The 8051 Microcontroller and embedded systems using assemble and C‖. Upper Saddle River: Prentice Hall, 2008. [9] Steiner Craig. ―The 8051/8052 microcontroller: Architecture, assembly language & hardware interfacing‖. Boca Raton: Universal Publishers, 2005. [10] L. Benini, A. Macii and M. Poncino, "Energy-aware design of embedded memories: A survey of technologies, architectures, and optimization techniques," Journal of ACM Transactions of Embedded Computing System, 2 (1), pp. 5-32, 2003. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 120 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology MOOC – A VITAL MECHANISM FOR LEARNING Dr. J.E. MERLIN SASIKALA Assistant Professor in Education, Alagappa University College of Education, Alagappa University, Karaikudi ABSTRACT In recent years, the enrolment in Massive Open Online Course (MOOC) has increased tremendously. India after US is dominating the global growth in enrolments. Seeing the growth of enrolment from the country and satisfy their need of education, India has started various projects for offering MOOC courses. Currently, NPTEL, mooKIT, IITBX, and SWAYAM are the platforms used in India for offering courses. In this paper, highlight Structure of MOOCs, Role of a MOOC instructor, the advantages and challenges for MOOCs. KEYWORDS — MOOC, MOOC in India, structure, role, features, Indian MOOC platforms INTRODUCTION Online learning uses technology for delivering the courses. Education with technology is considered as most promising development in education. With technology globalization, the concept of learning and teaching has undergone a tremendous change. Technological usage in education provides global learning environment, which allows accessing the course material anytime, anywhere, connect other learners, and get access to the content without considering any geographical boundaries. The significant changes in use of the technology in online education has seen emergence of the concept of Massive Open Online Course (MOOC). Nowadays, MOOC is the most popular way used to offer online courses, globally. MOOC are the massive course designed to support unlimited platform. BACKGROUND TO MOOCs With the digital revolution education in the last decade has been undergoing imperative changes on both the fronts of dissemination and reception first through e-learning and more recently through MOOCs. The term MOOC was coined in 2008, when the first generation of MOOCs that relied mostly on open web sources, were introduced. Soon the MOOCs, with interest from both private and non-profit institutions, evolved that relied more on Video Lectures, Learning Management System and Discussion Forums. There was an emergence of many well-financed platforms like Coursera, edX, Udacity, Khan Academy, etc., some of them even joint attempts by Universities in US, that prompted The New York Times to name 2012 as ‗The Year of the MOOC‘ CONCEPT AND DEFINITION The concept of MOOCs is still evolving with the technology and from learning‘s acquired by conducted MOOCs. Generally it is considered an online course aimed at unlimited participation through internet devices that use traditional e-learning resources like video lectures, in-lecture quizzes, readings and weekly quizzes and assignments along with interactive user forums to clarify concepts and enhance learning by providing a social learning experience to the students. STRUCTURE OF MOOCs A typical MOOC has instructional material using Four Quadrant Approach (Video Lectures, Demonstrations, Quizzes and Supplementary Reference Material) which is developed before hand by Course Instructor(s) lead academic team consisting of Academic Associates. The course lessons are then released on a weekly basis along with live forums which may be used for weekly assignments, concept and doubt discussions and enhancing student‘s/learner‘s network. These forums are constantly moderated and reviewed by the Academic team. The course ends with a final examination that is proctored or in the form of assignment. ROLE OF A MOOC Instructor The role of an instructor in delivering a MOOC is that of a captain of a ship. She will not only plan the journey for the students but also the ship‘s smooth sailing till they reach their destination. An instructor will therefore need to plan out the course, prepare engaging Instructional Material with Academic team, moderate the forums while the course is on and collate learning‘s from the whole experience so that the next MOOC is even more engaging and has more participation. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 121 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology MOOC PLATFORMS IN INDIA Many initiatives have been taken by the Indian government to provide and support concept of open education. Initially, the objective was to provide open resources in terms of repositories, libraries, educational media files, e-books, etc. These were made accessible for everybody. Some of the efforts in this direction started as National Digital Repository of IGNOU, Sakshat providing e-content, Shishya for XI-XII Standards by CBSE Board, and Vidya Vahini integrating IT into the curriculum of rural schools by providing interactive training and developmental communication. Most of these initiatives started with establishing dedicated department to make education reachable to many learners as much as possible. Some of the common names in this path are, Education and Research Network (ERNET) connecting various colleges and schools by providing network connectivity; EDUSAT, a satellite launched for education in India, Consortium for Educational Communication (CEC), use the power of television to act as means of educational knowledge dissemination; Information and Library Network Centre (INFLIBNET) autonomous Inter-University Centre for connecting university libraries, also it has started several other programs. These all are the initiatives towards open education and education with Information technology still MOOC was out of their reach. FEATURES Some of the distinguishing features of MOOCs are:- Massive – MOOCs can have a large number of participants. It is not uncommon for some of the popular MOOCs to have over lakh participants. Open – Anybody who is desirous of learning can join a MOOC without any formal qualification restriction. Of course the MOOCs state pre-requisites for a particular course but they don‘t stop any learner from joining in. Interactive – MOOCs are highly interactive where students not only interact with the Instructor but also with fellow cohorts and thus collectively figure out answers. Four Quadrant Approach – MOOCs follow the four quadrant approach which enrich the instructional material by including content based lecture videos, animations or interactive simulations, supplementary resources like case studies, wiki development of the course, open content available on the internet, etc. and problems, quizzes and assignments. Information and communication Technology is used to its fullest capabilities to enrich the courseware and delivery ADVANTAGES OF MOOCs Participants/batch Size: Since the platform of delivery is completely online, there is no limitation on number of students that can take classes online. ―Circuit and Electronics Course on Edx Mooc Platform by MIT was taken by 1,55,000 students from 160 Countries and 7157 students successfully passed this Course. It would have taken 40 years for MIT (teaching this course every semester) to meet this number had been taught in brick and mortar method, which was done in months by teaching on MOOCs Platform. Why Massive Open Online Courses (Still) Matter…. By Anant agarwal on Ted Talks. Access/Inclusivity: MOOCs courses are accessible to anyone with an internet connection either on computer or mobile with no scope for any biasness either on caste, sex or religion. This method of learning is highly inclusive. Rising density of mobile phones can bring new revolution in education system with help of information technology in India. Geographic Reach: Learners from any corner of world can take this course with help of internet which nullifies the boundaries created by nations, states and division of areas by governments and administrative bodies. Free Learning: Majority of the MOOCs Courses are free of cost for learning. However, certification requires a small amount to be paid to meet operational expenditure for conduction of exams which saves money for many students for heavy tuition fees and other administrative charges. Though, majority of private MOOCs website have started charging fees for certification, they are also now charging fees to access the content hosted. However SWAYAM doesn‘t have any charge to access/take these courses which makes learning completely free for learners. Peer Learning: The concept of peer learning highlights learning from co-students with minimal/support of mentor or teacher. MOOCs platform have several mechanism that facilitate peer learning there by encouraging healthy discussion among various learners/students. This learning happens in discussion forum, chat rooms, live webinars etc. Peer learning facilitates understanding view points of participant learners. In other words it could be summarized as Learning by Teaching. Higher Engagement of Students: MOOCs courses are featured to engage students in a big way. Multiple Choice Questions, Sharing of Ideas, Discussion over forums, Char rooms, Weekly Assignments, Weekly Test, and group Discussions over social networking website keeps learners highly engaged. This enhance the time learners devotes to learning the subject of interest. Self Pacing: Learning at own convenience is a boon to certain type of learners. Since the majority of content is digitalized. It can be stopped and re-run at any time when learner wishes to join back. Unlike normal classroom session, when you miss a session, you miss it forever, this mode of self pacing is an important facet of MOOCs Courses. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 122 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Challenges for MOOCs Higher Education in India is surrounded by multiple challenges like gross enrollment ratio, higher number of students compared to number of universities and colleges, falling expenditure on education compared to GDP etc. Quality Content and Quality Assurance Quality of content hosted on MOOCs hosted is critical for this model of education to be successful. A full proof system needs to be incorporated to decided what should be hosted and what should not be. Production Infrastructure Capacities There is adversity of good infrastructure facilities for developing high quality MOOCs. UGC have developed a capacity through Consortium for Educational Communication with 21 Centres named Educational Multimedia Research Centres (EMMRC) in different geographic locations in India. However, there is a huge need to develop such production houses used for developing MOOCs in each university in India which will scale up the initiative. Internet Access: Though India has become one of biggest data using country. Various parts of countries either don‘s have internet access or stable internet facilities to access the MOOCs content. This challenges needs to be addressed by multiple authorities with speed and scale. Training for Teachers Teachers are backbone of education system. MOOCs being in nascent stage, there is pressing need to conduct training/workshop sessions for trainers to understand the concept and process of development of MOOCs courses. Training should be integral part of MOOCs agenda. Resistance of Change Resistance to Change is noticeable by various stakeholders for MOOCs which needs to be addressed with proper communication lines ensuring there is no loss to any of the stakeholders. Each Genuine Resistance needs in- depth analysis and proper resolution. Many Education institutions are yet to accept and alter their by-laws to consider credits earned via MOOCs mode. This issues needs to address on priority basis. Revenue Model There is no harm in earning Profit; however MOOCs should not be looked as Revenue Earning Model by universities in India to start with. Many Private MOOCs Providers have started charging fees or accessing the content also. CONCLUSION MOOC platforms are being used globally for offering online course and India is no exception. There are various MOOC platforms that are being used in India for offering the courses, such as, NPTEL, mooKIT, IITBX, and SWAYAM. Except the NPTEL, these are the new platforms having history of hardly 4 to 5 years, while SWAYAM is launched very recently. Therefore, to set up a ground for understanding including theoretical as well as technical aspects, a discussion is provided about each of these platforms with their features. Also, while using these platforms it is needed to understand their current state, popularity among learners, use of social media for referring, searched etc, and several other parameters or features. With tremendous challenges to cater to Education System is under process of reforms. MOOCs (Massive Open Online Courses) are welcome step which comes with immense benefits to various stakeholders of Indian Education System. Analyzing the output in such short duration of time may not be feasible since MOOCs is in its nascent stage. However with support of Government of India, MHRD, UGC and other bodies surely it will revoluntize the present education system making education borderless and our classrooms global. REFERENCE 1. Bull. D. (2012). From ripple to tsunami: The possible impact of MOOCs on higher education, DE Quarterly 2012 Spring, 10-11. 2. Cabiria, J. (2012). Connectivist learning environments: Massive open online courses. The 2012 World Congress in Computer Science Computer Engineering and Applied Computing, Las Vagas, July 16-19, 2012. Retrieved from http://elrond.informatik, tu-freiberg.de/papers/WorldComp2012/EEE6065.pdf. 3. Koutropoulos,A. and Hogue,R.J.(2012). How to succeed in a MOOC-Massive online open course. eLearning Gild, October 08, 2012. Retrieved from http://www.cedmaeurope.org/newsletter% 20articles/eLearning%20Guild/How%20 to %20Succeed%20in%20a%20MOOC%20%20Massive%20Online%20Open%Course%20(Oct%2012).pdf 4. Masters, K.(2011). A brief guide to understanding MOOCs. The Internet Journal of Medical Education, 1(2). 5. Milligan, C., Margaryan, A. and Littlejohn, A. (2013). Patterns of engagement in massive open online courses Journal of Online Learning with Technology (Special Issue on MOOCs) – Under Review. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 123 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology AN ANALYSIS OF THE FOREX MARKET IN TIRUPUR Dr.S.SAIKRISHNAN ASSISTANT PROFESSOR M.Com.,MCS.,MBA.,BLIS.,B.Ed.,PGDCA.,MA(Edu).,M.Phil.,Ph.D DEPARTMENT OF CORPORATE SECRETARYSHIP PSG COLLEGE OF ARTS AND SCIENCE COIMBATORE-14 [email protected] +91 9994649840 ABSTRACT The project entitled ―Analysis of the Forex market in Tirupur‖ was undertaken to increase the market share for derivative products of ICICI in Tirupur. ICICI bank is a leader in retail assets products. They are entering in to trade finance, export finance and corporate lending to SME (Small and Medium Enterprises). They wish to explore the market potential for derivative products in Tirupur. KEYWORDS: Analysis, Forex Market, Bank, Export. INTRODUCTION AND COMPANY OVERVIEW ICICI Bank is a commercial bank operating about 614 branches and more than 2000 ATMs across India. Its commercial banking operations are divided into corporate and retail. ICICI Bank was founded in 1955 and is headquartered in Mumbai, India. Corporate banking provides lending and deposit services to business customers, while retail banking offers deposit accounts, loans, and credit cards to individuals. Investment banking includes treasury operations and handles the bank's investment portfolio. ICICI, which is India's #2 banks after State Bank of India, offers Internet banking services, online bill pay, and debit cards. Its life and other insurance products are offered through joint ventures with Prudential and Lombard Canada. OBJECTIVES To analyze the total demand for Forex derivative products for the exporters in Tirupur. To do customer satisfaction survey regarding Forex services provided by all the banks in Tirupur. METHODOLOGY A research design is the arrangement of condition for collection and analysis of data in a manner, which may result in an economy in procedure. It stands for planning for collection of relevant data and the techniques to be used in analysis, keeping in view the objectives of the research and availability of time. ANALYSIS TYPE OF CONSTITUTION OF EXPORTERS CONSTITUTION RESPONDENTS PERCENTAGE SOLE 35 35% PROPRIETOR PARTNERSHIP 56 56% PVT LTD 8 8% PUBLIC LTD 1 1% TOTAL 100 100% ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 124 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology INTERPRETATION From the study it is seen that 56% of the companies are partnership companies, 35% of companies are sole proprietorship companies, 8% of the companies are private ltd companies and 1% of companies are public ltd companies. EXPORTERS PRESENCE IN DOMESTIC MARKET BUSINESS RESPONDENTS PERCENTAGE EXPORT 87 87% EXPORT & 13 13% DOMESTIC TOTAL 100 100% INTERPRETATION From the study it is found that 87% of respondent doing exclusively export business and 13% of respondents are doing both export and domestic business. EXPORT DESTINATIONS COUNTRIES RESPONDENTS PERCENTAGE EXPORTED 1 COUNTRY 23 23% 2 COUNTRIES 50 50% 3 COUNTRIES 24 24% MORE THAN 3 3% 3 COUNTRIES TOTAL 100 100% INTERPRETATION From the study it seen that majority (50%) of exporters, export their product to two countries, 24% of exporters, export to three countries, 23% of respondent export to one country and 3% of exporters export to more than three countries ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 125 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology DIFFERENT CURRENCIES USED IN EXPORTS EXPORT RESPONDENTS PERCENTAGE BUSINESS USD 57 57% EURO 36 36% YEN 1 1% OTHERS 6 6% TOTAL 100 100% INTERPRETATION From the study it is found that majority (57%) of business is done in usd, 36% of business is in euro and 7% of business is in other currencies in tirupur export market. SATISFACTION WITH RATES CHARGED BY BANKS SATISFACTION RESPONDENTS PERCENTAGE OF RATES YES 89 89% NO 11 11% TOTAL 100 100% INTERPRETATION From the study it is found that majority (89%) of the exporters is satisfied with the bank rates and 11% of exporters are not satisfied with bank rates. FINDINGS In Tirupur export market 56% of the companies are partnership companies, 35% of companies are sole proprietorship companies, 8% of the companies are private Ltd companies and 1% of companies are Public Ltd companies. The study found out Partnership firms is performed well and has high turnover form the beginning and sole proprietorship firms are in the next position. The study found out 87% of respondents doing exclusively export business and 13% of respondents are doing both export and domestic business. The study found out 50% of exporters, export their product to two countries, 24% of exporters, export to three countries, 23% of respondent export to one country and 3% of exporters export to more than three countries The study found out 57% of business is done in USD, 36% of business is in EURO and 7% of business is in other currencies in Tirupur export market RECOMMENDATIONS FOR EXPORTERS Only 3% of exporters are using option and 4% of exporters are using future. Also 61% of exporters think that the use of derivatives is risky. Hence the following suggestions are made ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 126 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology The profitability of exporters depends to a large extent on forex rates. Because forex rates are highly fluctuating, it is necessary that the exporters cover their risk with regard to changes in forex rates. The general level of awareness about derivative and their utility is low. Here it is suggested that the exporters must use the expertise of their banks and use the forex derivatives to minimize exchange rate risk. FOR BANKS Whereas no exporters was dissatisfied with the services of bankers, only 17% of exporters ranked the services as very good. Therefore, it is suggested that Bankers should meet & discuss with the exporters to identify areas for further improvement in services. This suggestion is necessary because of acute competition prevailing in the banking sector. CONCLUSIONS The foreign exchange market is the largest and most liquid of the financial markets. Foreign exchange rates are amongst the most important economic indices in the international monetary markets. From the study, in tirupur export market 57% of business is done in usd, 36% of business is in euro and 7% of business is in other currencies. So the exporters hedge their foreign exchange risks with the help of derivative products provided by banks. The general level of awareness about derivative and their utility is low, since only 3% of exporters are using option and 4% of exporters are using future. Also 61% of exporters think that the use of derivatives is risky. REFERENCES BOOKS 1. Beri G.C (2004),―Marketing Research‖, Third Edition, Tata McGraw Hill Publishing Company Ltd 2. Kothari C.R (2004), ―Research Methodology‖, Second Edition, New Age International Publishers. 3. Sharma D.D (2004), ―Marketing Research‖, Third Edition, Sultan Chand & Sons Publications. WEBSITES 1. www.icicibank.com ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 127 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology NAKED REALITIES IN NORMAN MAILER‘S THE NAKED AND THE DEAD Dr.MANJU KUMARI.K Assistant Professor, Department of English, Nirmala College for Women, Coimbatore, Tamilnadu, India ABSTRACT Jewish American writers either defend or reject Jewishness in their works. Norman Mailer belongs to the latter class of writers. His novels deal with varied themes pertaining to the contemporary society. The Naked and the Dead is one of his most popular novel next to The Executioner‘s Song. Written in the style of New Journalism, a form which Mailer is most popular for, The Naked and the Dead is a story narrated by an omniscient narrator. The novel is about the American Army trying to defeat the Japanese in Philippines. The novel depicts the brutalities faced by the American troop. The soldiers are naked because they are seen by their enemies and have no place to hide. They are dead too because death can knock them over anytime and anywhere. They die just like their beliefs and hopes. The paper seeks to analyze war and its naked realities as portrayed in The Naked and the Dead KEY Words: blurred genre, New Journalism, war, naked truths, troubled psyche. INTRODUCTION Fiction primarily serves two purposes- it entertains as well as equips its readers with interesting information in the most delightful manner. Hence fiction becomes a necessity in the life of a man of letters. Perhaps, that could be the reason behind Chesterton‘s views on fiction when he said ‗Literature is a luxury; fiction is a necessity.‘ Fiction is indeed a necessity in a man‘s life as it gives a complete picture of life- individuals, people, society, culture and so on. Thus fiction of a particular territory renders the history and culture it deals with.. Most of the genres in English including fiction has had its origin in England. But not even the kings and the queens of this land could curtail the spreading of Literature in English to different territories around the world. Like Caliban in The Tempest who uses his master‘s language against his superior, the countries which doted on its parent country for its survival, exploited and later superseded the use of language in its various forms in different genres of English. Though imitative of earlier English writers in its style in the earlier days, American Literature slowly yet steadily carved a niche in the Literature of today. In the present set up, American Literature has branched into several subdivisions. Jewish Literature is just one among its many fruitful branches. Jewish American Literature encompasses the writings of the Jews about their land or their people. Jewish American writings had its origin in the seventeenth century when the European Jews moved to America. Just as in other Literatures, it was poetry which first had its birth among other genres in the history of Jewish American Literature. The first notable poem is The New Colossus by Emma Lazarus. Socialism and Secularism, two predominant themes in Jewish American writings found its way in almost all the genres of Jewish American Literature in the nineteenth century. Radicalism is another hallmark of Jewish American writings. Jewish American novel had its genesis only in the twentieth century. Abraham Cahan, recognized as one of the pioneers of Jewish American novel is notable for two of his novels- The Chosen People and The Rise of David Levinsky. The twentieth century novels by Jewish Americans witnessed a division in thought. Few novelists like Cahan, Ludwig Lewisohn and Meyer Levin defended Jewishness whereas writers like Nyburg, Ornitz, Oppenheim, Yezierska and Schneider rejected religion and viewed Marxism and Pragmatism as solutions to Jewish problems. Later the focus shifted to Holocaust giving rise to Holocaust Literature. Popular among them are Cynthia Ozick, Elman, Isaac Singer, Joshua Singer and Daniel Stern. The predominant themes in Jewish American writings are Immigration, Radicalism, Secularism, Marxism and Pragmatism. However, the twenty first century saw another turn in the writings of Jewish American Literature. The writers began to shed their Jewish identity and wrote on themes pertaining to American society. Norman Kingsley Mailer is one such renowned writer of this century whose works echo the social, cultural and political issues of the contemporary world. A writer of over forty books, Norman Mailer is a writer of novels, short stories, essays, creative nonfiction and screenplays. Norman Mailer has assayed every possible narrative form. Unsatiated of being a novelist, he also turned his attention towards directing films and acting in it. A cultural icon of this century, Norman Mailer is most famous for capitalizing on a form of journalistic writing called New Journalism. This style of writing is a mélange of imaginative subjectivity of Literature and objective qualities of journalism. Though Mailer popularized this form of writing, one can never categorize Mailer under one particular stream. Anna Banks in her essay Norman Mailer says ―Perusing Norman Mailer‘s literary works is frustrating to a critic trained in the twentieth-century Western traditions of a rational empiricism whose goal is usually to categorize and quantify. Mailer, perhaps intentionally, defies categorization. Each piece of work that Mailer produces represents a clear example of what the anthropologist Clifford Geertz calls ―genre blurring.‖‖ ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 128 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Popular fiction of Mailer include The Naked and the Dead, Barbary Shore, The Deer Park, An American Dream, why are We in Vietnam?, The Executioner‘s Song, Ancient Evenings, Tough Guys Don‘t Dance, Harlot‘s Ghost, The Gospel According to the Son and The Castle in the Forest. Commenting on the theme in the works of mailer, Banks says ―The themes of literary journalists tend to be concerned with social and political issues, usually examined within the context of contemporary culture.‖ This theme is not restricted to Mailer‘s nonfiction works but it rather pervades his fiction and every genre he has written. His bestselling novel The Naked and the Dead is no exception to this theme. The Naked and the Dead is set on a south Pacific mythical island Anapopei. The novel deals with war in which the American army under the leadership of General Cummings fights against the Japanese. The novel was born as a result of Mailer‘s experiences with the 112th Regiment during Philippines Campaign in the Second World War. The novel records the lives of thirteen American soldiers positioned in the Pacific island. The parts of the novel are Wave, Argil and Mold, Plant and Phantom, Wake, Hilna, Rastlina and Brazada. These parts are interrupted by retrospective parts. The novel traces the lives of American soldiers as they rush onto the island. Their initial enthusiasm is deterred by the sapping weather in the jungle. The novel also focuses on the quest for power through characters like General Cummings and Sergeant Sam Croft. Though the Americans are victorious towards the end, the characters take no glory in the victory. War is present in every aspect of the novel. As seen earlier, the very background of the novel is a physical battle between the Americans and the Japanese. The novel brings out many scenes of battle, Army protocol as well as elaborates descriptions of the innumerable trials and sufferings of the enlisted men. It deals with the difficulties of the campaign and the danger posed by the Japanese- this is evident in the part entitled Argil and Mold when the American soldiers advance quickly during the initial days only to realize how oppressive the heat of the jungle is. Scenes of battle include an enemy fire stopping the American soldiers at a river, a Japanese bullet shattering Private Toglio‘s elbow, the skirmish-potycka with the Japanese during which Wilson gets hurt in the stomach and Hearn leading the platoon right into the enemy and thus getting killed. The physical combat encroaches into the private lives of the characters as well. An overt example is the cold war between Croft and Hearn. Each does not like the other and waits for an opportune moment to insult the other. This cold war becomes cancerous when Croft determines to kill Hearn and finally succeeds when the latter runs directly into the enemy. Even after Hearn‘s death there is no resentment for his actions in Croft. The Naked and the Dead brings out the raw realities of war between officers and regulars. A perfect example is Croft who exercises his dominance over his subordinates through his power. He humiliates Hearn by forcing him to pick the cigarette butt, orders his men to climb Mount Anaka which leads to the death of Roth, when Red refuses to climb any further, he nearly shoots Red and threatens him to proceed up the mountain. As in all wars, here too ―workers in uniform‖ work for generals who are only bent on promotion and popularity, rather than safeguarding the welfare of their men. The mind of the characters is at war with its own self. Mailer undresses the characters and reveals the bare motives hidden behind their actions. The sick atmosphere of war eats their minds as well. Virtues lose its value in the war prone island. The characters either try to devour the other or are filled with self pity as Roy Gallagher, Roth or feign insanity like Steve Minetta or seek fame for one‘s own self at the expense of others‘ happiness and life as in Croft. Thus the victimizer at one point becomes a victim at the other because of a troubled psyche. CONCLUSION War does not stop at the battlefield. It rather creates hostility between people of the same camp and also disrupts the proper functioning of one‘s own mind. It entertains and allows the beastly nature in a man to take control over him and making him a weapon of destruction of his own life. Thus war steals away peace from the lives of people involved in it. REFERENCE Banks, Anna. Norman Mailer. http://www.english.upenn.edu/~despey/mailer.html Geertz, Clifford. Local Knowledge. New York: Basic Books. 1983. -----. Works and Lives: The Anthropologist as Author. Stanford, Calif.: Stanford University Press. 1988. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 129 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology A BRIEF REVIEW OF SPEECH ENHANCEMENT TECHNIQUES AND IMPLEMENTATION OF FAST ADAPTIVE KALMAN FILTERING V.SRINIVASARAO1 & Y.ARPITHA2 1Associate Professor, ECE Department, NRI Institute of Technology, Pothavarappadu,Vijayawada. 2Associate Professor, ECE Department, NRI Institute of Technology, Pothavarappadu,Vijayawada. ABSTRACT Speech enhancement is an active research area over the past few decades. A number of speech enhancement techniques were proposed in the literature over the time, some of them are briefly reviewed in this paper. Kalman filtering is a popular speech enhancement technique in time domain. In the conventional Kalman filtering technique more number of matrix operations are involved. By using fast adaptive Kalman filtering, the complexity of these matrix operations can be reduced. This technique is simple and gives better results for stationary noises. The fast adaptive Kalman filtering is more effective in obtaining the enhanced speech signal. The performance of this technique is compared with the conventional method in terms of execution time and signal to noise ratio. KEYWORDS: Fast Adaptive Kalman Filtering, Speech Enhancement, Conventional Kalman Filtering, Time domain speech enhancement. INTRODUCTION OVERVIEW OF SPEECH ENHANCEMENT Speech enhancement is essential in modern voice communication systems. Speech communication devices like cellular phones, hands free equipment, human-to-machine speech processing systems, etc. are an integral part of our daily life. In real-life, the speech communication takes place in different noisy environments where the original clean speech could be degraded due to the presence of surrounding noises. These noises can range from stationary white noise to any non-stationary and/or colored noises such as street noise, car engine noise, babble noise, restaurant noise, etc. In many speech communication and processing systems, the desired clean speech is not available due to degradation by the ambient noises. Therefore, noise reduction in the speech signal is the current active area of research. The performance of speech enhancement algorithms is evaluated according to the quality and intelligibility of the enhanced speech signal. Generally, assessment of speech quality is done in terms of subjective and objective measures. In subjective quality measure, a listener or a group of listeners compare the original and enhanced speech and give the ranking on a predetermined scale. In objective quality measure, calculations are based on some mathematical formulae. Speech intelligibility is another quality measure which is an indication of how comprehensible a speech is in given conditions. The relationship between speech intelligibility and quality is entirely not understood, yet there exists some correlation between them. Generally, good quality speech has high intelligibility and vice versa. It is very important for a Speech enhancement algorithm to maintain good quality as well as intelligibility of the enhanced speech. Speech enhancement has been widely used as a front end tool for automatic speech recognition, telecommunications, hearing aids, etc. By improving the quality and intelligibility of the degraded speech using a Speech Enhancement method, it vastly improves the listening experience of users through these consumer applications. A brief description of speech enhancement applications is given below. APPLICATIONS OF SPEECH ENHANCEMENT Automatic Speech Recognition: Automatic Speech Recognition (ASR) has been an important field of research since the 1950s. It can recognize human spoken words or sentences, and thus has many important real-world applications including person identification, human-robot communication, etc. The key requirement of these applications is to distinguish between similar sounding words. Telecommunications: One of the important applications of speech enhancement found in telecommunication systems is specifically mobile or cellular telephony. Due to the majority of the cell phone conversations taking place in noisy environments, namely automobiles, streets or public places, noise will inevitably mix up with the speech, making the conversation disturbing for the listener. A speech enhancement algorithm plays an important role in order to remove these unwanted noises, making the public conversation through cell phones more efficient. Hearing Aids: The hearing aid devices consist of a microphone and amplifier including some DSP hardware. It is used by hearing impaired people. In adverse acoustic environments, individuals with hearing impairment may struggle to understand the speech content due to the interfering sounds, background noise, and reverberation. CATEGORIES OF SPEECH ENHANCEMENT ALGORITHMS Speech enhancement algorithms are implemented based on certain assumptions depending on different applications. In general, these algorithms are classified based on the number of input channels or microphones (single/multiple microphones), and the domain of processing (time/transform domain). The time-domain or transform ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 130 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology domain speech enhancement algorithms can also be further classified as adaptive and non-adaptive depending on parameter estimation. The main focus of this paper is to implement efficient single channel speech enhancement that can perform well in the presence of adverse environmental noises. For a single microphone speech s(n), and additive noise v(n) which may be white or colour noise, the noise corrupted speech signal y(n) at time n is then represented as follows. y(n) = s(n) + v(n) (1.1) The Speech Enhancement algorithm is to estimate the clean speech s(n) from the noisy speech y(n) . STATISTICAL PROPERTIES OF DIFFERENT ADDITIVE NOISES The primary objective of any speech enhancement algorithm is to estimate the clean speech s(n) from the noise corrupted speech y(n) through different noise reduction algorithms. However, it is a challenging task to eliminate or reduce the additive noise v(n) in the noisy observation due to the random nature of the noise and the intrinsic complexities of the clean speech s(n). In addition, different noises possess different statistical characteristics. Due to this reason, a speech enhancement algorithm may perform well for a particular type of noise, but not efficient for other types of noises. Therefore, it is important to understand the statistical characteristics of the additive noise v(n) in order to develop an efficient speech enhancement algorithm for different environmental noises. Depending on the time or frequency characteristics, the additive noise v(n) can be classified into the following categories. • White Noise: It is defined as an uncorrelated noise process with a constant power spectral density. It is a wide-band noise which theoretically contains all frequencies within the signal bandwidth. • Non-stationary Noise: In non-stationary noise, the power spectral density is not constant and changes over time. It is quite difficult to deal with this noise, since there is no prior information available about the characteristics of that noise. • Pink Noise: Pink noise is a type of noise where the power spectral density (energy or power per Hz) is inversely proportional to the frequency of the signal. Therefore, the lower frequency components in pink noise have more power than the higher frequencies. • Restaurant Noise: This type of noise contains multiple people talking in the background mixed in some cases with other noises coming from the kitchen or other utensil sounds. The spectral characteristics of restaurant noise are randomly changing as people carry on conversation to the neighbouring tables or the waiter interaction with guests during services. •Babble Noise: This type of noise is encountered when a crowd or a group of people are talking together simultaneously (i.e. in a cafeteria, crowded classroom, or other places). It has the characteristics of time varying amplitudes. In addition, some of the noise frequencies may coincide closely with the original clean speech samples. • Street Noise: The street noise includes vehicle‘s engine sound and other exhaust noise which increases with vehicle speed. The amplitude of this type of noise also changes rapidly. • Car Noise: This type of noise contains car interior and engine sound during conversation through cell phone or other communication devices. It may also include break sound, tyre sound, and other exhaust sounds. • Train Noise: Train noise contains its interior sounds, several other sounds such as the locomotive engine noise, and the wheels turning on the railroad track. It may also include horns, whistles, bells, and other noisemaking devices for both communication and warning. • Cockpit Noise: This type of noise includes plane interior sound, engine sounds, and other exhaust sounds which may take place during the radio communication between the pilot and the air-traffic controller. This type of noise spectra may vary greatly as a function of the aircraft size and type and other associated parameters. In general, speech enhancement algorithm can be thought of as an estimation problem, where an unknown signal (clean speech) is to be estimated in the presence of different types of noises, where only the noisy observation is available. Therefore, it is quite difficult for a particular speech enhancement algorithm to perform well across different types of noises. LITERATURE SURVEY TIME DOMAIN SPEECH ENHANCEMENT ALGORITHMS Time-domain linear filtering approach for single channel speech enhancement is a popular one nowadays. In this approach, the speech enhancement problem is formulated as a filter design problem. More specifically, a filter should be designed such that it can reduce the additive noise level of the noisy speech as much as possible while not introducing any noticeable distortion in the enhanced speech. Different types of linear filters can be designed in time- domain. One example of such an approach is the AR model based human speech production system. This model uses all-pole synthesis filtering techniques for estimating the LPC in noisy conditions. With the estimated LPCs, the approximated clean speech samples can be modelled. Kalman filter is also commonly used as a time domain single channel speech enhancement method. The following subsections briefly review these important time-domain speech enhancement algorithms. SPEECH ENHANCEMENT USING LPC LPC based speech enhancement algorithms can be thought of as a linear time varying system which is modelled by a digital filter with time-varying coefficients. In this type of noise reduction algorithms, the speech ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 131 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology samples are represented by 푃푡ℎ order autoregressive (AR) model, where the speech production model parameters, namely, the LPCs are estimated from the noise corrupted speech. Lim and Oppenheim introduced an LPC model based iterative scheme for enhancing the noise corrupted speech. These algorithms are based on the assumption of Gaussian excitation of the maximum a-posterior (MAP) estimator where the LPC parameters are obtained from the clean speech. However, in noisy condition, the equations for solving the MAP estimator become non-linear which is difficult to solve. An iterative procedure may be used, which only needs to find a solution of a set of linear equations for LPC parameter estimation from noisy observations. This iterative procedure is referred to as linearized MAP (LMAP). This algorithm requires an initial estimate of the LPC parameters from noisy speech and then enhances the noisy speech by an appropriate application of an optimal filter. An improvement of LPC for noise reduction is based on pitch synchronous addition method. It resolved the LPC estimation problem in noisy conditions. The idea is based on that the speech has a valid pitch period, which may hold up to 20-25 milliseconds for one utterance, and the speech is assumed to be stationary within this period. The key point of LPC based speech enhancement is that the LPCs can be estimated accurately if the clean speech is available. In noisy conditions, however, the estimation of the LPCs becomes a very difficult task. In addition, the all-pole synthesis filter may not be stable in noisy conditions, which is an important condition for accurate LPC estimation. To overcome this shortcoming, numerous methods have been proposed in the literature. SPEECH ENHANCEMENT USING SPECTRAL SUBTRACTION The earliest and most commonly used method for speech enhancement is magnitude spectral subtraction. Since speech and noise are considered to be uncorrelated, if an estimate of the noise spectrum can be obtained for a particular noisy speech frame, then an estimate of the clean speech spectrum can be calculated by subtracting the estimated noise spectrum from the noisy spectrum. The estimated clean speech spectrum is represented as follow, S(w)=Y(w) – V(w) (2.1) Where S(w) is the estimated frequency spectrum of the clean speech for a given frame, Y(w) is the noisy spectrum of the same frame, and Y(w) is the estimated noise spectrum. An estimate of the clean speech is recovered by applying the inverse discrete Fourier transformation (IDFT) to give s(n). Since the human ear is relatively insensitive to phase, the phase angle of the noisy speech can be used when reconstructing the enhanced speech using IDFT. Although the spectral subtraction based speech enhancement algorithm is relatively easier to implement, its effectiveness is heavily dependent on the accurate estimation of the additive noise spectrum of v(n) which is a difficult task. The major drawback of this method is that it leaves residual noise with annoying noticeable tonal characteristics referred to as musical noise when the estimated noise spectrum is under-subtracted from the noisy spectrum. The enhanced speech also suffers from distortion if the estimated noise spectrum is over-subtracted from the noisy spectrum. In order to address these issues, several modified spectral subtraction based algorithms have been proposed. An improved spectral subtraction for speech enhancement has been introduced that can reduce the musical noise effectively. However, this algorithm cannot resolve the speech distortion problem. Later, in spectral subtraction based speech enhancement using an adaptive spectral estimator has been used. In this algorithm, people tried to reduce the musical noise and improve the quality of the enhanced speech by increasing the accuracy of the system spectral estimator.The spectral subtraction based speech enhancement algorithms are popular for the simplicity of implementation. SPEECH ENHANCEMENT USING WIENER FILTERING Wiener filter for speech enhancement was an improvement to the spectral subtraction. In this method, a Wiener gain function G(w) is calculated first, which is then multiplied with the noisy speech spectrum for attenuating the noise frequency components more precisely, namely, S(w) = G(w)Y (w) (2.2) where G(w) is Wiener filter gain coefficient for a given frequency w which is defined as |풀 풘 |ퟐ −|푽(풘)|ퟐ G(w) = (2.3) |풀 풘 |ퟐ Here, G(w) attenuates each frequency component by a certain amount depending on the power of the noise at that frequency w. If |푉(푤)2|= 0, then G(w) = 1 and no attenuation takes place, i.e. there is no noise component at the frequency w, whereas if |푌 푤 |2 = |푌(푤)2|, then G(w) = 0 and the frequency component w is completely nulled. All other values of G(w) between 0 and 1 scale the power of the signal by an appropriate amount. Later, an iterative Wiener filter (IWF) based speech enhancement algorithm has been proposed, where the complex LPC analysis has been used instead of the conventional LPC analysis. This method can estimate the desired speech spectrum more accurately, especially at low input SNRs. However, it introduces some background noise in the enhanced speech. The next section describes Kalman filter based speech enhancement. CONVENTIONAL KALMAN FILTERING The Kalman filtering technique is one of the techniques to improve the speech quality. There are so many applications depending on the Kalman filtering algorithm. The noisy speech signals are modelled by it and represented in form of observation equation and state space equation. A standard Kalman filtering algorithm results in a very high ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 132 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology computational complexity as it needs to perform the calculations of linear prediction coding (LPC) coefficient and inverse matrix calculations. From the last few years, Kalman filtering algorithm has plenty of applications in the speech enhancement. Most of the methods need to evaluate the parameters of the auto regressive model, and perform the noise elimination by using the conventional one. In this method, the computations of inverse matrix and linear prediction coding coefficient would greatly increase the computational complexity. Even though these methods can attain a better filtering efficiency, the noise suppressed signal may destroy the quality of the speech signal depending on estimation of the AR model parameters. BLOCK DIAGRAM DESCRIPTION OF CONVENTIONAL KALMAN FILTER The figure below is the block diagram for speech enhancement using conventional Kalman filtering. Noise degraded speech information is collected through single microphone. This is applied to the speech enhancement stage. The first step of speech enhancement contains the segmentation of speech signal satisfying the stationary condition of the signal. Thus frames are extracted from the source information and each frame is now forwarded for noise suppression individually. The AR model of the noise of the acoustic environment is acquired prior to the above steps and state space formulation is done to it. The estimation process starts by giving noise estimate and present speech frame to Conventional Kalman filter to find optimum output. The parameters are updated in maximization step and again given to GKF for new estimation. This Process continues until clean speech frame is obtained for a fixed number of iterations. Finally all the frames are concatenated to obtain clean speech. State space General noisy speech Framing Noise AR signal model model kalman filter Enhanced M-step Noise speech estimate signal FIG 1 SPEECH ENHANCEMENT USING CONVENTIONAL KALMAN FILTERING DRAWBACKS OF CONVENTIONAL KALMAN FILTERING In this method, the computations of inverse matrix and linear prediction coding coefficient would greatly increase the computational complexity. Even though this method can attain a better filtering efficiency, the noise suppressed signal may destroy the quality of the speech signal depending on estimation of the AR model parameters. FAST ADAPTIVE KALMAN FILTERING A Fast Adaptive Kalman Filtering algorithm is being introduced for speech enhancement in order to eliminate the drawback of the conventional Kalman filtering. This fast adaptive filtering method will constantly upgrades the initial value of a state vector X (n), so that it reduces the time complexity and eliminates the matrix operations. Literally, it is arduous to find which kind of background noise is exactly and it will affect the applications of the Kalman filtering algorithm. That is why we require a real-time algorithm in order to estimate the surrounding noise. In order to catch the real noise, it is required to add the forgetting factor to amend the evaluation of background noise by using the observation data accordingly. In the meanwhile, it improves speech signal quality by reducing its running time. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 133 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology BLOCK DIAGRAM Framing Speech Fast Adaptive Enhanced signal Kalman speech variance Filtering signal estimation Algorithm Noisy speech signal Noise estimation FIG 2 FAST ADAPTIVE KALMAN FILTER The initial block in the block diagram is input speech signal it is the combination of both noise signal and noise free speech signal which is known as noise noisy speech signal. After extracting the signal from the source the speech signal will be divided into frames. Now the noise variance is calculated which is said to be a threshold level used to distinguish between noise frame and speech frame. At first a single frame signal to noise ratio (SNR) is compared with the threshold value of the noise signal. If Signal to Noise Ratio is less than the threshold then again noise is estimated by using Auto Regressive Model (AR) Parameters. If Signal to Noise Ratio is Greater than the threshold value then the frame is considered as the speech frame and combined with the remaining frames to estimate the speech signal. ALGORITHMIC FLOW CHART: Noisy speech signal Framing of speech signal Estimate of noise variance of speech signal and infer it Again estimate the If noise variance and 푺푵푹푰>=푺푵푹풏 NO update it. All the frames are combined to acquireYES the desired output Enhanced speech signal FIG 2: FLOW CHART OF FAST ADAPTIVE KALMAN FILTER ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 134 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology The flow chart shows that the noisy speech signal is the input and the input signal is then divided into frames. The estimation of the noise variance and signal to noise ratio calculation takes place. A condition is checked whether the obtained frame is noise frame or speech frame. In this condition the Signal to Noise Ratio of the single frame is compared to the Signal to Noise Ratio of the total speech signal. If the condition is satisfied then the current frame is treated as speech frame and frames are arranged in order to obtain the speech signal. If the condition is not satisfied then the Signal to Noise Ratio of the frame is estimated again by updating the threshold value of the variance which is an adaptive thing. The loop is continuous until the condition is satisfied and then the all frames are arranged together to obtain the enhanced speech signal. APPLICATIONS: It is used in speech recognition and also for navigation especially in modern aircrafts and satellites. It is used for Tracking and also used in image processing applications. SIMULATION RESULTS Filter SNR(dB) Time complexity Conventional Kalman Filter -0.020163 19.584806 Fast Adaptive Kalman Filter -1.178006 16.170540 TABLE: COMPARISON TABLE OF THE FILTERS CONVENTIONAL KALMAN FILTER INPUT AND OUTPUT WAVE FORMS: FIG: 5.1 WAVEFORMS OF INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNAL ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 135 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 5.2 FAST ADAPTIVE KALMAN FILTER INPUT AND OUTPUT WAVEFORMS: FIG: 5.2 WAVEFORMS OF INPUT AND OUTPUT SIGNALS ADVANTAGES AND DISADVANTAGES ADVANTAGES OF FAST ADAPTIVE KALMAN FILTER It reduces the noise content from the noisy speech signal with less number of matrix operations which in return decreases the time complexity. Even though a large number of operations are performed on the speech signal the intelligibility of the speech is not compromised. It solves the problem of echoing which arises in Adaptive Kalman Filter. DISADVANTAGE OF FAST ADAPTIVE KALMAN FILTER Even though the speech signal is enhanced in a less time compared with the conventional Kalman filter but it is still a disadvantage when compared with adaptive Kalman filter. CONCLUSION This paper presents a brief review of the existing speech enhancement techniques and also the implementation results of the speech enhancement using conventional and fast adaptive Kalman filtering techniques. The results of fast adaptive Kalman filtering are fairly effective, which are confirmed by the subjective listening tests. As the fast adaptive Kalman filtering has two state multiplications in each phase, it requires less execution time and high signal to noise ratio is obtained, when signals are corrupted by coloured noise. BIBLIOGRAPHY 1. ZHANG Xiu-zhen, FU Xu-hui, WANG Xia, ―Improved kalman filter method for speech Improvend enhancement‖, Computer Applications, Vol.28, enhancement.Computer pp.363-365,2008. 2. Naritanabe, Toshiniro Furukawa, Shigeo Ts,ujji, ―Fast noise Suppression algorithm with Kalman filter Theory‖ , Second International Symposium on Universal Communication, pp.411-415, 2008. 3. Nri Tanabe, Toshiniro Furukawa, Hideaki Matsue and Shigeo Tsujji, ―Kalman Filter for Robust Noise Suppression in White and Colored Noise‖ IEEE International SymposiumonCirciuts and Systems, 1172-1175, 2008. 4. Prabhavathi CN, Ravikumar KM, ― Acoustic noise classification and characterisation using statistical properties‖ ,IJETAE,2014. 5. Mai Q, He D, Hou Y, Huang Z, ―A fast adaptive Kalman filtering algorithm for speech enhancement‖. In: IEEE International Conference on Automatic Science and Engineering Trieste, Italy, 2011. 6. P. Sorqvast, P. Handel, B. Ottersten, ―Kalman filtering for low distortion speech enhancement in mobile communication‖ in IEEE International Conference on Acoustics, Speech, and Signal Processing, 1997. 7. Upadhyay N and Abhijit K,‖Speech enhancement using spectral subtraction type algorithms:AA comparison and simulation study‖ Procedia computer science, 2015. 8. Luying S, Xiongwei Z,Jianjun H, Bin Z,‖ An improved spectral subtraction speech enhancement algorithm under non stationary noise‖ International conference on Wireless Communications and Signal Processing (WCSP), 2011. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 136 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology STUDY ON MIGRATORY BIRDS IN WINTER SEASON OF NANDURMADHMESHWAR BIRD SANCTUARY, DISTRICT NASHIK, MAHARASHTRA GADEKAR VIPUL SANJAY & KHAIRNAR SHRIKANT SANJAYRAO Department of Environment Science, K.T.H.M. College Nashik-422001, Maharashtra MACS-Agharkar Research Institute, Pune-411001, Maharashtra Email: [email protected] ABSTRACT Nandurmadhmeshwar Bird Sanctuary is one of the most important conservation areas of Central India. It is located in Nashik District of Maharashtra state. The present study revealed that the whole area of Nandurmadhmeshwar was studied under Department of Environment Science, K.T.H.M. College Nashik during 2016 to 2017 and observed to know all the aspects which are related to Environmental factors as well as the Nandurmadhmeshwar as the Bird Sanctuary. The physico-chemical parameters of Environment that is Water, Soil and Noise were tested among which Water and Soil parameters were found to be within permissible limit but Noise level is above the limit which harms the birds flying area and also effects the Migratory Birds. The Migratory and local birds were observed among which it was found that the number of migratory birds is reduced and the local birds are also affected due to few human activity. When all the aspects of Nandurmadhmeshwar was studied it was found that more that direct Environment factors the human behavior affect mostly to the birds. KEYWORDS: Migratory, Nandurmadhmeshwar, Environment, Birds, Bird Sanctuary. INTRODUCTION Nandurmadhmeshwar wetland, located on the confluence of Godavari and Kadava Rivers in Nasik district of Maharashtra (India). The geographical location and huge siltation have transferred this man made reservoir into a good wetland habitat. The water level is always fluctuating in Nandurmadhameshwar lake. The water released from Gangapur and Darana water reservoirs is stored at Nandurmadhameshwar and subsequently released from here through canals for irrigation. Silts and organic matter that are carried away with water flow are accumulated in the lake, due to which island and shallow water ponds have been created. This result in the biological enriched conditions by which aquatic vegetation has been stabilised. Thus the site has turned in too good wetland habitat aptly described as ―Bharatpur of Maharashtra‖. The renowned ornithologist, Late Dr. Salim Ali visited the Nandurmadhmeshwar wetland on March 6, 1983 and expressed his opinion about its potential to become ‗Bharatpur of Maharashtra‘. At the Nandurmadhmeshwar wetland, many bird species have seen in number much above their 1% threshold level determined by the Wetland International (2006). Naik et al. (2012) studied the various animal communities along the River Godavari.They reported 70 species of birds belonging to 37 families and 14 orders. Maximum number Of birds were found in order Passeriformes (19 species) followed by order Charadriiformes (13 species). [4] Yardi et al. (2008) studied the avifauna of the Jaikwadi Sanctu Ary, which is formed after the construction of dam in 1975 on the River Godavari. He recorded that the sanctuary is rich in bird fauna which includes winter migrants, summer migrants and passage migrants. A total of 64 residential and 24 non-residential species were reported by them. They Reported that the shore water covered with weeds provides habitat for bird species like Pheasant-tailed Jacana, Egrets, Herons and Purple moorhen; shallow clear water provides Habitat for species like Northern Pintail, Gadwall, Northern Shoveller, Brahminy Duck and Spot-billed Duck; deep water supports Common Coot, Common Pochard, Tufted Pochard And Red crested Pochard and rocky lands act as habitat for species like Cormorants and Raptor birds. [4] Abdulali and Mathew (1962) recorded the birds of the districts of west Godavari river; Ball (1877) reported the avian diversity observed along the regions between river Mahanadi and river Godavari.; Kulkarni et al.(2011) reported 151 species of birds from the banks of river Godavari [4]. Nandurmadhmeshwar being an important bird area, it is necessary to monitor the diversity of migratory birds to predict the health of the ecosystem. The present study was found that the number of migratory birds is reduced and the local birds are also affected due to few human activity. When all the aspects of Nandurmadhmeshwar was studied it was found that more that direct Environment factors the human behavior affect mostly to the birds. MATERIAL AND METHOD Nandurmadhmeshwar Bird Sanctuary (20o5‘0‖N, 74o7‘0‖E) is located at Niphad Tehsil of Nashik district. Area of Nandurmadhmeshwar Spreads over an area of nearly 10,000 hectares of land, the sanctuary comprising of evergreen forest and trees at the confluence of the Godavari and Kadwa rivers is a home to many endangered species of birds. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 137 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Map of Nandurmadhmeshwar: Map of Location Studied the physico-chemical parameters of water: PH, Electrical Conductivity, Total Alkalinity, Hardness, Dissolved oxygen, COD, BOD, Suspended solids, Chloride, Total coliform, Fecal coliform. The physico- chemical parameters of soil: pH, EC, Water Holding Capacity, Available Nitrogen, Available Phosphorous, Available Potassium, Organic Carbon. The determination of Noise: The Noise of few area is determine by using db meter. This study was carried out during the period 2016 to 2017. Most of the migratory birds were identified on sight, whereas, some birds which could not be identified in that manner were studied with help of review of literature and identified through websites as well as other secondary sources. Wherever possible, the migratory birds of Nandurmadhameshwar were photographed for verification and authentication. RESULT AND DISCUSSIION Nandurmadhmeshwar Bird Sanctuary There are total four towers in Nandurmadhmeshwar sitting on which you can observe the birds. You can take overview of the back water of this dam & observe the birds. You can even observe lots of forest birds and wetland birds. (Note: While observing birds you have to cross some farms at that time you should take care of crop‘s. Please do not harm these valuable plants.). In the season of migration the forest dept. provides a tent free of cost if you are planning for a night stay. Gangaram & Amol are local well trained birdwatchers by Forest Department who provides proper information about the area and as well as about migratory birds. These was the click when I and my friend Pankaj visited Nandurmadhmeshwar at 6th November 2016. We reached there at 5 am. On 6th Nov. we observed 15-20 species of birds. The lake was full of ducks (approx. 200) at 8 am. We observed local as well as migratory birds like Ruddy-shell ducks. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 138 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Migratory Birds Observed during November, December and January. 1. Ruddy-shell duck Ruddy-shell duck is mainly a migratory bird, but it is still common across much of its Asian range.Native place of Ruddy shell duck is Netherland, Africa, China and America. [6] After that we went on next tower from where we observe the flock of another migratory bird ‗White stork‘ (approx. More than 20). I took some clicks this is one of them. 2.White stork It is a large, stately bird and a medium-sized crane. Its native place and breeding place is wetlands in northern parts of Europe and Asia. We saw many other birds like common duck, Vulters, Parrots, Water hens,etc. After this we decided to visit Nandurmadhmeshwar again for more Information about migratory birds. [6] 3. The Common pochard: Common pochard is a medium-sized diving duck. The adult male has a long dark bill with a grey band, a red head and neck, a grey back. The adult female has a brown head and body and a narrower grey bill- band. Their breeding habitat consists of marshes and lakes. Pochards breed in much of temperate and Northern Europe into Asia. They are migratory, from native placeses like Afghanistan; Bangladesh; Bhutan; China; India; Denmark; Egypt; etc and spend winter in the south and west of Europe. Large numbers stay overwinter in Great Britain, after that birds comes back from Russia. [2] ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 139 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Vagrant:Burkina Faso; Canada; Cape Verde; Chad; Congo; Faroe Islands; Ghana; Kenya; Liberia; Niger; Sri Lanka; United States (Georgia - Native); Western Sahara 4.The Painted stork: Painted stork is a large wader(long legged) in the stork family. It is found in the wetlands of the plains of tropical Asia south of the Himalayas in the Indian Subcontinent and extending into Southeast Asia. They immerse their half open beaks in water and sweep them from side to side and snap up their prey of small fish that are sensed by touch. Like all storks, they fly with their neck outstretched. They often make use of the late morning in search of food. Like other storks they are mostly silent. The painted stork is widely distributed over the plains of Asia. They are found south of the Himalayan ranges and are bounded on the west by the Indus River system where they are rare and extend Eastwards into Southeast Asia. Native place is France; Egypt; Germany; Greece; Russia; etc. They are resident in most regions but make seasonal movements. [5] 5.Eurasian Curlew:The Eurasian curlew, also known as the common crane. A medium-sized species, it is 100–130 cm. The body weight can range from 3 to 6.1 kg. It is the only crane commonly found in Europe. Flock of common cranes (Grus grus) flying over during their winter migration. This species is found in the northern parts of Europe and Asia. The common crane is an uncommon breeder in southern Europe, smaller numbers breeding in Greece, Denmark and Germany. Larger breeding populations can found in Finland and Sweden. The heart of the breeding population for the species is in Russia. The species is a long distance Migrant mainly wintering in Northern Africa. Spring migration is in March through May. Native place of Common Cranes is Iceland; India; Iran, Italy; Japan; Korea, Libya; Myanmar; Nepal; Netherlands; etc. Migrating flocks fly in a "V" formation. [7] 6.Great egret:The great egret, also known as the common egret, large egret. Is a large, widely distributed egret, with four subspecies found in Asia, Africa, the Americas, and southern Europe. Distributed across most of the tropical and warmer temperate regions of the world. It builds tree nests in colonies close to water. Mostly breeds in areas like Nigeria; Bangladesh; Norway; Pakistan;Poland;etc.This species can measure 80 to 104 cm in length. It has a slow flight, with its neck retracted. The great egret walks with its neck extended and wings held close. [6] ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 140 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 7.Little Cormorant: The little cormorant is a member of the cormorant family of seabirds. Slightly smaller than the Indian cormorant. It is widely distributed across the Indian Subcontinent and extends east. The little cormorant is about 50 cm long and only slightly smaller than the Indian cormorant . The little cormorant is found across India, Sri Lanka, Bangladesh and lowland Nepal. It is also found in parts of Thailand and Indonesia. It is not found in the Himalayas, but have been seen in Ladakh. It inhabits wetlands, ranging from small village ponds to large lakes. The breeding season of the little cormorant is between July to September in Pakistan and northern India and November to February in southern India. [6] 8.White Ibis: The white ibis is a species of bird in the ibis family. This particular ibis is a medium-sized bird with an overall white plumage, bright black down-curved bill and long legs, and black wing tips that are usually only visible in flight. Males are larger and have longer bills than females. It is also found along the northwestern South American coastline in Colombia. Their diet consists primarily of small aquatic prey, such as insects and small fishes. Its main behavior is probing with its beak at the bottom of shallow water to feel for and capture its prey. [6] 9.Common stonechat: Also known as White-tailed stonechat.Common stonechats are resident in suitable marshy habitats across plains in Pakistan, Nepal, Bangladesh, North and Central and Eastern parts of India till South Assam Hills & Manipur. They prefer grasslands and marshy areas with tall grass, reeds and tamarisk. They also undertake local movements, based on water availability and possibly for breeding. [3] ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 141 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 10.The Ggreater Spotted Eagle: Greatter spotted eagle (Clanga clanga), just called the spotted eagle, is a large bird of prey. The eagle is 59–71 cm in length. Typical body mass is 1.6–2.5 kg. Big female weighing up to 3.2 kg. This medium-sized eagle is very similar in general appearance to its closest relative the lesser spotted eagle. The population is entirely migratory. It breeds from Northern Europe and winters in South-eastern Europe, North-eastern Africa, the Middle East and the Indian Subcontinent. An adult Greater spotted was tagged with a satellite transponder in 1993 in order to track migration. The tagged eagle migrated a total of 5,526 km from wintering grounds to its breeding grounds in western Siberia. It moved 150 km on average each day. [6] PHYSICO-CHEMICAL PARAMETERS: 1. WATER TESTING TABLE: Parameters Water Sample Tower-1 Water Sample Tower-2 1.Ph 7.52 7.98 2.Electrical Conductivity 0.60 0.90 3.Total Alkalinity 56.00 60.00 4.Hardness 162.00 204.00 5.Dissolved Oxygen 5.72 5.21 6.COD 20.00 28.00 7.BOD 6.20 8.40 8.Suspended Solids 24.00 39.00 9.Chloride 53.50 67.50 10.Fecal Coliform 2.00 2.60 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 142 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology When the water parameters are tested from 2 different spots of Nandurmadhymeshwar were most of the birds are found. It was found that the level of all parameters were within the given permissible limit of surface water. The important parameter of nandurmadhymeshwar in the water availability in the region. There is presence of dam through which water is provided to nearby area thus it was noticed that care is taken as Nandurmadhymeshwar is a ―BIRD SANCTURY‖. [1, 8, 10,] 2. SOIL TESTING TABLE: November December January Site- 1 2 3 1 2 3 1 2 3 Parameters 1.Ph 7.92 7.91 7.83 7.90 7.90 7.86 7.92 7.88 7.81 2.Electrical Conductivity (dS/m) 0.33 0.42 0.45 0.31 0.34 0.36 0.37 0.36 0.38 3.Organic Carbon (%) 0.72 0.71 0.65 0.69 0.66 0.59 0.61 0.61 0.59 4.Nitrogen (Kg/ha) 225 285 302 251 251 391 245 259 241 5.Phosphate (Kg/ha) 119 121 133 113 125 130 120 129 135 6.Potassium (Kg/ha) 21 30 45 29 36 49 29 46 30 The Soil of Nandurmadhymeshwar area is tested from 3 sites which are nearby the village area to study the contamination content near to the village. It was found that due to maintained distance in village locality and the Sanctuary area the important nutrient required for the plant growth are found to be in medium limit. [9] 3. NOISE TESTING TABLE: READINGS ARE IN DB. Site November December January 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 1.Dam Site. 62 64 64 60 60 64 62 63 60 63 60 65 2.Bird Watching Site. 50 57 54 58 53 51 50 59 52 50 56 58 3.Near By Farm. 59 62 65 60 64 52 60 62 56 65 64 60 4.Road Side Site. 64 60 63 64 60 59 63 65 59 60 64 65 5.Near By Village. 52 56 50 52 54 52 51 59 53 57 54 61 As the noise pollution effects the birds movement and also sometimes changes their residence area also. Thus when noise level were measured it was found that due to few human disturbances made by the farmers doing agricultural practices disturbs the movement of the birds in the area. It was noticed that the dam site had high sound level due to noise of flow of water and the road site area which had continues noise of vehicles. And few areas of farm side sometimes makes noise due to use of harvester and water lifting pumps. [11] FACTORS AFFECTING BIRD MIGRATION Few factors were noticed which effect the migration of birds. 1. Excesive Rain:The number and species of migratory birds at Nandur Madhyameshwar bird sanctuary has shown a decline as compared with the presence of the feathered friends at the same time last year. Bird watchers claimed that the decline so far is due to excessive rains. 2. Change In Weather: The main factor that influences migration of birds is weather. Increase in Tempareture, Sudden change in climate can affect Bird Migration. Migratory birds do not have the ability to adjust to severe weather changes in their habitat. 3. Food Source: Another factor that influences migration of birds is food source. Though it may be their natural habitat, change of weather will be difficult for them to survive. They will find abundance of the food supply in the place they migrate to. 4. Field Fire: Another and Most important factor is as nandurmadhmeshwar is an sugarcane growing region, the fields are clean by burning the residue after harvesting of sugarcane.This fire creates problem in Bird Migration. Article: A fire at the Nandurmadhmeshwar Bird Sanctuary has brought to fore the need for better awareness among villagers and the lack of seriousness on part of the forest department. The fire broke out on the afternoon of Sunday, March 27, 2016 at the Nandurmadhmeshwar Bird Sanctuary. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 143 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology The source said that fire lit by a farmer near the sanctuary to clear his own field. However, the migration season was over in February. While the fire has engulfed about eight hectres of the habitat, the birds are safe. ―Also this is not a nesting season. It will begin from June – July and till that time, with the rains, the grass will grow again. On Tuesday after the fuming fire was completely extinguished the villagers and the Forest Officials held a meeting. ―We have increased security around the sanctuary. We have also decided to create more awareness around the adjoining villages so that such instances do not occur again,‖ said Forest Officials. 5.Use of Genrators And Water Pumps: Use of generators and water pumps for irrigation and light purposes from near by farms also disturbs Birds. 6.Near By Road: The road which connects Niphad (a Taluka place) and Bird Sanctuary, loud horns of vehicle passing by has also considerable disturbance on Birds. 7.Near By Village: Various noise disturbance from near by villages can disturb Birds. Villages consist of small scale break production and some other disturbing divices which shows impact on Bird migration. CONCLUSION The whole area of Nandurmadhmeshwar was studied and observed to know all the aspects which are related to Environmental factors as well as the Nandurmadhmeshwar as the Bird Sanctuary. The physico-chemical parameters of Environment that is Water, Soil and Noise were tested among which Water and Soil parameters were found to be within permissible limit but Noise level is above the limit which harms the birds flying area and also effects the Migratory Birds. The Migratory and local birds were observed among which it was found that the number of migratory birds is reduced and the local birds are also affected due to few human activity. When all the aspects of Nandurmadhmeshwar was studied it was found that more that direct Environment factors the human behavior affect mostly to the birds. REFERENCES 1. APHA (1998) Standards methods for the examination of water and wastewater, 20th Edition American Public Health Association Washington D.C. 2. For study of Common pochard Bird Life International (2015). "Aythya ferina". IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. IUCN. 2015: e.T22680358A82571892. Retrieved 16 January 2016. 3. For study of Common Stone-chat -IOC World Bird List and references cited there in Urquhart,& Bowley, A. (2002): Stonechats. A Guide to the Genus Saxicola. Christopher Helm, London. ISBN 0-7136-6024-4. http://shodhganga.inflibnet.ac.in/bitstream 4. For study of Painted stock BirdLife International (2012). "Mycteria leucocephala". IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. IUCN. 2012: e.T22697658A37857363. 5. Rasmussen, PC & JC Anderton (2005). Birds of South Asia: The Ripley Guide. Volume 2. Smithsonian Institution & Lynx Edicions. 6. For study of Eurasian curlew Bird Life International (2012). "Numenius arquata". IUCN Red List of Threatened Species. Version 2013.2. International Union for Conservation of Nature. Retrieved 26 November 2013. 7. Christova-Boal D, Eden RE, Mcfarlane S. An investigation into greywater reuse for urban residential properties. Desalination 1996;106:391–7. 8. De Clercka F, Singera MJ, Lindertb P. A 60-year history of California soil quality usingpaired samples. Geoderma 2003;114:215–30. 9. Garland JL, Levine LH, Yorio NC, Adams JL, Cool KL. Greywater processing in recirculation hydroponic systems: phytotoxicity, surfactant degradation and bacterialdynamics. Water Research 2000;34:3075–86. 10. ISO-1996.Description, measurement and assessment of Environmental noise, Part2: Determination of environmental noise levels. International organization for standardization;Swizerland:2007. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 144 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology LEARNING APPROACH THROUGH FLIPPED MODE SUPPORT MECHANISM- AN ANALYSIS Dr. T.RAVICHANDRAN Assistant Professor of Biological Science Government College of Education Pudukkottai -622001. ABSTRACT Modern teaching learning methods have drastically changed, after the invention of different technologies. Teacher centered and autocratic way of teaching has been evolved as student centered approach of learning. This is because the technology linked gadgets offer more freedom and flexibility in curriculum transaction. On such method of teaching learning process in the twenty-first century classroom is flipped classroom. In this approach technology as well as teachers have equal share in imparting knowledge. The only difference is the inverted way of transaction of contents. Flipped classroom approach is expressed as ―what is done at school done at home, homework done at home completed in class‖. The flipped classroom is a new pedagogical method, which employs asynchronous video lectures and practice problems as homework, and active, group-based problem solving activities in the classroom. In this respect it is a very active and interesting way of learning inside the classroom as well as outside. This paper analyses the approaches of flipped learning, different types, advantages and challenges of flipped learning. KEY WORDS: Flipped classroom, constructivism, flexible environment, traditional flip, mastery flip INTRODUCTION Flipped classroom is an appropriate and timely learning pattern of the latest 21st century learning style. Flipped classroom is also a student-centered method that emphasizes the use of technology in teaching and learning process. The flipped-classroom intends to engage students more effectively by inverting what traditionally has been followed in a classroom. In this new setting, content is delivered outside of the classroom and employs in-class time on more student-centered activities. The flipped-classroom model, introduced by high-school chemistry teachers Jonathan Bergmann and Aaron Sams, is a relatively new instruction methodology (Tucker, B.2012).The main aim of this new learning approach is to provide preparation of student for the subject before the course (Bristol, 2014) and during course applying activities that increase the quality of face to face education (Formica et al., 2010). FLIPPED CLASSROOM APPROACH There are many definitions regarding flipped classroom in literature. According to Bishop and Verleger (2013) flipped classroom is a student-centred learning method consisting of two parts with interactive learning activities during lesson and individual teaching bases directly on computer out of lesson. Mull (2012) defined it as a model that provides students prepare themselves for the lesson by watching videos, listening podcasts and reading articles. Flipped classroom approach is expressed as ―what is done at school done at home, homework done at home completed in class‖ (Sams & Bergmann, 2014). In this approach before the course the students watch theoretical part of lesson via multiple equipments such as online videos, presentations, learning management systems and take notes, prepare questions about the parts that they do not understand (Kim, Kim, Khera, & Getman, 2014). During course they achieve supporting activities such as finding answers together to the questions they prepared before lesson, group working, problem solving, discussion and making an inference (Formica & et al, 2010). Flipped classroom is an approach that transfers learning responsibility from teacher to the student (Bergmann, Overmyer & Wilie 2011). Flipped classroom approach has four different elements. It is expressed that in order to teachers achieve this approach; they have to take this four element into consideration (FLN 2014). The properties of this approach which its English correspondence is ―Flip‖ are explained like this by referring first letters: F- Flexible Environment: It indicates provision of time and place flexibility of learning. L- Learning Culture: In traditional teacher centered approach the source of knowledge is teacher. In flipped classroom approach there is transition from teacher centered approach to student centered approach. I- Intentional Content: Flipped classroom educators both think about how education is used to provide fluency and how they can develop cognitive understanding of students. P- Professional Educator: The responsibility of flipped classroom educators is more than the ones using traditional approach. Flipped classroom educators continuously observe students during the course, evaluate their studies and make feedbacks (Flipped Learning Network -FLN, 2014) ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 145 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology MODES OF FLIPPED LEARNING The flipped classroom is a new pedagogical method, which employs asynchronous video lectures and practice problems as homework, and active, group-based problem solving activities in the classroom. It represents a unique combination of learning theories once thought to be incompatible- active, problem-based learning activities founded upon a constructivist ideology and instructional lectures derived from direct instruction method founded upon behaviorist principles. According to Yıldırım and Kıray (2016), flipped classroom model provides an environment which include Project based or real world practices for learners in order to learn the subject better at class time. Moreover, the learners watch course videos, listen to podcasts, reach e-books and meet peers online instead of getting information from teacher only at class time as they can reach sources whenever they need. Individualized and differentiated learning is enabled by integrating direct instruction and constructivist learning pedagogies. Learning is not limited within the classroom; students develop with an appropriate pace and direct their efforts to the points that they personally need. Students are expected to take the responsibility of their own learning. The teacher‘s role changes from the authority who organizes class time to a guide who provides asynchronous learning resources in case of need and effective Flipped classrooms share some common points: (1) students turn into active learners rather than passive listeners, (2) generally, technology enables putting less effort, (3) in class time and traditional homework time change place and in-class time becomes more flexible in order to provide individualized learning, (4) the content includes real life scenarios and (5) in-class time is used either for enabling students to understand difficult concepts or making them participate in high-level critical thinking and problem solving activities (as cited in Boyraz & Ocak, 2017). Pedagogy in the flipped classroom model shifted from traditional teacher centered lessons about what and how one was to teach students to how students will learn the content and methods in this course. This was a fundamental shift and took some real thought and research on the part of the instructor. There are numerous pedagogical strategies that facilitate active learning in online environments (Tunks, 2012). Some effective pedagogies include technologies like Padlet, Voicethread, Bubblus, and Bitstrips where students utilize higher level thinking skills to apply and synthesize course content in a visual product. Even more student-centered and active online learning is now available in simulations and games. By maintaining systems of achievement, rewarding detail-oriented tasks and providing highly evolved character development systems, the gamification of any content ―increases visibility and an awareness of the intricate. These flexible, digital systems promote the crafting and curating of incredibly complex processes, awarding reflection, analysis, metacognition, and social --yet self-directed --revision of thinking and behavior‖ (Heick, 2011). With carefully selected online pedagogies, students were challenged, engaged, and informed. The design of the online materials was also critical in the success of the ―flipped‖ model. In a traditional delivery system instructors have the luxury of elaborating and explaining any curriculum ambiguities. Students can ask questions and get ―just in time‖ teaching in each class meeting. In the online environment, students will feel isolated and frustrated with any ambiguities and can ―turn off‖ if questions go unanswered for too long. Online tasks need to provide the same quality curriculum as their traditional counterparts but must utilize different methods, strategies, and materials to do so. THE ROLE OF TEACHER The most important factor in flipped classroom approach is the role of teacher (Bergmann & Sams, 2012). The roles of flipped classroom educators are presented below; Creating learning condition based on questioning (Bergmann & Sams, 2012) Instead of transferring knowledge directly, being a guide to make learning easy (Johnson & Renner, 2012) Making one to one interaction with students (Cohen & Brugar, 2013) Correcting misunderstandings (Bergmann & Sams, 2012) Individualizing learning for each student (Schmidt & Ralph, 2014) Using technological equipments suitable for learning condition (Fulton, 2012) Creating interactive discussion conditions (Millard, 2012) Increasing participation of students (Millard, 2012) Sharing lecture videos as out of class activity (Bishop &Verleger, 2013) Providing feedback by using pedagogical strategies (Nolan &Washington, 2013 ADVANTAGES OF FLIPPED CLASSROOM The flipped classroom model is very flexible and can be differentiated to meet the varied needs of both students and instructor. Successfully flipped classrooms integrate a variety of pedagogies both new and old. Many of those ―best practices‖ from research verified sources can and should be used in the flipped classroom to promote higher level thinking skills, collaboration, and communication skills. 1 More one-to-one time between teacher and student: A flipped classroom dramatically increases the amount of time you have to spend with each student. 2 More collaboration time for students: A flipped classroom enables students to spend more time collaborating with one another: not only a great way to learn, but also good for their team working skills. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 146 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 3 Students learn at their own pace: Because ‗knowledge acquisition‘ now takes place outside the classroom, each student can control it to match their own personal abilities and appetite. 4 It encourages students to come to class prepared : It‘s a great way to involve students in shaping the classroom sessions, and thereby nurture their sense of responsibility. 5 Practical things – like missing class due to illness – become less problematic : Because students engage with a lesson on their own time, and away from school, absence need not detract from them learning the material. 6 Subject matter content becomes infinitely richer : Previously, students were only exposed to one source of information on a topic. They can access multiple sources, and equally you can direct them towards sources from other teachers, and more. 7 Its cost-effective: Because students use their own devices to access content, there‘s no need for a school to invest in hundreds of new computers or classroom gadgets. TYPES OF FLIPPED CLASSROOM Traditional flip. Students are assigned video lectures as homework. The purpose of this homework is to introduce or preview the information that the students will need the next day. The students watch the videos and complete any corresponding work that goes with it. The next day in class, the teacher reviews any questions the students may have and introduces the learning activity for the day. Students complete during class the work that would have been traditionally assigned as homework. In all flipped classroom models, the teacher is available to facilitate discussion, guide learning, and help students problem-solve as they work through a concept. In-class flip. The in-class flip has many of the same characteristics of the traditional flip, with the exception of students needing to complete video-watching or learning activities at home. In the in-class flip, all learning activities, including the introductory lecture or activity, is done within the classroom. The classroom is set up into stations where groups of student work independently, collaboratively, or a combination of the two, to complete the project-based, critical thinking activities. Mastery flip. As identified by Bergmann and Sams (2012), the mastery flip has three main components: ―Students work either in small groups or individually at an appropriate pace. The teacher formatively assesses students and gauges student understanding. Students demonstrate mastery of objectives on summative assessments. For students who do not master a given objective, remediation is provided. CHALLENGES OF THE FLIPPED CLASSROOM The flipped classroom model is heavily dependent on technology; students must have access to a computer (or similar device) and the internet so they can watch videos at home. Ensuring access to technology is the responsibility of educators. For students who do not have access at home, schools can increase the operating hours of computer labs at school or increase access to library computers. Where possible, some schools might consider providing all students with their own personal electronic device with internet access. Likewise, teachers must have access to, and be comfortable with, technology that will allow them to record and edit videos, and then upload them to the internet so that they are accessible to students. Flipping a classroom requires considerable time and commitment on the part of the teacher. Planning, filming, and editing a quality video presentation is a time-consuming endeavor, especially for those not familiar with filming and editing technology. It takes time for teachers to become proficient with filming and editing equipment. In addition, striking the right tone and pace for a video presentation may take some experimentation. The engagement level of the videos is also critical; a lecture that is tedious in school will also be tedious on video. In addition to spending time creating videos, teachers must also re-conceptualize how they will utilize classroom time to accommodate more active learning. CONCLUSION The flipped classroom is an instructional strategy that requires a reconceptualization of the traditional approach to teaching and learning. This transition calls for a significant investment on the part of teachers and students; the time that it takes to make the videos; time to reconceptualize class time; and time for students to become accustomed to a new model of teaching and learning. And it also requires the commitment, and support, of administrators who allow teachers to try new and innovative teaching strategies. The flipped classroom provides a new methodology and modality for teaching and learning, which constitutes a role change for instructors who give up their front-of-the-class position in favor of a more cooperative and collaborative contribution to the teaching process. The roles of students have a corresponding change from passive participants to positive participation. REFERENCES 1. Bergmann, J., & Sams, A. (2014). Flipping for mastery. Educational Leadership, 71(4), 24-29. 2. Bergmann, J., Overmyer, J., & Wilie, B. (2011, July). The Flipped Class: Myths vs. Reality. Retrieved May 5, 2015 from The Daily Riff. http://www.thedailyriff.com/articles/the-flipped-class-conversation-689.php 3. Bishop, J. L., & Verleger, M. A. (2013). The Flipped Classroom: A Survey of the Research. 120th ASEE Annual Conference & Exposition. Atlanta: GA. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 147 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 4. Boyraz, S., & Ocak, G. (2017). Implementation of flipped education into Turkish EFL teaching context. Journal of Language and Linguistic Studies, 13(2), 426-439. 5. Bristol, T. J. (2014). Educate, excite, engage. Teaching and Learning in Nursing, 9, 43-46. 6. Brown, Becki A., "Understanding the Flipped Classroom: Types, Uses and Reactions to a Modern and Evolving Pedagogy" (2016).Culminating Projects in Teacher Development. 7. Flipped Learning Network (FLN) (2014). The Four Pillars of F-L-I-P™. 3/5/2015 http://flippedlearning.org//site/Default.aspx?PageID=9 8. Formica, S.P., Easley, J.L. & Spraker, M.C., (2010). Transforming common-sense beliefs into Newtonian thinking through just-in- time teaching. Phys. Educ. Res. 6, 1–7. 9. Heik, T. (2011, December 15). The gamificationof education: What school can learn from video games.Retrieved from http://www.edutopia.org/blog/gamification-education-terrell-heick 10. Kim, M. K., Kim, S. M., Khera, O., & Getman, J. (2014). The experience of three flipped classrooms in an urban university: An exploration of design principles. Internet and Higher Education, 22, 37–50. 11. Johnson, L. & Renner, J. (2012). Effect of the flipped classroom model on a secondary computer applications course: student and teacher perceptions, questions and student achievement. Doctoral Dissertation, University of Louisville. 12. Schmidt, S. M., & Ralph, D. L. (2014). The Flipped Classroom: A Twist on Teaching. The Clute Institute, 98- 104. 13. Tunks, K. W. (2012). An introduction and guide to enhancing online instruction with Web 2.0 tools.Journal ofEducators Online,9(2), 1-16. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 148 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology A STUDY ON THE PERFORMANCE OF MAJOR SPICES IN INDIA Dr. R.ARUN Assistant Professor in Department of Management Studies UG Dr.SNS Rajalakshmi College of Arts and Science, Coimbatore INTRODUCTION Indian spices include a variety of spices grown across the Indian subcontinent (a sub-region of South Asia). With different climates in different parts of the country, India produces a variety of spices, many of which are native to the Subcontinent, while others were imported from similar climates and have since been cultivated locally for centuries. Spices are used in different forms: whole, chopped, ground, roasted, sautéed, fried, and as topping. They blend food to extract the nutrients and bind them in a palatable form. Some spices are added at the end as a flavoring and are typically heated in a pan with ghee or cooking oil before being added to a dish. Lighter spices are added last, and spices with strong flavor should be added first. "Curry" is not a spice, but a term used by Western people and refers to any dish in Indian cuisine that contains several spices blended together, whether dry or with a gravy base. The changing economic order in the context of Globalization and liberalization of world trade in the sphere agriculture has opened up new vistas of growth. Spices sector is one of the key areas in which Indian has an inherent strength to dominate the global markets. Spice is defined as a strongly flavored or aromatic substance of vegetable origin, obtained from tropical plants and commonly used as condiments or employed for other purpose on account of their fragrance and preservative qualities Condiment consists anything of pronounced flavor used to season or give relish to food or to stimulate appetite. Spices constitute an important group of agricultural commodities that is virtually indispensable. Apart from culinary purpose, Spices are also used as flavoring agents in beverages, active ingredients in Ayurvedic medicines, Coloring agents in textiles and in cosmetic products. Recorded history elucidates the extreme facilitation of the rest of the world for the tabled wealth of India – the variety of Spices. As a result of recent WTO regime, quality competitiveness has emerged as the prime mover of international food marketing. A PROFILE OF SPICES INDUSTRY IN INDIA India, with favorable climatic zones, is well placed in respect of spices. The country is blessed with a wide range of agro climatic conditions – from tropical to temperature zones, coastal plains to high altitudes, and semi-acid to highly humid evergreen forests. It has been able to curve out a niche as a prime largest producer, consumer and exports of spices. India is traditionally known as the Spice Bowl of the World. The history of Indian Spices dates back to the beginning of human civilization preferences about Indian spices and their uses have been mentioned in the Vedas (6000 BC), ‗Manu‘ the law given (4000 BC), the Babylonians and Assyrians (3000 BC) and the old testament (1000 BC). Spices were inducements for Voyager, expeditions, Romance and even war. Malabar Pepper, Cochin Ginger, Allepey Green Cardamom, Allepey Finger Turmeric and Sannam Chillies are some of India‘s favoured and preferred spice varieties in the International markets. Nearly 50 percent of the world demand of spice is met by India. According to the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS), 63 spices are being grown in India of which Black pepper, cardamom, Chillies, Turmeric and Ginger are grouped under the spices and the rest are considered as minor spices based on their importance and contribution in foreign trade. MAJOR SPICES . Black Pepper . Cardamom . Ginger . Turmeric . Chillies . Seed Spices . Mintoil and Spice Oleroesins SPICE BOARD PROFILE Spices Board is the Indian government regulatory and promotion agency for Indian spices. The board is headquartered in Kochi. Dr. Jayathilak, IAS is the current Chairman of Spices Board. The Board has a state of the art testing laboratory at its head quarters in Kochi. There are also other regional Laboratories at Mumbai, Chennai, Delhi, Tuticorin and Guntur. Through the laboratories, Spices Board undertakes mandatory quality checks for spices exported from India. Spices Board India Spices Board (Ministry of Commerce, Government of India) is the flagship organization for the development and worldwide promotion of Indian spices. The Board is an international link between the Indian exporters and the importers abroad. The Board has been spearheading activities for excellence of Indian spices, involving every segment of the industry. The Board has made quality and hygiene the corner stones for its development and promotional strategies. Multi faceted activities REVIEW OF LITERATURE ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 149 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Ghosh (1964) is of the view that Indian market is imperfect because export market is based on a few primary products, traditional market structure has been altered little inspite of the spread of regulated markets. Agricultural processing market is imperfect, price discrimination is followed and there is no entry to exit from original industry. Saigal Indu (1972) observes that one of the reasons attributed to the decline in export is the uncompetitiveness of India going to foreign markets. Some studies in horticultural crops have revealed that Indian prices are far higher compared to her major producing countries. Banik (1982) had analyzed the role of export of agricultural commodities in export oriented growth. He found that India‘s net terms of trade and share in world imports were declining. It was inferred that Coffee and Spices accounted for a major share of total agricultural exports. The study suggested that the efforts should be made for improving the balance of trade especially in the agricultural sector through export promotion and import substitution. Sridharan (1982) studied Cashew in Indian export trade and found that USA was a major market for Indian Cashew. The Cashew Industry has a vital role because of its potential for forex and employment generation. He suggested a diversification of exports and export promotion of Cashew nut. SCOPE OF THE STUDY India is the land of spices and the commodity adds considerable ‗flavor and fragrance‘ to its economy. Besides being a major exporter, India is also a major consumer of spices. No other country in the world has such a diverse variety of spice crops as India. India being a net exporter of agricultural commodities the forex earnings by way of exports will lead to the import of capital goods which will pave way for the increased investment resulting in technological advances, eventually leading to improved productivity and efficiency. To accelerate the pack of economic development, reliance on International trade becomes desirable to muster foreign exchange. For the agrarian economies of developing countries like India, spices exports seem to be the engine of the growth. The shift in emphasis from commodities in the whole form to value added products has given a new dimension to the spice industry in the country. Keeping in mind the above facts, a study about the performance of exports in this sector becomes pertinent. The present study on the export performance of major spices will examine the status of Indian Spices in the world market. The study also focuses on the trend in India‘s spice exports. It identifies the challenges and constraints and suggests measures for formulating alternative management strategies and policies to boost spices export. OBJECTIVES OF THE STUDY 1. To study the production of spices in terms of world production over the period of time. 2. To analyze export of spices from India in terms of quantity and value 3. To study the percentage change in exports of spices. 4. To analyze the overall performance of spices and specific products i.e. Chilly & Ginger. 5. To study the export initiatives and recent technological developments. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY Research in common parlance to a search for knowledge. One can also define research as a scientific and systematic search for pertinent information on a specific topic. The quality of the project work depends on the methodology adopted for the study. Methodology, in turn, depends on the nature of the project work. The use of proper methodology is an essential part of any research. In order to conduct the study scientifically, suitable methods & measures are to be followed. RESEARCH DESIGN ―Research design is the arrangement of activities for the collection and analysis of the data in a manner that aims to combine relevance to the purpose with economy in procedure. Analytical Research was used as a research design for this study. PERIOD OF DATA The study is based on the secondary data covering a period of 10 years starting from 2007 to 2017. SOURCE OF DATA The source of data for the study is collected from spices industries based on their export performances. DATA COLLECTION METHOD Data has been collected from secondary data. SECONDARY DATA Secondary data was collected from the secondary sources. The data were gathered from the various publications of Spices Board, Government of India, Ministry of Agricultural Statistics at a Glance, Ministry of Commerce and Industry, Spices Board of Cochin, All India Export – Import Journal and Various issues Economic Survey, CMIE Reports, Magazines like Kisan World, Websites, etc. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 150 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology TOOLS OF ANALYSIS This study depends exclusively with the simple percentage and linear growth rate. LIMITATIONS OF THE STUDY The study was based on the secondary data collected from various published sources. Often data from different sources may not agree with each other and some efforts to choose the better among them are inevitable. Care has been taken to avoid personal bias in such decisions. Even though the analysis were carried out both in dynamic and static settings, the Exim policies are subject to change in the short term as well as long run and this would have implication on the structure of exports of spices. This in turn may make the conclusions and suggestions out dated. The analysis and the conclusions are limited for 10 years. DATA ANALYSIS AND INTERPRETATION TABLE 1 : TRENDS IN SHARE OF SPICES, AGRICULTURE AND TOTAL EXPORTS Year Particulars 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 Spices exports (in crores) 1718 1796 2025 1612 1625 Agricultural Export (in crores) 24843 25511 25314 28657 29486 % of Share 6.91 7.04 7.99 5.62 5.51 Total Export (in crores) 130100 139750 159095 201356 207746 % of Share 1.32 1.28 1.27 0.8 0.78 Source : Agricultural Statistics From the above Table it is clear that the spices export had shown an increase from Rs. 1718 crores in 2013-14 to Rs. 2025 crores in 2015-16. Whereas, in the year 2012-13 it had decreased. Again it was found that there is a marginal increase for the period 2013-14 which was to the tune of Rs.1625 crores. It is also clear that the share of spices in our country‘s agriculture and in total exports was 6.91 percent and 1.32 percent respectively, during 2013-14. Later the share of spices in exports decreased. This was due to a low productivity and a high domestic demand. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 151 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology TABLE 2: EXPORTS OF SPICES FROM INDIA BETWEEN 2007 AND 2017 Particulars 2007 2008 2009 2010 20011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 2017 Quantity (in 142104 128720 182361 157643 211515 219400 170652 240862 235611 235916 245000 MT) Value (Rs. in 58645.7 39342 56891 60648 78589.1 118000 96899.2 179610 204368 183353 162535 lakhs) Sources: All India Export Import Journal From the Table it has been inferred that the export of spices from India has shown a spectacular growth. It was 142104 metric tonne in 2007-08 in value terms, it was Rs. 58645.72. During the period the growth value increased to Rs. 60648.00 lakhs during 2008-09. The export during 2012-13 was 170,652 tones valued Rs.96899 crores and against this, the overall achievement was higher. For the first time, Indian export of spices has surpassed Rs.1,000 crore mark during 2015-17. In the year 2016- 17 the export value was found to be Rs.162535 lakhs. However, there is reduction in exportable surplus on account of increasing domestic demand, vagaries of nature, rests and diseases and arbitrary imposition of standards by the importing countries. TABLE 3 : PRODUCTION OF SPICES IN TERMS OF WORLD BETWEEN 2005 AND 2014 Particulars 2007 2008 2009 2010 2011 2012 2013 2014 2015 2016 Production (in tones) 882200 738800 954700 966100 1075100 1020000 1104000 1063000 1029700 1051000 World (in tones) 119742 1106915 1313516 1356151 1476177 1428339 1552213 1536840 1538006 1545734 Source : FAO Statistics The above table shows the performance of India‘s spices production with that of world production over the period of time. It is inferred that the production of spices which was 882200 tonnes in 2006-07 had increased to 1051000 by 2015-16. Similarly the world spice production also had showed the same trend of increase from 2007-08 to 2014-15. TABLE 4 : SHOWS THE PRODUCTION OF SPICES BY DIFFERENT COUNTRIES (2015-16) (in Tonnes) Particulars India Bangladesh Turkey China Pakistan Total Production (in tones) 1,100,000 140.133 87,028 85,987 454,763 1,588,807 Percentage 70% 9% 5.70% 5.50% 3% 100% ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 152 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Source : Indian Institute of Spices Research. Table shows the major countries production of spices in the world. It has been inferred that among the countries which produce spices, India‘s production was 70% which was followed by Bangladesh (9%), Turkey (5.77%), China (5.5%) and Pakistan (3%) for the year 2015-16. TABLE 5 : AREA, PRODUCTION AND PRODUCTIVITY OF CHILLI IN INDIA DURING 1997 TO 2017 Year Area Production Productivity (in ‗000 Ha) (‗000 metric) (MT/HA) 1997-1998 846.30 617.50 729.65 1998-1999 962.10 862.10 896.06 1999-2000 930.00 800.10 860.32 2000-2001 829.20 794.70 958.39 2001-2002 883.70 809.70 916.26 2002-2003 944.20 1066.00 1129.00 2003-2004 840.60 870.10 1035.09 2004-2005 891.20 1043.20 1170.56 2005-2006 959.20 1052.80 1097.58 2006-2007 836.50 983.70 1175.97 2007-2008 880.00 1069.00 1214.77 2008-2009 828.60 896.00 1082.43 2009-2010 774.30 1235.70 1595.89 2010-2011 737.50 1185.50 1607.46 2011-2012 654.00 1014.60 1551.38 2012-2013 758.00 1234.10 1628.10 2013-2014 805.80 1297.90 1610.70 2014-2015 779.05 1269.85 1611.00 2015-2016 767.23 1202.94 1610.75 2017-2018 792.10 1223.40 1590.00 Average 834.98 1026.44 1253.57 LGR -1.13 2.78 3.26 Source : Ministry of Agriculture, India (Area in ‗000 Hectares, Production in ‗000 MT, Productivity in MT/HA) ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 153 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology From the above table it is clear that the Area, Production and Productivity of India during the periods from 1997-98 to 2016-17 reveals that during the initial stages the area recorded 846.30 thousand hectares which was increasing gradually during the next two years and there was a decline found during 2000-2001 that recorded 829.20 thousand hectares. In the subsequent years there was fluctuation found in the area of chilli cultivation that recorded declining trend during the final period i.e. 2016-17 at 792.10 thousand hectares. The linear growth rate reveals negative growth at -1.13% per annum. When taking the production into consideration initially chilli recorded 617.50 metric tones that has gradually and consistently increased every year to reach at 1223.40 metric tones during the period 1997-98. The linear growth rate was found to be 2.70% growth per annum. When taking the productivity into consideration during the initial periods i.e. 1997-98 the yield stood at 729.65 MT/Ha that was increasing steadily every year and reached 1590 MT/Ha during 2016-17. The linear growth rate was also revealing healthy growth at 3.26% per annum. It is inferred that Area was showing declining trend during the study period whereas production and productivity recorded positive growth during the study period from 1997-98 to 2016-17. TABLE 6 : AREA, PRODUCTION AND PRODUCTIVITY OF GINGER IN THE WORLD Thailan Indonesi Bangalade Sri Other Country China India Nepal d Nigeria a sh Phillipines Korea Lanka Countries Total Avg SD LGR Area (000' ha) 36.1 107.5 18.04 10.25 52.33 60.47 9.07 3.97 2.09 2.07 8.51 310.4 28.22 33.33 -21.37 Production (000' ha) 396.6 385.3 210.8 172.68 162.22 109.02 74.84 27.1 24.97 12.05 107.4 1683 153 133.9 -23.03 Productivity (000' ha) 10.99 3.58 11.68 16.85 3.1 1.8 8.26 6.83 11.98 5.82 12.62 50.42 8.501 4.727 0.33 Source : Spices board ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 154 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology From the above table it has been inferred that the total production of ginger in the world is 1683.00 thousand tons with the total acreage of 310.43 thousand hectares. India, Indonesia, Nigeria, China and Nepal are the major producers of ginger in the world, having production of 385.33 thousand tons, 109.02 thousand tons, 162.22 thousand tones respectively. India and Indonesia have the largest area under cultivation. The mean of the area production and productivity was 28.22, 152.99 and 8.51 respectively. It is rated that the linear growth in area and productivity was tend to be negative. FINDINGS It is found that that the share of spices in our country‘s agriculture and in total exports was 6.91 percent and 1.32 percent respectively, during 2012 -13. Later the share of spices in exports decreased. This was due to a low productivity and a high domestic demand. It is found that the export of spices from India has shown a spectacular growth. It was 142104 metric tonne in 2013-14 in value terms, it was Rs. 58645.72. During the period the growth value increased to Rs. 60648.00 lakhs during 2015-16. The export during 2013-14 was 170,652 tones valued Rs.96899 crores and against this, the overall achievement was higher. For the first time, Indian export of spices has surpassed Rs.1,000 crore mark during 2015-17. In the year 2012-13 the export value was found to be Rs.162535 lakhs. It is found that the performance of India‘s spices production with that of world production over the period of time. It is inferred that the production of spices which was 882200 tonnes in 2005-07 had increased to 1051000 by 2015-16. Similarly the world spice production also had showed the same trend of increase from 2012-13 to 2014-15. It is found that the major countries production of spices in the world. It has been inferred that among the countries which produce spices, India‘s production was 70% which was followed by Bangladesh (9%), Turkey (5.77%), China (5.5%) and Pakistan (3%) for the year 2013-14. It is found that Area was showing declining trend during the study period whereas production and productivity recorded positive growth during the study period from 2002-03 to 2015-16. It is found that the total production of ginger in the world is 1683.00 thousand tons with the total acreage of 310.43 thousand hectares. India, Indonesia, Nigeria, China and Nepal are the major producers of ginger in the world, having production of 385.33 thousand tons, 109.02 thousand tons, 162.22 thousand tones respectively. India and Indonesia have the largest area under cultivation. The mean of the area production and productivity was 28.22, 152.99 and 8.51 respectively. It is rated that the linear growth in area and productivity was tend to be negative. SUGGESTIONS A microbial technology developed by the National Institute for Interdisciplinary Science and Technology (NIIST) promises to provide a cost effective and hassle free means of white pepper production. White pepper is the most remunerative value added form of green and black pepper, but the cost processes and quality concerns have constrained its production. Conducive industry environment and stable policy framework is necessary for growth. Of Indian spices, that have changed from the decade ago scenario with value added or processed goods contributing bulk of revenue instead of primary raw materials. The change has taken place during the last one decade. In 2002, 83% of India's pepper export was in primary form. Today however only 25% of pepper exports are in primary raw material form while the rest goes in processed form. CONCLUSION Spices exports have registered substantial growth during the last five years, registering an annual average growth rate of 21% in value and 8% in volume. During the year 2012-13, spices export from India has registered an all time high both in terms of quantity and value. In 2012-13 the export of spices from India has been 525,750 tonnes valued Rs.6840.71 crores (US $ 1502.85 Million) as against 502,750 tonnes valued Rs.5560.50 crores (US $ 1173.75 Million) in 2013-14, registering an increase of 28% in dollar terms of value and 5% in volume. India commands a formidable position in the World Spice Trade with 48% share in Volume and 44% in Value. BIBLIOGRAPHY 1. C.M.I.E. Report, May 2011 2. EXIM Times, Various Issues 3. Sivayya K.C, Dass V.B.M, Indian Industrial Economy, Prentice Hall Pvt. Ltd., New Delhi, 1991 4. Varma M.L, ―Foreign Trade in India‖, Vikas Publishing House Pvt Ltd., New Delhi, 1996. 5. Gosh Arbinda (1964) ‗Marketing Structure of Indian Agriculture – An Analysis‖, world Agricultural Economics and Rural Sociology Abstracts, Vol. : 6 (1), Pp 150. 6. Saigal Indu (1972) ―Product planning for export marketing‖, Indian Journal of Marketing, Vol.II (6) Pp 23 – 25, February. 7. Banik .B.B. (1982), ―Role of Agricultural Commodities in Export Oriented Growth‖ ―Indian Journal of Agricultural Economics, Vol. 37 (3) Pp 328 – 329, July September. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 155 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 8. Sridharan .B (1982), ―Cashews in Indian Export Trade ―Indian Journal of Agricultural Economics, 37(1) : Pp 317 – 322. WEB SITE: www.articlecity.com www.thefreelibrary.com www.sooperarticles.com ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 156 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology IMPACT OF FDI ON EMPLOYMENT GENERATION AND GDP GROWTH IN INDIA – A STUDY GUNDA.SRINIVAS Research Scholar, Department of Commerce, Rayalaseema University, Kurnool. E-mail: [email protected] Dr. CH. SRINIVAS Principal & Professor Vivekananda Degree & PG College, Karimnagar. ABSTRACT The objective of the paper is to study the impact of FDI in India on the employment generation and GDP growth. In the era of homogenization of development all over the globe, capital has become crucial aspect and major concern for developing countries. This paper shows the relationship between Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) and Economic growth and generation of employment in India within the period from 1990 to 2012 .FDI has played a significant role in the growth and development of Indian economy. Our GDP has grown almost six-fold since the year 1990 till 2012. FDI plays multidimensional role in the overall development. It may generate benefits through bringing non-debt creating foreign capital resources, technology up-gradation, skill enhancement, new employment, spillovers and allocate efficiency effects. Thus, FDI acts as a catalyst for domestic industrial development and is considered to be an important vehicle for economic development. KEY WORDS: Foreign Direct Investment (FDP), Gross Domestic Product (GDP), Employment, Elasticity of Employment, GDP Growth. INTRODUCTION There have been significant amount of research that have been carried out in almost all the developing countries especially African and Indian sub-continent since China grew past all the economies since 1970‘s, while the total FDI inflow in China surpassed its previous record every year during those days. It is pretty obvious that the main forces that triggered such growth were not only FDI but also its labor reforms with infrastructure development and opening of its economy, South Korea also miraculously grew at a growth rate of 12% during that phase using similar methodology. After the liberalization of the Indian economy since 1991 in the wake of balance of payment crises there has also been emphasis on FDI in India, as India strived to follow the same objective of economic growth many leaps and bounds followed it. Employment generation and starting of new firms have always converged as empirical evidences indicate1, India on the other hand was struggling to help start new firms as it always had problems with the license system that it followed since its independence. There have always been concerns regarding this subject in India however after the liberalization of the economy this pessimism has definitely reduced and high hopes have gradually taken its place. India also had credibility issues that took a toll on its economic growth in the first half of 1990‘s but later they were also slowly resolved with new reforms such as in rupee convertibility, fiscal reforms, flexible exchange rate and etc. After the realization by Indian planners about the fact they cannot keep going in the same fashion of regulation of foreign trade and neglect their responsibilities about the balance of payment in the early 90‘s they started liberalizing norms on foreign ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 157 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology exchange as a result of gradually the FDI inflow incremented come to think of it-- not much time has really passed since then and India has accumulated a cumulative FDI of U.S$ 364,785 million2 by January 2015. Employment generation ability in India has been dominated by agriculture as even in 2009-10 the percentage share of agricultural employment is 53.2%, while the share of manufacturing/ non-manufacturing and service sector are 11%/10.5% and 25.3% respectively. It is not hard to see that the majority number of hands to feed a population of 120 billion has always been dominated by agriculture, even with the low earning that is derived from agriculture the economy has not only sustained but is also growing at a rate of 7% in 2015-- it is miraculously true. Even with a cyclic raising CPI the low wages derived from agriculture were able to sustain a jaw dropping population of 120 billion. In the context of the relation between population growth and employment generation we can say that it is significantly dependent on demographic factors that we cannot go into a detail about in this section, however we will mention the document of the World Bank (http://data.worldbank.org /indicator/SL.EMP. TOTL.SP.ZS) in this regard. The relation between employment generation and FDI is very significant to understand in respect of Indian scenario due to more or less stagnated employment share of agriculture. It is pretty puzzling that despite of the migration of people to urban areas in search of employment why are there such low employment share of service sector even after high FDI inflows? Moreover, what are the factors that relate FDI to employment in India? These are key question that we will try to find answers to in this paper, after the liberalization of the Indian economy much has changed governments launch ambitious programs like MGNREGA (Mahatma Gandhi national rural employment guarantee scheme) and many other such programs further it reduces barriers to trade and allows FDI in all sectors this definitely spreads optimism in the domestic as well as foreign markets, we seek to know how far has India got riding on the back of much debated Foreign Direct Investment. FOREIGN DIRECT INVESTMENT SCENARIO OF INDIA The importance of FDI can be explained by analyzing its need and influence on Indian economy, the need for FDI is pretty simple, as right after the balance of payment crises it became pretty clear that India will not have much domestic investment unless the private sector is liberalized and supported by the government. Even if big bang reforms take place it will need some time to settle things down, so for the time being the major investment had to come from elsewhere i.e. FDI liberalization schemes must be rolled out. However, due to credibility issues in the international market it was pretty difficult for India to begin with such an idea but later on as India began to advertise about its huge market with approximately 95 billion consumers in telecommunication sector (in 1996)4 for example things began to become more clear to the multinational companies. Influence of FDI can be understood by the inferiority complex that almost all the South East Asian countries felt after the rapid growth of China and South Korea, there is no denying the fact that FDI inflow in China was one of the major factors responsible for this along with other reforms that took place during that period. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 158 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology TABLE-1: FROM APRIL, 2000 TO FEBRUARY, 2015 – RBI Amount Country 2012-13 2013-14 2014-15 Cumulative %age to (April Rupees in ( April - (April – ‗14- Inflows total crores (US$ March) March) February, (April ‘00 - Inflows (in in million) 2015) February terms of US Ranks ‗15) $) 1. MAURITIUS 51,654 29,360 51,530 422,015 35 % (9,497) (4,859) (8,447) (86,972) 2. SINGAPORE 12,594 35,625 39,393 165,200 13 % (2,308) (5,985) (6,429) (31,874) 3. U.K. 5,797 20,426 7,463 108,348 9 % (1,080) (3,215) (1,237) (22,001) 4. JAPAN 12,243 10,550 10,507 91,151 7 % (2,237) (1,718) (1,725) (17,993) 5. NETHERLAN 10,054 13,920 20,076 76,374 6 % DS (1,856) (2,270) (3,294) (14,530) 6. U.S.A. 3,033 4,807 10,360 66,090 6 % (557) (806) (1,697) (13,625) 7. CYPRUS 2,658 3,401 3,596 39,325 3 % (490) (557) (592) (8,038) 8. GERMANY 4,684 6,093 6,485 38,091 3 % (860) (1,038) (1,058) (7,577) 9 FRANCE 3,487 1,842 3,626 22,332 2 % (646) (305) (594) (4,472) 10. SWITZERLAD 987 2,084 2,040 15,188 1 % ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 159 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology (180) (341) (333) (3,040) Total FDI 121,907 147,518 175,886 1,220,316 - Inflows From (22,423) (24,299) (28,813) (246,516) All Countries * Source: Fact Sheet on Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) TRENDS IN FDI INFLOW India astoundingly way back in 1983 came a long way when we think only in terms of methodology adopted to bring in capital inflows some light on the situation can be thrown in by bilateral tax treaty between India and Mauritius (Dr. Manmohan Singh, 2007 IMF working paper) an example for recent development regarding this issue can be of India-Singapore comprehensive economic corporation agreement 2003. After reviewing the above given data it is very easy to interpret the crucial role played by bilateral tax agreement between India and Mauritius i.e. FDI inflow of Mauritius is not only highest but also 35% of FDI, similarly Singapore constitutes of 13% of it. But that of the western countries constitute less than 50% of FDI even on summation. The impact of such treaties and agreement between countries is huge, sometimes big enough to over shadow many reforms that countries like India go through like labor reforms etc. The free trade agreement have played a significant role in developing countries of Asia and Africa especially when we consider political economy FTA Consolidation in Asia—(As a group, the number of concluded FTAs in Asia increased from only three to 61 during that time).6 What impact did these FTA have on India? The increased integration of India with Asian countries has expanded its presence in global markets where as the shares of Asian developing countries in India‘s exports and imports have raised but its share with developed countries has come down, despite of this fact they continue to be important destination for Indian exports7. India‘s FDI policy turned out to be beneficial for not only Singapore and Mauritius but also for other Asian countries. While with the African partners there have been appreciable amount of investment from India instead, for instance investments by Tata motors in South Africa are market seeking because the cars built in South Africa are sold in the country.8A look over the below given data can help in understanding that there have been constant increase in investment by India into the African countries as we see that US$ million 1,400 in 2006-07, US$ million 1,627 in 2007-08 and US$ million 2,555 in 2008-09, however the net outflow of FDI in India was just 0.4% of GDP in 2014 according to World Bank data so we can conclude there is very little outflow of FDI in contrast to FDI inflow 3% of GDP in 2014. Never the less India is surly on the path that was set as an objective during the liberalization of 1991. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 160 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology TABLE-2: INDIAN FDI TO AFRICAN COUNTRIES 1996- 2002- 2003- 2004- 2005- 2006- 2007- 2008- Country 2002 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 Botswana 3.46 0 0.05 0.02 0.02 0 2.3 8.11 Burkina Faso 0 0 0 0.05 0 0 0 0 Cameroon 0 0.02 0 0 0 0 0 0 Ethiopia 0.54 0.57 0.22 0.2 1.8 1.8 2.52 1.49 Ghana 0.03 0.33 0.01 0 0.66 0.66 1.69 1.09 Ivory coast 0.01 0 0 7.24 6.85 0.39 0.27 0.5 Kenya 12.75 0.59 1.77 0.19 0.32 0.2 0.33 133.15 Libya 30 0 0 0 25.28 75 0.02 12.67 Liberia 0.28 0 0 0 154.94 0 17.74 16 Mauritius 618.34 133.35 175.59 149.38 332.67 1162.79 1506.29 2086.97 Morocco 32.49 0 0 0 0 0 0.44 2.65 Mozambique 0 0 0 2.55 7.52 0 3.23 3.77 Niger 0 0 0 0 0.01 0 0 0.5 Nigeria 6.69 4.08 2.16 7.53 4.3 11.64 27.2 237 Namibia 0.06 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 South Africa 21.56 0.07 0.79 2.88 10.42 23.29 46.19 12.37 Sierra Leone 0 0 0 0.01 0 0 0 0 Senegal 22.24 0 0 0 1 0 0.03 0 Sudan 0 750 162.03 51.55 63.05 118.15 8.3 38.06 Tanzania 4.02 0.01 0.08 0.34 0 0 10.47 0 Tunisia 0 0 0 0 0 5.24 0 0 Uganda 2.44 0 0.01 0.19 0 0 0 1 Zambia 2.35 0 0 0.11 0 0 0 0.05 Zimbabwe 1.11 0 0 0.18 0.3 0.95 0 0 AFRICA 758.37 889.02 342.71 222.42 609.14 1400.11 1627 2555.37 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 161 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Source: http://finmin.nic.in/the_ministry/dept_eco_affairs/investment_div/invest_index.htm#Actu al_Outflows (accessed on February 28, 2012) FDI has always been concerned with developed economies. As they attract a comparatively higher share of world-wide FDI than developing countries. In recent years, however, the increase in FDI flows to developing countries turned out to be higher than the increase in FDI flows to developed countries. Average annual FDI flows to developing countries soared eight-fold9 and India had a big role to play. EMPLOYMENT GENERATION SCENARIO IN INDIA When we discuss about the trend of employment in India employment elasticity can be a very useful tool for analysis- Employment elasticity is a measure of the percentage change in employment associated with a 1 percentage point change in economic growth. TABLE-3: EMPLOYMENT ELASTICITY: CAGR APPROACH Employment GDP Employment Year growth(CAGR) Growth(CAGR) Elasticity 1972-73 to 1977- 78 2.6 4.6 0.57 1977-78 to 1983 2.1 3.9 0.54 1983 to 1988-89 1.7 4 0.42 1988-89 to 1993- 94 2.4 5.6 0.43 1993-94 to 1999- 2000 1 6.8 0.15 1999-2000 to 2004-05 2.8 5.7 0.5 2004-05 to 2009- 10 0.1 8.7 0.01 2009-10 to 2011- 12 1.4 7.4 0.18 1999-00 to 2011- 12 1.5 7.3 0.2 1993-94 to 2011- 12 1.1 6 0.18 *Computed Values ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 162 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology As we can see that there is a definite decline in the employment elasticity indicating that with increase in GDP growth rate there was lesser and lesser increase in overall employment in India. One of the logical explanations behind this can be that as the economy progressed, the labor force was being replaced by capital or marginal rate of technical substitution kept declining. But when we take a look at the employment generation trend in organized sector (Table 4) we figure out that there is a positive growth in employment of organized sector since the past years with decreasing elasticity as shown of course, now the below given bar chart can throw some light on the decreasing trend of labor contribution in GDP as one can easily make out that there is gradual but sure increase in tangent or first derivative of the curve given below (plot between GDP growth on Y and employment on X axis in scales of millions.) ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 163 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Either way, we can confirm that there is not much increase in labor employment with respect to National income growth in India. Unorganized sector employment is doing fairly well if we see in terms of employment generation, but since data on unorganized sector is not available to us we can leave it at this optimistic expression. There has been a great deal of debates on the topic of employment generation by small and new firms in national and international fronts, most of the researchers considered it to be true10, this view has initiated a new program in India by the government, but we are yet to see the results. TABLE-4: EMPLOYMENT GENERATION IN INDIA - ORGANIZED SECTOR Year Public Private Number of persons on sector(end- sector(end- the live register(end- march) march) december) 1975-76 13.63 6.79 9.78 1976-77 14.18 6.95 10.92 1977-78 14.73 7.11 12.68 1978-79 15.58 7.23 14.33 1979-80 15.12 7.24 16.2 1980-81 15.48 7.4 17.84 1981-82 16.28 7.53 19.75 1982-83 16.75 7.39 21.95 1983-84 17.22 7.36 23.55 1984-85 17.58 7.43 26.27 1985-86 17.68 7.37 30.13 1986-87 18.24 7.39 30.25 1987-88 18.32 7.39 30.05 1988-89 18.51 7.45 32.78 1989-90 18.77 7.58 34.63 1990-91 19.06 7.68 36.3 1991-92 19.21 7.85 36.76 1992-93 19.33 7.85 36.28 1993-94 19.45 7.93 36.69 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 164 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 1994-95 19.47 8.06 36.74 1995-96 19.43 8.51 37.43 1996-97 19.56 8.69 39.14 1997-98 19.42 8.75 40.09 1998-99 19.41 8.7 40.37 1999-2000 19.31 8.65 41.34 2000-01 19.14 8.65 42 2001-02 18.77 8.43 41.17 2002-03 18.58 8.42 41.39 2003-04 18.2 8.25 40.46 2004-05 18.01 8.45 39.35 2005-06 18.19 8.77 41.47 2006-07 18.06 9.24 39.97 2007-08 17.67 9.88 39.11 2008-09 17.8 10.38 38.15 2009-10 17.86 10.85 38.83 2010-11 17.55 11.45 40.17 2011-12 17.61 12.04 44.79 2012-13 NA NA 46.8 Note: Data from 1990-91 to 1998-99 and for 2002-03 onwards are based on quarterly employment review. Also see notes on tables. Source: Directorate general of employment and training. Ministry of labor and employment, Government of India. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 165 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology EMPLOYMENT GENERATION CAPACITY OF FDI Foreign direct investments are long run programs initiated by multinational companies; they seek simple incentives such as markets, comparative advantage of labor in a country, cheaper raw material etc. but how does it increase employment? There are basically two kinds of investment 1) Brown field investment—when a company purchases existing production facilities. 2) Green field investment—when a company builds a new production facility. Either way there is bound to be increase in employment due to investments made. But the extent of the employment generation depends on the nature of business these firms want to do, with entry of new firms in the country there must be increase in competition in the domestic markets, this gives diversity to the consumers, other positive implication of FDI is the improvement of technology and knowledge. In India most of the sector-wise distribution of FDI has been in service sector (Services sector includes Financial, Banking, Insurance, Non-Financial / Business, Outsourcing, R&D, Courier,) i.e. 17.18% of total FDI. While in construction development India has 9.76% FDI inflows. Most of these industries are capital intensive in nature and we should not expect much growth in labor employment. Agriculture sector— the primary sector employs 50% of the total employment directly while 12% indirectly, it has received about 0.16 % in agriculture services and 0.16% in agriculture machinery of FDI, though it is a small fraction of FDI it led to a steady growth in agriculture sector12. Keeping in mind that agriculture sector contributes up to 19% in GDP of India we should expect more inflow of FDI in this sector, but when we compare the ratio of GDP contribution of primary sector to the labor employment we find that the theory of disguised unemployment to be true, moreover most of the employment generated belongs to the unorganized sector. The productivity of labor in agriculture sector has depleted to an alarming extent and the only way to raise living standard may seem to be that prescribed by Professor Arthur Lewis in his Labor surplus model for developing countries. The FDI in other sector certainly seem to be pointing in the above mentioned direction of Professor Arthur Lewis model, when we take a closer look at the employment trend of agriculture in India we find that there has been a steady decline. TABLE-4A: EMPLOYMENT SHARES OF MAJOR SECTORS (%) Sector 1972-73 1977-78 1983 1987-88 1993-94 1999-2000 Agriculture 74 72.3 68.4 65.5 60.38 56.7 Industry 11.4 12.3 13.7 15.5 15.82 17.56 Services 14.6 15.4 17.5 18.4 23.8 25.74 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 166 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Source: NSSO Database The only way by which Indian agriculture sector can improve its labor productivity is by employing more of capital intensive technology. Such practices have already shown good results in U.S.A, Mexico etc. Industrial Sector—Indian industrial sector have had its leaps and bounds and is now expected grow at a much better pace though it has received a FDI share of 4.96% in automobile sector, 3.88% in power sector, 4.17% in fertilizers etc. it is still growing and contributed to 18% of employment in India. This share of FDI inflow in industrial sector does not reflect its incapacity by any means as the major benefit received by this sector has been transfer of technology and knowledge through multinational companies. With this the productivity of Indian labor has improved tremendously, the national manufacturing policy (NMP) ratified by the Indian government aims at 25% contribution to GDP and 100 million employment by 2022, under such strong optimism this sector is likely to increase its share of FDI as well. There has been a steady increase in index of industrial production (IIP) in the recent past of the core industries of India and we can expect that this sector will do better in the future, with labor migrating towards the urban industrial areas in search of employment they need to increase their productivity which they are able to do as the results show. Service Sector—this sector is attracting a huge sum of FDI i.e. 17.18%, most of the FDI that came from Mauritius and Singapore was inclined towards the service sector but since the global financial crises in 2007-08 this percentage has dropped. It is clear that the service sector is sensitive towards the exports at least in India, with the plummeting service exports of -15% in 2015 this sector has gotten the worse hit since the crises, the rate of employment generation in this sector is pretty stable though. During the period of 2004-06 when the Indian GDP was growing at a rate of 8% the service exports played the most important role also FDI inflow it this sector was at its peak. Skilled labor from all over the country flooded into this sector but as soon as the exports were reduced this sector could not bear the labor cost and instead left it unemployed or did not hired them to begin with, moreover the FDI inflow was reduced to 2/3 of what it was in 2005. Amount of FDI S. Sector inflows %age of No total inflows in rupees in us $ (crore) million 1 Service sector* 203,207.12 42,340.36 17.18 Construction development: townships, housing, build- 2 up infrastructure and 113,115.96 24,060.36 9.76 construction development projects 3 Telecommunications 83,829.32 17,015.99 6.91 4 Computer software and hardware 72,264.91 14,862.02 6.03 5 Drugs and Pharmaceuticals 63,910.56 12,901.33 5.24 6 Automobile industry 63,051.15 12,232.06 4.96 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 167 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 7 Chemicals(other than fertilizers) 48,847.60 10,262.87 4.17 8 Power 46,587.17 9,548.82 3.88 9 Metallurgical industries 41,025.74 8,527.34 3.46 10 Trading 43,076.80 7,944.67 3.22 11 Hotel and Tourism 40,744.64 7,862.08 3.19 12 Petroleum and Natural Gas 31,651.33 6,519.70 2.65 13 Food Processing industries 36,632.82 6,259.42 2.54 14 Miscellaneous mechanical and engineering industries 20,612.79 3,954.67 1.61 15 Information and Broadcasting (including print media) 19,197.30 3,897.50 1.58 16 Electrical equipment‘s 18,705.40 3,851.83 1.56 17 Non-conventional energy 18,898.83 3,582.16 1.45 18 Industrial machinery 18,753.01 3,569.30 1.45 19 Construction(infrastructure) activities 16,924.88 3,264.96 1.33 20 Cement and gypsum products 14,629.79 3,086.32 1.25 21 Hospital and diagnostic centers 15,424.26 2,932.17 1.19 22 Consultancy services 13,982.21 2,798.45 1.14 23 Fermentation industries 11,657.67 2,187.33 0.89 24 Rubber goods 9,642.98 1,754.55 0.71 25 Agriculture services 8,636.38 1,745.83 0.71 26 Mining 8,466.79 1,669.49 0.68 27 Ports 6,730.91 1,637.30 0.66 Continue 28 Textiles(including dyed and printed 7,786.84 1,568.01 0.64 29 Sea transport 7,449.32 1,514.40 0.61 30 Electronics 6,795.56 1,424.32 0.58 31 Prime mover(other than electrical generator) 6,310.04 1,202.57 0.49 32 Education 5,717.84 1,082.47 0.44 33 Medical and surgical appliances 4,846.02 925.45 0.38 34 Paper and pulp(including paper products) 4,328.54 910.49 0.37 35 Soaps, cosmetics and toilet preparations 4,713.62 894.45 0.36 36 Machine tools 3,539.68 716.03 0.29 37 Ceramics 3,330.05 700.89 0.28 38 Diamond and gold ornaments 3,609.81 682.79 0.28 39 Railway related components 3,426.40 634.27 0.26 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 168 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 40 Air transport(including air freight) 2,762.57 569.44 0.23 41 Vegetable oils and vanaspati 2,896.93 547.42 0.22 42 Fertilizers 2,915.62 543.14 0.22 FDI CONTRIBUTION IN INDIAN GDP We can classify the effects as direct and indirect effect of FDI on any economy, similarly in Indian context the direct contribution of FDI has been in balance of payments and technology transfer etc. however the generally disregarded effect of FDI is indirect effect. The foreign direct investment can be regarded as inflow of capital. It can be explained by the use of Keynesian multiplier concept where here, Y is national income and I is investment, explanation: if an investment of $100 is done, then the labor employed would earn $100 and consume say $80 on goods by purchasing it from certain person now this person earns $80 and similarly decides to purchase an item worth $64 from another person then this person earns $64 and story goes on until $0 is left to spend further, the total income generated here will be not be equal to $100 instead it will be 100+80+64… this concept is called the multiplier effect. Though this theory has its short comings never the less it is gives an effective explanation. FDI contributes more to the economy this way and hence it becomes more important to understand its indirect effect, though direct effects should not be underestimated. Never the less, the cluster of points in the below given graph can be explained by the initial phase of opening of the Indian economy this part of the graph signifies that initially the growth of GDP was not increasing as rapidly in later phases also one can observe that FDI inflow did not follow a similar trend and continuously increased with a few exceptions at the time of global slowdown indicating its sensitivity. The below given data is does not throw any light on the indirect or multiplier effect of FDI in India though it is relevant. FDI inflows, GDP FDI Growth GDP Growth FDI as a and FDI/GDP ratio in inflow rate of rate of % of India(1991-92 to 2011- in rupee FDI GDP(%) GDP 12) years crores inflow(%) 1991-92 409 0 1099072 0 0.037213 1992-93 1094 167.4817 1158025 5.363889 0.094471 1993-94 2018 84.46069 1223816 5.681311 0.164894 1994-95 4312 113.6769 1302076 6.394752 0.331163 1995-96 6916 60.38961 1396974 7.288207 0.49507 1996-97 9654 39.58936 1508378 7.974665 0.640025 1997-98 13548 40.33561 1573263 4.301641 0.86114 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 169 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 1998-99 12343 -8.8943 1678410 6.683371 0.735398 1999-00 10311 -16.4628 1786525 6.441513 0.577154 2000-01 12645 22.63602 1864301 4.35348 0.67827 2001-02 19361 53.1119 1972606 5.809416 0.981494 2002-03 14932 -22.8759 2048286 3.836549 0.729 2003-04 12117 -18.8521 2222758 8.517951 0.545134 2004-05 17138 41.43765 2388768 7.468649 0.717441 2005-06 24613 43.61652 3254216 36.22989 0.756342 2006-07 70630 186.9622 3566011 9.581263 1.980644 2007-08 98664 39.69135 3898958 9.336679 2.530522 2008-09 122919 24.58343 4162509 6.759524 2.953003 2009-10 123378 0.373417 4493743 7.957556 2.745551 CONCLUSION India certainly can be considered as an emerging economic power and FDI has contributed to its growth in multidimensional way to it, but as far as the employment generation is considered there is yet to be methodology developed to establish a concrete relation between the two. We tried to establish a linier relation using OLS but the correlation coefficient was too low i.e. 0.65 which cannot be considered any good so we leave it at that. But as far as the relation between GDP growth and employment generation is concerned, we can be sure that there is a positive relation with decreasing rate of growth of labor employment, capital intensive technology is now taking up the major role as growth engine in India and there is expected to further reduction in elasticity of employment. We can also conclude from our study that agriculture sector though not contributing much to GDP might work wonders if capital intensive technology is provided this sector, it is not a surprise that manufacturing and service sector of India are on the rise and are likely to attract more investment and intellect from the world but since India skipped the traditional phase where it was suppose to have rise in manufacturing sector before the service sector it just might work fine as now the manufacturing sector is looking stronger than before. FDI in all these sectors clearly reflects the confidence of international community on the ability of growth and incentive that it is likely to give. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 170 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology REFERENCES 1. Kavaljit Singh (1996),The Reality of Foreign Investment: German Investments in India, Madhyam Books. 2. Ghosh (2004)Capital Inflows and Investment in Developing Countries, ILO EmploymentStrategy Papers, Geneva, ILO, 2004. 3. Nenadstanisic (2008), do foreign direct investments increase the economic growth of south-eastern European Transition economies? South-Eastern Europe Journal of Economics, 29-38, 1. 4. Eswar Prasad, RaghuramRajan, and Arvind Subramanian (2006), Foreign Capital and Economic Growth, Research Department IMF. 5. Narayan Sethi (2007), Economic reforms, Capital flows andmacro economic impact on India. 6. Deepak Mohanty(2011), Global capital flows and the Indian economy – opportunities and challenges. 7. Narayan Sethi (2007), International financial flows on India‟s economic growth – in view of changing financial market scenario, The Indian Journal of Economics, 38. 8. Azeem, A.K. and P. Suhalia, 2014. Global FDI inflows in India: An analysis. International Journal of Interdisciplinary Research and Innovations, 2(4): 74-87. 9. Birch, D.L., 1987. Job creation in America: How our smallest companies put the most people to work. New York: Free Press. 10. Chen, C., C. Lawrence and Z. Yimin, 1995. The role of foreign direct investment in China in post-1978 economic development. World Development, 23(4): 691-703. 11. Choudhaury, R.B., K.P. Pyne and R.A. Chowdhury, 2013. Determinants of manufacturing FDI in India: A sectoral analysis. Journal of Industrial Statistics, 2(2): 217-231. 12. Neeraj, A., 2015. Foreign direct investment and its impact on employment in agriculture sector of Indian economy. HCTL Open International Journal of Technology Innovations and Research (IJTIR), 14: 1-9. 13. Reserve Bank of India, Handbook of statistics on the Indian Economy -2012-13 14. Economic Survey 2012-13Statistical Appendix 15. Indian Financial Markets – Roadmap 2020, PWC. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 171 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology IMPACT OF CAPITAL MARKET REFORMS ON INDIAN STOCK MARKET – PRE AND POST GLOBALISATION AKULA SRIINIVAS Research Scholar, Department of Commerce, Rayalaseema University, Kurnool. Mail Id: [email protected], Mobile No: 9949903232. ABSTRACT This paper discusses about the Indian capital market reforms and its relationship with the Indian stock market is of great significance from the point of view of growth and development of the Indian economy. Pre- globalization capital market reforms did not have major positive impacts on the volatility, liquidity and various other economic indicators of the stock market. However, the post- globalization reforms led to a marked improvement for the stock market development which has led to the economic growth in India and the relationship between them have proved to be long term as well as beneficial to the Indian economy. The paper aims to identify all the capital market reforms since globalization (1991) in India and seeks to determine the impact of these reforms and the direction of the impact of these reforms (viz. positive or negative) on the efficiency, volatility, liquidity and market capitalization in context to the Indian stock market. KEY WORDS: Capital markets, Globalization, Liquidity, Market Capitalization, Reforms. INTRODUCTION Capital market is a market where buyers and sellers engage in trade of financial securities like bonds, stocks, etc. The buying or selling is undertaken by participants such as individuals and institutions. Capital markets help channelize surplus funds from savers to institutions which then invest them into productive use. After Independence the capital market in India progressed remarkably. The first organized stock exchange was established in India at Bombay in 1887. When the Securities Contracts (Regulation) Act 1956 was passed, only 7 Stock exchanges i.e. Mumbai, Ahmadabad, Kolkata, Chennai, Delhi, Hyderabad and Indore received recognition. By the end of March 2004, the number of stock exchanges increased to 23. After liberalization policies of 1991 and the abolition of capital issues control with effect from May 29 1992, the primary market got a tremendous boost with new Capital Issues by Private Sector, increase in issue of Public Sector Bonds and Mutual Funds. Financial Intermediaries are the latest trend in Indian Capital Market and play an important role in field of venture capital, credit rating etc. There have been a large number of recent reforms introduced in the Indian Capital Market and the Government has taken several measures to develop capital market in post-reform period, with which the capital market reached new heights. Some of the important measures including the setting up of the Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI) and National Stock Exchange (NSE), Dematerializations of Shares, Screen Based Trading, Investor Protection and Rolling, Settlement. Setting up of The Clearing Corporation of India Limited (CCIL) and The National Securities Clearing Corporation Limited (NSCL)as well as Trading in Central Government Securities, setting up of Credit Rating Agencies, Accessing Global Funds Market etc. changed the face of the Indian stock market and triggered it‘s growth and expansion. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 172 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology The paper aims to identify all the capital market reforms since globalization (1991) in India and seeks to determine the impact of these reforms and the direction of the impact of these reforms (viz. positive or negative) on the efficiency, volatility, liquidity and market capitalization in context to the Indian stock market. Since globalization, the Government has introduced a variety of capital market reforms with a vision to improve the working and size of the Indian stock market and a mission to attribute the positive implementation of these reforms to the increased growth of the Indian economy. However, all the reforms have not been able to successfully fulfil the purpose with which they were initiated and implemented in the first place. Thus the problem which needs specific attention is that whether the reforms have truly led to the increased growth of the Indian economy or is the change attributed to various other factors which affect the functioning of the stock market. REVIEW OF LITERATURE Mohan (2005) conducted a research to evaluate the financial system and its performance after the reforms. He indicates that most of the reforms took place in the securities market, with a high SLR ratio increasing its market and steps to increase the transparency of the market were taken as well. The insurance sector, mutual funds welcomed new participants and the Institutional Investors were also welcomed and they enjoy capital convertibility. Ramaratnam and Jayaraman(2012) have investigated the changes in the capital market with respect to industry, size region, sector vise classification of equity capital, and foreign investment inflows in the stock market. Reforms have attracted foreign and domestic institutional investors. The foreign investment inflow also had a drastic change in these years. Therefore, the changes brought about by globalization have mobilized funds for investment and created a link between the investors and industrialists. Goel and Gupta (2011) study the impact of globalization and its reforms on stock market, through measures of stock market size, liquidity and volatility. They used ratio analysis technique and found that MCR and liquidity ratios are increasing whereas volatility is said to decrease annually. The correlation between turnover ratio and value traded ratio is as high as 0.8 whereas the other measures don‘t show much correlation. Thus, the primary and secondary markets have grown due to reforms since 1991. RESEARCH METHODOLOGY OBJECTIVES: The objectives are: To identify the reforms of the Indian government on the Indian capital market since 1991 To determine the impact of these reforms on the Indian capital market To determine if the reforms had a positive or negative impact on the Indian economy through the Indian capital market. RESEARCH PERIOD The research period is 1991-2012.Data about the reforms, market size, volatility and liquidity obtained from the Handbook of Statistics on the Indian Securities Market, Handbook of Statistics on Indian Economy, and Handbook of Statistics on Indian Securities market) along with various research journals, periodicals and websites (SEBI Annual Report). Questionnaire and Interview method was also used which helped provide the direct views, ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 173 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology opinions and feedback regarding the economic scenario since the implementation of the reforms. 3.3. Operational Definitions: 3.3.1 Capital market: Market for lending and borrowing of medium and long term reserves where interest for long term funds originates from industry, exchange, agriculture and government. The supply of funds originates from individual savers, corporate funds, banks, insurance agencies, specialized financial institutions and government. 3.3.2 Market capitalization: Market capitalization (market cap) is the aggregate valuation of the company based on its current share price and total number of outstanding stocks. The formula being: Market Capitalization = Current Stock Price x Shares Outstanding Market capitalization mirrors the hypothetical expense of purchasing the majority of an organization's shares, however more often than not will be not what the organization could be bought for in a typical merger exchange. To gauge what it would cost for a financial specialist to purchase an organization by and large, the enterprise value calculation is more proper. Along these lines market capitalization is a superior measure of size than worth. That is, business sector capitalization is not the same as business quality, which can for the most part just be appointed when the organization is really sold. 3.3.3 Volatility: Volatility is a measure for variation of price of a financial instrument over time. Historic volatility is derived from time series of past market prices. An implied volatility is derived from the market price of a market traded derivative (in particular an option). 3.3.4 Liquidity: Liquidity is the term used to describe how easy it is to convert assets to cash. The most liquid asset, and what everything else is compared to, is cash. This is because it can always be used easily and immediately. In the market, liquidity has a somewhat diverse significance, albeit still tied to how effortlessly resources, for this situation, shares of stock, can be changed over to money. The business sector for a stock is said to be fluid if the shares can be quickly sold and the act of selling has little effect on the stock's cost. By and large, this translates to where the shares are exchanged and the level of premium that financial specialists have in the organization. Company stock traded on the significant trades can generally be viewed as fluid. Regularly, nearly 1% of the float trade hands day by day, demonstrating a high level of enthusiasm for the stock. Then again, company organization stock exchanged on the pink sheets or over the counter is frequently non-fluid, with not very many, even zero, shares exchanged every day. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 174 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology DATA ANALYSIS TABLE 1: MARKET CAPITALIZATION Market Capitalization M CR Year (Crore) % 1992-93 188146 25.1 1993-94 368071 42.8 1994-95 435481 46.3 1995-96 526476 47.5 1996-97 463915 36.9 1997-98 560325 41.4 1998-99 545361 35.6 1999-00 912842 47.1 2000-01 571553 27.4 2001-02 612224 26.9 2002-03 572198 23.2 2003-04 1210207 43.5 2004-05 1698428 54.7 2005-06 3022191 84.4 2006-07 3545041 85.5 2007-08 5138014 109.5 2008-09 3086075 55.3 2009-10 6165619 95.5 2010-11 6839084 87.7 2011-12 6214941 69.2 Market Capitalization has risen by 30 times over this period. 1990s saw a large increase in market capitalization mainly due to greater participation by individuals and institutional investors in the capital market. Foreign institutional investors (FII) have been allowed to invest in the Indian capital market since September 1992. The highest contribution to GDP was in 2007-08 with MCR being 109.5%. TABLE 2: VALUE TRADED RATIO AND TURNOVER RATIO Total value % change in Turnover Market Cap Year VTR traded (crores) value traded Ratio (crore) 1992-93 45696 6.1 -36.333491 24.2875214 188146 1993-94 84536 9.8 84.9964986 22.9673079 368071 1994-95 67749 6.7 -19.857812 15.5572803 435481 1995-96 50064 4.2 -26.103706 9.50926538 526476 1996-97 124190 9.1 148.06248 26.7699902 463915 1997-98 207113 13.6 66.7710766 36.9630125 560325 1998-99 310750 17.8 50.0388677 56.9806055 545361 1999-00 686428 35.4 120.893966 75.196803 912842 2000-01 1000032 47.9 45.6863648 174.967501 571553 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 175 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 2001-02 307292 13.5 -69.271783 50.1927399 612224 2002-03 314073 12.7 2.20669591 54.8888671 572198 2003-04 503053 18.2 60.1707246 41.567517 1210207 2004-05 518715 16 3.11338964 30.5408884 1698428 2005-06 816074 22.1 57.3260847 27.0027275 3022191 2006-07 956185 22.3 17.1689087 26.9724666 3545041 2007-08 1578857 31.7 65.1204526 30.7289353 5138014 2008-09 1100074 19.7 -30.324659 35.6463793 3086075 2009-10 1378809 21 25.3378409 22.3628641 6165619 2010-11 1105027 15.2 -19.856412 16.1575293 6839084 2011-12 2810893 8 154.373242 45.2279917 6214941 Total value traded has risen by more than 60 times from 1992 to 2012. It doubled from 1990-91 to 1991-92 and fell by 36% in 1992-1993. The total value traded rises in the late 1900s and falls sharply in 2001. The Value traded ratio has moved from 6.1% at the time of liberalization to 48% in 2000, which is the highest in all these years. It fluctuates from 2001 onwards. There were maximum activities in the market during 2000-2001. The turnover ratio has increased from 24% in 1992 to 45% in 2012. The highest turnover ratio is 175% which occurred in 2000-2001, the same period in which VTR was at its maximum. This shows high correlation between the two measures. TABLE 3: VOLATILITY Volatility (BSE SENSEX) Year 1992 3.3 1993 1.8 1994 1.4 1995 1.3 1996 1.5 1997 1.6 1998 1.9 1999 1.8 2000 2.2 2001 1.7 2002 1.1 2003 1.2 2004 1.6 2005 1.1 2006 1.6 2007 1.5 2008 2.8 2009 2.2 2010 1 2011 1.3 2012 1.3 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 176 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology *Volatility is the standard deviation of daily logarithmic returns for the respective period. Source: BSE The average volatility over this period is 1.61%. The volatility is 3.3 at the beginning of the period. This high volatility may be due to balance of payments problems and the changes due to initiation of liberalization. The data does not show any significant pattern in volatility with respect to increase or decrease on a year to year basis. But, if we divide the years into sub groups, the data does show decrease from one sub group to the next (Goel & Gupta, 2011). TABLE 4: PRE AND POST GLOBALIZATION MARKET CAPITALIZATION Pre Liberalization Market Cap Post Market Cap (crores) Liberalization (crores) YEAR X1 YEAR X2 1982-83 9769 1992-93 188146 1983-84 10219 1993-94 368071 1984-85 20378 1994-95 435481 1985-86 21636 1995-96 526476 1986-87 25937 1996-97 463915 1987-88 45519 1997-98 560325 1988-89 54560 1998-99 545361 1989-90 65206 1999-00 912842 1990-91 90836 2000-01 571553 1991-92 323363 2001-02 612224 Average 66742.3 518439.4 Standard 93882.9216 185972.8689 Deviation CONCLUSION By observing the research, there has been significant improvement in the stock market after globalization and the establishment of SEBI and its reforms. Stock market development and economic development are inter-related and have a positive impact on each other. 1. Liberalization of the securities market has contributed to its development and also towards the Indian Economy. 2. Market Capitalization Ratio, Total Value Traded Ratio and Turnover Ratio have increased tremendously, post liberalization. Over the period 1992-2012, the average VTR is 17.55% and Turnover ratio is 41.22%. 3. Correlation coefficient for VTR and Turnover Ratio is 0.8 (Goel & Gupta, 2011). The market size and volatility also shows a correlation of -0.4. The liquidity indicators are having high positive correlation. 4. Volatility does not show any particular trend but it‘s at its highest (3.3) at the beginning of the period. This can be attributed to the fluctuations arising from initiation of Foreign Investment Inflows in 1992. Some studies say that volatility infect increases due to liberalization while others prove the opposite. Thus volatility shows mixed trends. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 177 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology 5. FII has affected market size and liquidity but doesn‘t have a significant impact on volatility. There was outflow of FPI during 1998-89 and 2008-09. FDI is preferred to FPI and they both show positive correlation towards Sensex and Nifty. FDI however, has a much higher correlation. 6. ADRs or GDRs are the highest during 2007-08, at $6645 million. They were $240 million in 1992 but have gone down to $187 in 2012. There is both increasing and decreasing trends over the period. 7. The hypothesis tested shows significant increase in market capitalization after liberalization. Other studies conducted have proven hypothesis that stock market development causes economic growth and there exists a long term relationship between them. REFERENCES 1. Mohan, D. R. (2005, February). Financial Sector Reforms in India. The Chartered Accountant, 962-972. 2. Jayaraman, R., & Ramaratnam, M. (2012, January). A Study Of Impact Of Globalisation For The Recent Development Of Indian Capital Market: An Analytical Approach. International Journal of Multidisciplinary Research, 2(1), 435-446. 3. Goel, K., & Gupta, R. (2011, January-June). Impact Of Globalization On Stock Market Development In India. Delhi Business Review, 12, 69-84. 4. Agarwalla, R. K., & Tuteja, S. (2007, December). Causality Between Stock Market Development and Economic Growth: A Case Study Of India. Journal of Management Research, 7, 158-168. 5. Handbook of Statistics on Indian Economy. 6. Handbook of Statistics on Indian Securities Market. 7. SEBI Annual Report 2014. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 178 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology UTILIZATION AND MECHANICAL TESTING OF SCRAPED GLASS POWDER LOADED WITH GFRP COMPOSITES LOKESH K.S Assistant Professor, Department of Mechanical Engineering, Srinivas Institute of Technology,Valachil, Mangaluru, Karnataka State, India – 574143 ABSTRACT Composite material has been used in india for last few years. The production of unsaturated polymer resin has started in 1962 and of glass fibres in 1965, preparing foundation for growth of composites in India. Polymer composites are gaining popularity due to their high strength, cost effectiveness and reduced weight. E-waste management is one of the difficult tasks in present scenario. This project deals with the utilization of e-waste as filler material. In the present work, composites were fabricated using Epoxy resin as matrix, glass fibre as reinforcement and e-waste as filler. Composites with different filler ratio (0%, 3%, 6%, 9%) are prepared. Tests were performed to calculate tensile properties, flexural strength of the composites. Based on the tensile and flexural test it is depicted that composite with 6% filler material exhibits enhanced properties due to the strong bonding between filler and the matrix material. KEYWORDS: E Waste, E Glass/Epoxy Composites, Tensile & Flexural Behaviour. INTRODUCTION A composite material is a heterogeneous solid consisting of two or more different materials that are mechanically or metallurgic-ally bonded together. The word ―composite‖ means, ―consisting of two or more distinct parts.‖ Thus, a material having two or more distinct constituent materials or phases may be considered a composite material. Composite materials emerge as a promising alternative to correct the deficiencies caused by steel reinforcement in concrete structures [1-5]. It is only when the constituent phases have significantly different physical properties and thus the composite properties are noticeably different from the constituent properties that we have come to recognize these materials as composites. The constituents are combined at a macroscopic level and are not soluble in each other. Each of the various constituents retains its identity in the composite and maintains its characteristic structure and properties. There are recognizable interfaces between the materials. One constituent is called the reinforcing phase and the one in which it is embedded is called the matrix. The reinforcing phase material may be in the form of fibers, particles and flakes. The composite material, however, generally possesses characteristic properties such as high strength-to-weight ratio, high stiffness-to-weight ratio, high temperature performance, corrosion resistance and hardness, which are not possible to obtain with the individual components. FABRICATION OF SPECIMENS The aim of this project is to study the structural and dynamic properties and strength of composite material (E-waste reinforced). These composite specimens were prepared by Hand lay-up technique, as it is relatively cheaper and convenient method of composite preparation, when compared to other fabrication method. The tensile, hardness and 3 point bending tests were carried out in a universal testing machine. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 179 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology Following are the types of materials used: Fibre- E-glass 360 GSM Bidirectional Resin- Epoxy (LY556). System- Polymer matrix composite. Type of fabrication-Hand layup technique. Filler material - E-wastes (powdered to 85 micron). A. METHODOLOGY FILLER POWDER PREPARATION: Computer monitor is taken and parts containing plastic content are removed. They are broken into smaller pieces. These pieces are scraped into fibre like structure. These fibre like structure are made into powder using mixer grinder. Then finally it is sieved using 85 micron siever. FIGURE 1:- FILLER POWDER PREPARATION FIGURE 2:- SPECIMEN PREPARATION ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 180 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology SPECIMEN PREPARATION: By choosing an appropriate proportion of epoxy resin and E- glass fibres, composites specimens of having length and breadth of 250mm has been prepared which is as shown in fig.2. The specimens are cut as per the ASTM standards. EXPERIMENTAL METHOD A. TENSILE STRENGTH TESTING The tensile test is generally performed on flat specimens. The commonly used specimens for tensile test are the straight side type. The tensile experiments were performed according to ASTM standard. The specimens that were produced from glass fibre reinforced epoxy with the layup. A universal testing machine was used for the tests. The top end of the specimen was fixed by the grips on the top cross-head of the machine while the bottom end was not fixed before applying the load. A slotted steel plate was placed between the top of the bottom anchor and the bottom of the middle cross-head. When the specimen was loaded, this plate engaged the bottom anchor: The load was applied at a constant speed of 5mm/min until the failure of the specimen. FIGURE 3 : - UTM SETUP FOR TENSILE TEST FLEXURAL TEST The short beam shear (SBS) tests are performed on the composite samples at room temperature to evaluate the value of flexural strength (FS). It is a 3-point bend test, which generally promotes failure by inter-laminar shear. FIGURE 4;-UTM SETUP FOR BENDING TEST ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 181 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology The SBS test is conducted as per ASTM standard D790 using the same UTM. The load was applied at a constant speed of 1mm/min until the failure of the specimen RESULTS & DISCUSSIONS The composites filled with 3%, 6%, 9% filler were tested using universal testing machine and Rockwell hardness machine. Flexural strength were determined using 3-point bending and stress v/s %strain graph was plotted. The load was applied up to the point of fracture. The behavior of defected composites was obtained from the stress v/s %strain graphs. It was observed that the composite having filler ratio of 6% shows higher tensile strength. This shows that flexural strength increases with increasing the filler ratio of the composites. The results and graphs are listed below A. RESULTS OF TENSILE TEST FIGURE 5 STRESS V/S %STRAIN FOR COMPOSITE WITH 0% FILLER FIGURE 6 STRESS V/S %STRAIN FOR COMPOSITE WITH 3% FILLER ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 182 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology FIGURE 9 STRESS V/S %STRAIN FOR FIGURE 6 STRESS V/S %STRAIN COMPOSITE WITH 3% FOR COMPOSITE WITH 6% FILLER FILLER FIGURE 7 STRESS V/S %STRAIN FOR COMPOSITE WITH 9% FILLER FIGURE 10 STRESS V/S %STRAIN FOR COMPOSITE WITH 6% FILLE ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 183 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology FIGURE 8 STRESS V/S %STRAIN FOR COMPOSITE WITH 0% FILLE FIGURE 11 STRESS V/S %STRAIN FOR COMPOSITE WITH 9% FILLER CONCLUSIONS The e-waste reinforced polymer composite were prepared in the laboratory at different filler ratios of 3%, 6%, 9%. The main outcome of the present investigation are as follows: Effect of filler content in glass fibre composites seems to play significant role in assessing material behaviour under tensile loading conditions. From the experimental results it can be concluded that e-waste can be recycled successfully by using it has filler in polymer composites. As the ratio of filler material increases the flexural strength. The composite containing 6% filler shows higher modulus of elasticity. REFERENCES 1. Burgoyne C, editor. Non-metallic reinforcement for concrete structures—FRPRCS-5. In: Proceedings of International Conference, Cambridge UK. 2. Cosenza E, Manfredi G, Nanni A, editors. Composites in construction: a reality. Proceedings of International Workshop, Capri, Italy. Reston, VA: ASCE; 2001. p. 277 3. Figueiras J, Juvandes L, Furia R, editors. Composites in construction.Proceedings of CCC 2001, Porto, Portugal. 4. Lopez-Anido R, Karbhari VM. Fibre reinforced composites in civil infrastructure. In: Emerging materials for civil infrastructure, state-ofthe art. Reston, VA: ASCE; 2000 pp. 41–78 5. Nanni A, editor. Fibre-reinforced-plastic (FRP) reinforcement for concrete structures: properties and applications. Developments in civil engineering, vol. 42. Amsterdam: Elsevier;1993. 6. ASTM D3039/D3039:M-00e1 Standard test method for tensile properties of polymer matrix composite materials. ASTM International, 100 Barr Harbours Drive, P.O. Box C700, West Conshohocken PA 19428-2959, USA. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 184 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology CBSRP ROUTING PROTOCOL FOR SECURE AND EFFICIENT DATA COMMUNICATION FOR CLUSTER BASED WIRELESS SENSOR NETWORK 1 Dr.T.LALITHA Asso.Prof,Master of Computer Applications, Sona College of Technology, 2 DEVAN M Department of MCA, Sona College of Technology, Salem, Tamil Nadu, India MOHAN DAS R Department of MCA, Sona College of Technology, Salem, Tamil Nadu, India ABSTRACT Wireless Sensor Network (WSN) is a collection of nodes which are deployed in an environment where the data is needed to be sensed to monitor any changes in surrounding. Each nodes are equipped with memory, battery, transceivers. The nodes are placed in such an environment where monitoring by human is difficult to schedule or managed efficiently by individual. Each node is responsible for manipulating the data it has sensed and transferring it to the Base Station (BS). These nodes are grouped into clusters so that the drainage of battery in wireless sensor network can be overcome and increase the scalability. In each cluster there is a Cluster Head (CH) which acts as a leader of the cluster and is responsible for gathering all the manipulated data from the each nodes in the cluster and transferring it to the Base Station. There is a need of secure and efficient transmission of data in cluster based WSN (CWSN) which will be discussed. The existing method uses genetic leach to make energy efficiency in sensor network. We have proposed a protocol called CBSRP which mainly focuses on the security of the data to be transmitted and confidentiality of data is provided through RSA algorithm, a well known cryptographic technique for secure data transmission. KEYWORDS: Cluster, CWSN, Cluster Head, CBSRP- Cluster Based Secure Routing Protocol, RSA. INTRODUCTION The structuring of a network is one of the main tools to save energy in each network node. In sensor networks there are two types of architecture for networks, flat architecture that constitutes a homogeneous network where all nodes have the same in terms energy resources, calculation and memory, and another hierarchical architecture where all nodes do not have the same roles and therefore the same resources. Being given that the main purpose of a routing protocol for WSN is the proper and efficient development of routes between a pair of nodes so that messages can be routed, why multiple routing protocols (Hierarchical Protocols, Flat protocols) have been developed these last year‘s. The comparison studied between the flat and hierarchical structure at the energy consumption level shows that the hierarchical architecture has more advantage than the flat architecture, namely: well-structured network, easy network management, less power consumption, high lifetime, unless the message circulating on networks and the flood problem is avoided. In the other hierarchical structure there are two main approaches are derived from these protocols: cluster-based approach and chain–based approach: a) Cluster-based approach: The node is organized in cluster, each cluster have his leader to transmit a data to the base station. b) Chain–based approach: The node is organized in a chain to send the data to the base station. In WSN, Both clustering and secure route detection enhance efficiency in routing is necessary. Our major work is focused on stable clustering and routing method with security added for efficient and secure data transmission among the cluster nodes. Stability and reliability of cluster-based approach depend on quality of cluster head and gateway nodes. Cluster formation and secure route detection play inevitable roles in WSN. Thus motivation of CBSRP is: Cluster formation and selection of stable, reliable cluster heads to reduce routing overheads. Detection of a secure set of routes in the cluster based environment and selecting the final secure route containing nodes with the highest weight values to reach the destination This Paper is organized as follows: Concepts or works related is presented in section 2. In section 3, Existing system model is discussed. Section 4 presents the proposed protocols. Section 5 represents the conclusion of paper. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 185 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology RELATED WORKS In wireless sensor networks, the consumption of energy increases more than the lifetime of the networks decreases, this is why the increase of the lifetime of the networks requires a strategy which reduces the power consumption of the transmission or reception of data by the sensor nodes. In recent years much research has been done to maximize a life time of network sensor. To deal with this, the hierarchical protocols (Cluster based- approach) have been developed in order to reduce the network traffic toward the sink and therefore prolong the network lifetime. Here an analysis of base energy-efficient cluster-based approach namely LEACH (Low Energy Adaptive Clustering Hierarchy Protocol) has been made so as to make improvisation over LEACH protocol. Our method is to conserve energy consumption when transmitting data to the Base Station (BS). Our approach it based to improvement the algorithm LEACH protocol, exactly to minimize a distance between BS and cluster head and minimized number of dead nods far than BS. The method here consists to locating the select cluster heads of the nodes that are far from BS at half the topology of the network[2]. A WSN is a special type of network. It shares some commonalities with a typical computer network, but also exhibits many characteristics which are unique to it. The security services in a WSN should protect the information communicated over the network and the resources from attacks and misbehavior of nodes. Applications of WSNs are numerous and growing, However, due to distributed nature and their deployment in remote areas, these networks are vulnerable to numerous security threats that can adversely affect their performance. Due to resource constraints in the sensor nodes, traditional security mechanisms with large overhead of computation and communication are infeasible in WSNs. Design and implementation of secure WSNs is, therefore, a particularly challenging task. This paper provides a comprehensive discussion on the state of the art in security technologies for WSNs. It identifies various possible attacks at different layers of the communication protocol stack in a typical WSN and presents their possible countermeasures[3]. Key Management is a major challenge to achieve security in wireless sensor networks. In most of the schemes presented for key management in wireless sensor networks, it is assumed that the sensor nodes have the same capability. The recent research has shown that the survivability of the network can be improved if sensor nodes are grouped in clusters in which a powerful cluster head assigned. However, to gain advantages of clustering in order to find an efficient key management scheme needs more research. In this paper, we investigate the key management in cluster based wireless sensor networks using both private and public key cryptography. Our goal is to introduce a platform in which public key cryptography is used to establish a secure link between sensor nodes and gateways. Instead of preloading a large number of keys into the sensor nodes, each node requests a session key from the gateway to establish a secure link with its neighbors after clustering phase[4]. Standards of IEEE 802 ease the deployment of networking infrastructures and provides employers to access corporate networks while travelling or visiting. These standards provide two modes of communication called infrastructure and ad hoc modes. At present Wireless network has been deployed worldwide, but some security issues in wireless network might have prevented its further acceptance. IEEE 802.1X specification is one of the solutions to overcome the limitation of wireless network security, a technique for port-based network handover control, which is based on Rivest, Shamir and Adleman(RAS). It is an authentication framework that can support public-key cryptography. RAS algorithm involves three steps: key generation, password based encryption, decryption between base stations and it is flexible in its implementation. Thus, it might be possible to use RSA as a generic authentication mechanism in various wireless networks including ad hoc network. This paper describes Wireless network scenario we must have improve Performance, Security, Usability in wireless network on base stations using proposed algorithm with RSA cryptography based algorithm[5]. Designing and developing a well organized energy efficient estimation with secure based network protocol plays most important considerable responsibility in Wireless sensor networks, since of less communication energy and less availability of resources in WSN. In order to performs this process first need to evaluate the energy for each nodes in WSN and find misbehavior nodes in the WSN ,in order to hand this difficulty problem in this work initially first estimate the energy values of each nodes using evolutionary based clustering methods in the WSN .After that performs secure source based RSA encryption schema methods to identify unauthorized nodes in the WSN ,without performing communication process between one nodes to another nodes in the WSN once misbehavior nodes identified then perform key management and cryptographic process using RSA encryption. WSNs that are significantly reduce the amount of message communication desirable designed for rekeying to stay away beginning hard keys. Experimentation results measures the performance of proposed system along with energy utilization of the system under usual procedure and discover malicious nodes in wireless sensor network[6]. Due to wireless nature of sensor network, secure data transmission is a major issue for wireless sensor network. Clustering is a technique which increases network lifetime and reduces power consumption of sensor nodes in WSN. In this paper, we study an authenticative way to data transmission for cluster based WSN. We propose two protocols for authentication of data, those are secure and efficient data transmission protocols SET- IBS and SET-IBOOS, by using identity-based digital signature (IBS) scheme and identity-based online and offline digital signature (IBOOS) scheme. This protocol relies on ID-based cryptography. SETIBOOS further ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 186 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology minimize the computational overhead. Our result show that performance of proposed protocols are better than existing secure protocols[7]. EXISTING SYSTEM The structuring of a network is one of the main tools to save energy in each network node. Energy can be efficiently used up to some level in one of the hierarchy routing protocol that is Low Energy Adaptive Clustering Hierarchy (LEACH). LEACH protocol is based on grouping techniques and also efficient routing protocol for WSN. The nodes in the network area of LEACH are considered as local clusters. Genetic Algorithm Based Improvisation of LEACH protocol has been made in the existing method. Here, first analyzed the basic operations involved in LEACH and then it is optimized using Genetic Algorithm (GA) to extend the life time of WSN. Genetic LEACH increases the living time of the WSN compared with LEACH, and also the inter cluster communication in LEACH reduces energy consumption by the nodes significantly and the living period of WSN is increased compared with LEACH and with Genetic LEACH[1]. DISADVANTAGES Security consideration on the data transmission is not made and Optimal method of increased energy efficiency is given whereas, network overhead is not satisfied. PROPOSED SYSTEM A WSN is a special type of network. It shares some commonalities with a typical computer network, but also exhibits many characteristics which are unique to it. The security services in a WSN should protect the information communicated over the network. Routing overheads and security are the main challenges of Wireless Sensor Network. The idea behind clustering is to group network nodes into a number of disjoint or overlapping clusters. Cluster-heads of the clusters take an active role in routing messages between a source destination pair. The Proposed work is the implementation of an efficient protocol CBSRP (Cluster Based Secure Routing Protocol) which is a cluster based approach to decrease the routing overheads as CBSRP elects most reliable and stable node as cluster head and concerns on secure data transmission applying Shamir's secret sharing method. For message encryption and decryption the proposed protocol uses RSA-CRT algorithm. In this CBSRP Confidentiality of the transmitted data is maintained by encrypting the data with RSA. Mitigation of all the other security threats like packet loss or loss of data integrity is achieved by detecting the secure set of routes and finding the final secure route with highest average weight value. CBSRP Cluster based network is considered. Here two clusters have been formed with different number of nodes. Each cluster have leader to transmit a data to the base station. The Leader of the cluster is called Cluster Head. The Efficiency of the cluster based network relies mainly on the cluster head selection. Cluster-heads of the clusters take an active role in routing messages between a source destination pair. The cluster formation and the cluster head selection is made by using CBSRP (Cluster Based Secure Routing Protocol). CBSRP elects most reliable and stable node as cluster head. An arbitrary node Ii as the initiator node broadcasts NEIGHBOR_REQUEST message to all the adjacent nodes within one hop distance. They reply back an ACK to the initiator node. After receiving ACK messages, initiator node stores all information of those nodes in its neighbor list and selects one of them as MONITOR whose ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 187 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology current trust value is the maximum. The MONITOR informs the initiator node about status and weight of initiator node. This way weight and status of all nodes are initialized. Next, the cluster formation phase begins. In this phase, any node Ni acts as the initiator node and broadcasts the FIND_NEIGHBOR message to all the nodes at one hop distance. Those nodes in turn forward the message to the nodes at one-hop distance from them. Now, a cluster is formed with all the nodes that reply back ACK within a two-hop distance from the initiator, in a given time interval t. In CBSRP, the dominating node with the highest weight value is declared as the cluster head CH by the initiator Ii[10]. RSA RSA makes use of an expression with exponentials. Plaintext is encrypted in blocks, with each block having a binary value less than some integer n. That is, the block size must be less or equal to log 2 n ; in k k1 practice, the block size is k bits, where 2 n 2 . Encryption and decryption are of the following form, for some plaintext block M and ciphertext block C: C M e modn d e d ed M C modn (M ) modn M modn Both sender and receiver must know the value of n. The sender knows the value of e, and only receiver knows the value of d. Thus, this is a public-key encryption algorithm with a public key of KU={e,n}, and a private key of KR={d,n}. For this algorithm to be satisfactory for public-key encryption, the following requirements must be met: ed 1. It is possible to find values of e,d,n such that M M modn for all M Given two prime numbers, p and q, and two integers, n and m, such that n=pq and 0 ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 188 International Conference on Recent Trends in Arts, Science, Engineering and Technology The private key consists of {d,n}, and the public key consists of {e,n}. Suppose that user A has published its e public key and that user B wishes to send message M to A. Then B calculates C M modn and transmits C. d On receipt of this ciphertext, user A decrypts by calculating M C modn . It is worthwhile to summarize 1 the justification for this algorithm. We have chosen e and d such that d e mod(n) .Therefore ed 1mod(n) . Therefore, ed is of the form k(n) 1. But by the corollary to Euler‘s theorem (*), given k(n)1 k( p1)(q1)1 two prime numbers, p and q, and integer n=pq and M, with 0 CONCLUSION CBSRP designs a secure routing protocol in a cluster based environment. It makes use of the concept of RSA, for providing a secure environment in a cluster based network. The simulation results are provided to prove that the proposed protocol combines the merits of clustering approach and security. The proposed CBSRP chooses most reliable and stable node as cluster head depending on following criteria i.e.: stability, degree and trust value of the nodes. This proves to be beneficial for the stability and the reliability of clusters in a dynamic network. Formation of clusters, election of cluster heads and gateway nodes are other objectives of the proposed protocol. Simulation results prove that performance of CBSRP is better compared to other well-known basic routing protocols. REFERENCES 1. R.Sujee, Dr.Kannammal, ―Energy Efficient Adaptive Clustering Protocol Basedon Genetic Algorithm and Genetic Algorithm Inter Cluster Communication for Wireless SensorNetworks‖, 2017 International Conference on Computer Communication and Informatics (ICCCI -2017), IEEE 2017 2. Hassan Oudani, SalahddineKrit, Mustapha Kabrane, KaoutarBandaoud, Mohamed Elaskri, KhaoulaKarimi, HichamElbousty, LahoucineElmaimouni, ―Energy Efficient in Wireless Sensor Networks Using Cluster-Based Approach Routing‖ 3. JaydipSen ―Security in Wireless Sensor Networks‖ 4. Reza Azarderakhsh, ArashReyhani-Masoleh, and Zine-EddineAbid, ―A Key Management Scheme for Cluster Based Wireless Sensor Networks‖ 5. RajwinderKaur, Sandeep Singh Kang, ―A Secure Packet Handover Scheme using RSA Algorithm in Wireless Networks‖ 6. V.Saravanan, R.Rajkumar, ―Secure Source-Based Loose RSA Encryption for Synchronization (SSOBRSAS) and Evolutionary Clustering Based Energy Estimation for Wireless Sensor Networks‖, International Journal of Advanced Research in Computer Science, June 2014 7. Sandhyarani B H, NagnathBiradar ,T.S.Vishwanath, ―An Authenticative Way To Data Transmission For Cluster Based Wireless Sensor Network‖, IJRET: International Journal of Research in Engineering and Technology eISSN: 2319-1163 | pISSN: 2321-7308, May 2015 8. Sohini Roy, Diptipriyasinha, ―Cluster Based Secure Routing Protocol‖, IEEE 2014 9. Z. Yu and Y. Guan, ―A dynamic en-route scheme for filtering false data injection in wireless sensor networks,‖ Proc. of IEEE INFOCOM, pp. 1–12, April 2006. 10. F. Ye, H. Luo, S. Lu, and L. Zhang, ―Statistical en-route filtering of injected false data in sensor networks,‖ IEEE JSAC, vol. 23, no. 4, pp. 839–850, April 2005. 11. C. Kraub, M. Schneider, K. Bayarou, and C. Eckert, ―Stef: A secure ticket-based en-route filtering scheme for wireless sensor networks,‖ The 2nd Int. Conf. on Availability, Reliability and Security (ARES), pp. 310– 317, April 2007. 12. Y. Xiao, V. K. Rayi, B. Sun, X. Du, F. Hu, and M. Galloway, ―A survey of key management schemes in wireless sensor networks,‖ Comput. Commun., vol. 30, no. 11-12, pp. 2314–2341, 2007. 13. S. Ganeriwal, S. ˇCapkun, C.-C. Han, and M. B. Srivastava, ―Secure time synchronization service for sensor networks,‖ in Proc. of the ACM workshop on Wireless security (WiSe), 2005, pp. 97–106 14. H. Song, S. Zhu, and G. Cao, ―Attack-resilient time synchronization for wireless sensor networks,‖ Ad Hoc Networks, vol. 5, pp. 112–125, 2005. ISBN: 978-81-939938-3-5 Page 189